JAN 701 Instruction

JAN-701/901M
ECDIS
INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
For further information,contact:
Not use the asbestos
URL
http://www.jrc.co.jp
Marine Service Department

Telephone : +81-3-3492-1305
+81-3-3779-1420
Facsimile :
tmsc@jrc.co.jp
e-mail :
AMSTERDAM Branch
Telephone : +31-20-658-0750
+31-20-658-0755
Facsimile :
service@jrcams.nl
e-mail :
SEATTLE Branch
Telephone : +1-206-654-5644
Facsimile :
+1-206-654-7030
e-mail :
service@jrcamerica.com
CODE No.7ZPNA0513B
01ETM
JAN. 2007 Edition 3
ISO 9001,
Certified
9001ISO 14001 Certified
JRC
Printedin
in Japan
Japan
Printed
Cautions for High Voltage

High voltages, ranging from several hundreds to tens of thousands of volts, are used in
electronic apparatus, such as radio and radar instruments. These voltages are totally
harmless in most operations. However, touching a component inside the unit is very
dangerous. (Any person other than authorized service engineers should not service,
inspect, or adjust the unit.)
High voltages on the order of tens of thousand volts are most likely to cause instant
deaths from electrical shocks. At times, even voltages on the order of several hundred volts
could lead to electrocution. To defend against electrical shock hazards, don't put your hand
into the inside of apparatus. When you put in a hand unavoidably in case of urgent, it is
strongly suggested to turn off the power switch and allow the capacitors, etc. to discharge
with a wire having its one end positively grounded to remove residual charges. Before you
put your hand into the inside of apparatus, make sure that internal parts are no longer
charged. Extra protection is ensured by wearing dry cotton gloves at this time. Another
important precaution to observe is to keep one hand in your pocket at a time, instead of
using both hands at the same time.
It is also important to select a secure footing to work on, as the secondary effects of
electrical shock hazards can be more serious. In the event of electrical shocks, disinfect the
burnt site completely and obtain medical care immediately.
Precautions for Rescue of Victim of

Electric Shock
When a victim of electric shock is found, turn off the power source and ground the circuit
immediately. If this is impossible, move the victim away from the unit as quick as possible
without touching him or her with bare hands. He or she can safely be moved if an insulating
material such as dry wood plate or cloth is used.
Breathing may stop if current flows through the respiration center of brain due to electric
shock. If the electric shock is not large, breathing can be restored by artificial respiration. A
victim of electric shock looks pale and his or her pulse may become very weak or stop,
resulting in unconsciousness and rigidity at worst. It is necessary to perform first aid
immediately.
Method of First-Aid Treatment

Precautions for First-Aid Treatments
Whenever a person is struck by an electrical shock, give the patient artificial respiration
immediately on the spot, unless it is absolutely necessary to move the patient for safety's
sake. Once started, artificial respiration should be continued rhythmically.
(1) Refrain from touching the patient carelessly as a result of the accident; the first-aider
could suffer from electrical shocks by himself or herself.
(2) Turn off the power calmly and certainly, and move the patient apart from the cable
gently.
(3) Call or send for a physician or ambulance immediately, or ask someone to call doctor.
(4) Lay the patient on the back, loosening the necktie, clothes, belts and so on.
(5) (a) Feel the patient's pulse.
(b) Check the heartbeat by bringing your ear close to the patient's heart.
(c) Check for respiration by bringing your face or the back of your hand to the patient's
face.
(d) Check the size of patient's pupils.
(6) Opening the patient's mouth, remove artificial teeth, cigarettes, chewing gum, etc. if
any. With the patient's mouth open, stretch the tongue and insert a towel or the like into
the mouth to prevent the tongue from being withdrawn into the throat. (If the patient
clenches the teeth so tight that the mouth won't open, use a screwdriver or the like to
force the mouth open and then insert a towel or the like into the mouth.)
(7) Wipe off the mouth to prevent foaming mucus and saliva from accumulating.
Treatment to Give When the Patient Has a

Pulse Beating but Has Ceased to Breathe
Performing mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration - Fig. 1
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Bend the patient's face backward until it is directed to look back. (A pillow may be
placed under the neck.)
Pull up the lower jaw to open up the airway. (to spread the airway)
Pinching the patient's nose, breathe deeply and blow your breath into the patient's
mouth strongly, with care to close it completely. Then, move your mouth away and
take a deep breath, and blow into his or her mouth. Repeat blowing at 10 to 15 times
a minute (always with the patient's nostrils closed).
Continue artificial respiration until natural respiration is restored.
If the patient's mouth won't open easily, insert a pipe, such as one made of rubber or
vinyl, into either nostril. Then, take a deep breath and blow into the nostril through
the pipe, with the other nostril and the mouth completely closed.
The patient may stand up abruptly upon recovering consciousness. Keep the patient
lying calmly, giving him or her coffee, tea or any other hot drink (but not alcoholic
drink) to keep him or her warm.
Meouth-to-mouth artificial respiration with the patient's head lifted

(1) Lift the back part of the patient's
head. Support the forehead with one
of your hand and the neck with the
other hand..
Many patients will have their airways
opened by lifting their head in this
way to ease mouth-to-mouth artificial
respiration.
(2) Closing the patient's mouth with your

mouth, press your cheek against the
patient's nose.
Alternatively, hold the patient's nose
with your finger to prevent air leak
.
(3) Blowing air into the patient's lungs.
Blow air into the patient's lungs until
chest is seen to rise. The first 10
breaths must be blown as fast as
possible.
Fig.1 Mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration
Treatment to Give When the Patient Has No

Pulse Beating and Has Ceased to Breathe
Performing cardiac massage - Fig. 2
If the patient has no pulse beating, with the pupils open and no heartbeat being heard,
the patient has a cardiac arrest and requires immediate artificial respiration. Continue
this until a medical specialist arrives, and follow his or her directions after that.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Putting one hand on about the lower one third of the patient's ribs and the other hand
over the back of the first, with your elbow fully stretched (with bended elbow, you
cant press to the extent the patients ribs are depressed), apply your body weight to
the hands to press the patient's body until it is depressed about 2 cm (Repeat this
about 50 times a minute). (Cardiac massage.)
If only one first-aider is available, perform a cardiac massage about 15 times and
then give mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration 2 times. Repeat this sequence. If two
first-aiders are available, while one person performs a cardiac massage 15 times,
and the other should give mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration 2 times. Repeat this
sequence (combined cardiac massage and mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration
method).
Check the patient's pupils and feel the pulse from time to time. When the pupils are
restored to normal and the pulse begins to beat regularly, stop treating and keep the
patient calm while giving him or her coffee, tea or any other hot drink to keep him or
her warm while watching him or her carefully.
Fig.2 Cardiac massage
PREFACE
Thank you for purchasing the JRC JAN-701/901M ECDIS.
This equipment is ECDIS (Electronic Chart Display and Information System) meets
the performance standards of the IMO (International Maritime Organization) and the
IHO (International Hydro graphic Organization), and serves to improve safety,
reduce fuel combustion, reduce voyage time and automate voyages.
For the best operation and performance results, read this manual thoroughly
before use.
Keep this manual in a convenient place for future reference.
Make use of this manual when experiencing operation difficulties.
This LCD uses 1,310,000 (JAN-701)/1,920,000 (JAN-901M) or more TFTs (Thin
Film Transistor).
If some pixels on the screen are not clear, the color is different, or the screen is
brighter than usual, it is not because of defect, instead it is because of inherent
characteristic of the TFT display technology.
The information in this manual is subject to change without notice at any time.
Before Operation
Pictorial Indication
Various pictorial indications are included in this manual and are
shown on these equipment so that you can operate them safely
and correctly and prevent any danger to you and / or to other
persons and any damage to your property during operation. Such
indications and their meanings are as follows.
Please understand them before you read this manual:
This indication is shown where any person is supposed to be in
danger of being killed or seriously injured if this indication is
neglected and these equipment are not operated correctly.
This indication is shown where any person is supposed to be

injured or any property damage is supposed to occur if this
indication is neglected and these equipment are not operated
correctly.
Examples of pictorial indication

The mark represents CAUTION (including DANGER and WARNING).
Detailed contents of CAUTION (Electric Shock in the example on the
Electric left.) is shown in the mark.
The
mark represents prohibition.
Detailed contents of the prohibited action (Disassembling Prohibited in

Disassembling the example on the left) is shown in the mark.
The mark represents instruction.
Detailed contents of the instruction (Disconnect the power plug in the
example on the left) is shown in the mark.
Warning label
There is a warning label on the top cover of the equipment.
Do not try to remove, break or modify the label.
ii
Precautions Upon Equipment Operation
Never remove the cover of this equipment.

Touching the high-voltage section inside will cause an electric shock.
Do not attempt to disassemble or tamper with this equipment.

Otherwise, a fire, an electric shock, or a malfunction may occur.
Do not place a glass or cup containing water, etc., or a small metal object on
this equipment.
If water or such object gets inside, a fire, an electrical shock, or a malfunction
may occur.
In case water or a metal object gets inside the equipment, turn off the power
immediately, unplug the power supply cable from an electric outlet, and contact
our head office, or a nearby branch or local office to request servicing.
Keeping the equipment in operation under such condition may cause a fire, an
electric shock or a malfunction.
In case you find smoke, strange smell or unusual heat coming from the
equipment, turn off the power immediately, unplug the power supply cable from
an electric outlet, and contact our head office, or a nearby branch or local office
to request servicing.
Keeping the equipment in operation under such condition may cause a fire or
an electric shock.
Do not use the offset function during navigation.
If the equipment is used with the offset value entered as the own ship position,
the position of your ship displayed on the screen is shifted from the real one,
and accidents may result.
When the offset values are entered, the background color of the position panel
on the display panel is colored in sky blue, and the message Position Shift is
displayed in the message display area. Check these indications, and cancel the
offset function if necessary.
iii
Before starting automatic sailing, be sure to check the safety of the route and
crossing safety contour.
Otherwise, accidents may result.
If the own ship has arrived at the boundary of a WP during automatic sailing, be
sure to check the safety and perform turning manually (press the [TURN] key
while keeping the [GUARD] key pressed).
Otherwise, the ship keeps the course with the leg bearing, and accidents may
result.
Never attempt to check or repair the inside of the equipment.
Checking or repair by an unqualified person may cause a fire or an electric
shock.
Contact our head office, or a nearby branch or local office to request servicing.
Before disposing of used lithium batteries, insulate them by applying tapes on
their
and
terminals.
Otherwise, they may short-circuit to generate heat, explode or cause a fire.
If the LCD module breaks and the liquid inside spills out to stick to your skin,
wash it off immediately under running water for more than 15 minutes. If you
find any skin problem afterwards, consult a doctor immediately. If the liquid gets
in your eye, wash it off immediately under running water for more than 15
minutes, and then, consult a doctor as soon as possible.
iv
Do not use or leave the equipment under direct sunlight or in the temperatures
above 55C for a long time.
Otherwise, a fire or a malfunction may occur.
Do not block the ventilation opening of the equipment.
Otherwise, heat may accumulate inside to cause a fire or a malfunction.
This equipment is intended for use as an aid to navigation only.

If no backup measures are taken, such as using another ECDIS unit for
confirmation, be sure to use official marine charts together with this
equipment to make any navigational decision.
This equipment is not designed to assess the positional information
automatically for navigation.
The positional information should always be checked by the user against
such information from other sources.
Do not touch the equipment with hands or gloves wet with water.
Otherwise, an electric shock or a malfunction may occur.
Do not leave the floppy disk in the floppy disk drive after use.
Also, do not leave the CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.
Malfunctions of the drives may result.
Do not place any object on the operation panel.
Avoid placing anything extremely hot, in particular, as this may deform the
panel.
Do not apply any undue shock on the operation panel, trackball and dials.
Otherwise, a malfunction may result.
Do not turn on the power of the equipment with a floppy disk inserted in the
floppy disk drive.
The equipment will not start normally.
Edit routes in accordance with the world geodetic system (WGS-84).

Use of routes edited with any other geodetic systems may cause accidents.
During sailing, be sure to check own ships position and bearing as often as
necessary, regardless of whether the automatic sailing is in operation or not.
Do not turn off the power during index creation by Chart Portfolio.
Otherwise, a malfunction may occur.
If checking of the equipment is unavoidably necessary, be sure to turn off the

power before starting checking.
If a fan alarm or CPU temperature rise alarm has occurred, immediately turn off
the power.
Keeping the equipment in operation may cause a fire or a malfunction.
After turning off the power, contact our head office, or a nearby branch or local
office to request servicing.
To clean the surface of the equipment, do not use any organic solvent such as
thinner or benzene, as this may deteriorate the surface coating.
Use a clean, dry cloth to wipe off dirt and dust thoroughly from the surface of the
equipment.
vi
Equipment Appearance
Stand-alone type (JAN-701M)
vii
Stand-alone type (JAN-901M)
viii
Flash-mount type
ix
Glossary
AIS
: Automatic Identification System
ARCS
: Admiralty Raster Chart Service. A raster chart published by UKHO.
ARPA
: Automatic RADAR Plotting Aid. Collision prevention radar.
AUTHORIZATION CODE
: Encryption key for C-MAP Ed.2. Supplied by C-MAP Norway.
AUTO SAIL
: The system automatically navigates to keep the scheduled route. Same as

automatic sailing.
Base CD
: Chart CD containing a complete chart data.
Cell Permit
: A file containing an encryption key for S-63 chart. Supplied by UKHO,

PRIMAR STAVANGER, and Hydrographic and Oceanographic Department of
Japan Coast Guard.
Chart Portfolio
: Software to manage the charts. Imports and updates the charts.
C-MAP Ed.2
: C-MAP Edition 2. A digital chart format by C-MAP Norway.
C-MAP Ed.3
: C-MAP Edition 3. A digital chart format by C-MAP Norway.
C-MAP
: Nautical chart in a digital format by C-MAP Norway.
CO. TO STEER
: Course to steer. Heading command.
COG
: Course Over Ground
Data Server
: Organization providing S-63 chart.
Display
: Screen displayed on the LCD.
DIST.
: Distance
DR
: Dead Reckoning
EBL
: Electronic Bearing Lines
ECDIS
: Electronic Chart Display and Information System
ENC
: Electronic Navigation Chart. Meaning S-57 and S-63.
ETA
: Estimated Time of Arrival
ETD
: Estimated Time of Departure
F.ETA
: Final ETA. Estimated time of arrival to the final waypoint.
GC
: Great Circle
HDG
: Ships heading
Hydrographic and Oceanographic Department:

Hydrographic and Oceanographic Department of Japan Coast Guard.
Publisher of ENC.
Import (for Chart Portfolio)
: A procedure of enabling the chart supplied by Base CD to be displayed on

ECDIS.
Leg
: Line between two consecutive waypoints
LMT
: Local Mean Time
LON
: Longitude
Primary
: Main positioning sensor.
PRIMAR STAVANGER
: A Norwegian company supplying charts. Publisher of encrypted charts, S-63.
Range
: An area of the chart displayed on the screen. Represented by one half of the
length of the chart display screen.
RL
: Rhumb Line
Rubber band
: Border that indicates the selected range.
S-57
: IHO transfer standard for digital hydrographic data.
S-63
: IHO Data Protection Scheme
SA Certificate file
: An electronic file certifying the supplier of S-63 chart. Required for import/
update of S-63 chart.
Scale
: The display scale.
SENC
: System Electronic Navigational Chart
Ship-avoiding operation
: To operate the ship in order to avoid obstacles during automatic navigation,

regardless of the scheduled route.
SOG
: Speed Over Ground
Spot depth
: Numeric representation of depth.
TCS
: Track control systems
UKHO
: United Kingdom Hydrographic Office
xi
Update (for Chart Portfolio)
: A procedure of reflecting the update data supplied by Update CD on the

imported chart.
Update CD
: Chart CD containing the chart data updated from Base CD. Base CD data has
been imported.
USER CODE
: A user-specific code assigned by JRC. Required in using ARCS and S-63

charts.
UTC
: Coordinated Universal Time
VRM
: Variable Range Markers
WOL
: Wheel Over Line
WOP
: Wheel Over Point
WP
: Waypoint
WP-WP
: The division of the leg specified by two waypoints. Displays data between two
consecutive waypoints.
XTD
: Cross Track Distance
XTL
: Cross Track Limit
xii
Contents
PREFACE .................................................................................................................................................... i
Before Operation......................................................................................................................................... ii
Precautions Upon Equipment Operation ................................................................................................... iii
Equipment Appearance............................................................................................................................. vii
Glossary ...................................................................................................................................................... x
Chapter 1 Overview
1.1 Function.................................................................................................................................1-2
1.2 Features ................................................................................................................................1-3
1.3 Components ..........................................................................................................................1-4
1.4 Construction ..........................................................................................................................1-7
1.5 System Configuration..........................................................................................................1-13
Chapter 2 Names and Functions
2.1 Function of Operation Panel and LCD brilliance control.......................................................2-2
2.2 Function of the Screen ..........................................................................................................2-5
2.2.1 Display Panel..............................................................................................................2-7
2.2.2 Menu Title Bar ..........................................................................................................2-12
Chapter 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS
3.1 Menu Operation ....................................................................................................................3-3
3.1.1 How to Select the Menu .............................................................................................3-3
3.1.1.1 How to Use the Trackball ..............................................................................3-3
3.1.1.2 How to Select the Menu ................................................................................3-4
3.1.1.3 How to Use the Shortcut Menu .....................................................................3-7
3.1.2 Various Panels............................................................................................................3-8
3.1.3 How to Enter Numbers and Letters ..........................................................................3-10
3.1.3.1 Use of the PS/2 Keyboard...........................................................................3-10
3.1.3.2 Use of the Software Keyboard ....................................................................3-11
3.1.3.3 Numerical Input ...........................................................................................3-12
3.1.3.4 Character Input ...........................................................................................3-13
3.2 General Flowchart...............................................................................................................3-14
3.2.1 General Flowchart ....................................................................................................3-14
3.2.2 Flowchart for Sailing .................................................................................................3-15
3.3 Power ON/OFF and Preparation.........................................................................................3-17
3.3.1 Power ON ([POWER]) ..............................................................................................3-17
3.3.2 Selecting the Startup Menu ......................................................................................3-18
3.3.3 Startup Screen and ARCS PIN Input (ARCS Only)..................................................3-19
3.3.4 Power OFF Operation ..............................................................................................3-21
3.3.5 Adjusting the Brightness and Sound Volume ...........................................................3-21
3.3.6 Changing the Display Color ([DAY/NIGHT]).............................................................3-24
3.3.7 How to Release the Alarm ([ALARM ACK])..............................................................3-25
3.3.8 Displaying the Radar Image ([RADAR]) ...................................................................3-29
3.3.9 Turning the ARPA/AIS Target Display ON/OFF ([AIS/ARPA]) ..................................3-31
3.3.10 System Restoration in Case of Abnormal Operations............................................3-37
3.3.11 Using the CD Drive and Floppy Disk Drive.............................................................3-38
3.4 Selecting ROUTE and To WP .............................................................................................3-39
3.4.1 Selecting ROUTE and To WP Using the Display Panel ...........................................3-39

3.4.2 Selecting ROUTE and To WP from the Menu ..........................................................3-40
3.4.3 Calculating Distance to Run .....................................................................................3-42
3.5 Changing the Object Category (S-57/C-MAP Only)............................................................3-45
3.6 Shifting the Chart.................................................................................................................3-47
3.6.1 Shifting the Chart with the [HOME] button ...............................................................3-47
3.6.2 Shifting the Chart with the Cross Cursor ..................................................................3-48
3.6.3 Shifting the Chart with the Hand Cursor...................................................................3-49
3.6.4 Shifting the Chart with the [PORT LIST] Button .......................................................3-49
3.6.5 Displaying the Chart by Entering the Position..........................................................3-50
3.7 Zooming In/Out the Chart (S-57/C-MAP Only) ...................................................................3-51
3.7.1 Zooming Area Using the Rubber Band (S-57/C-MAP Only) ....................................3-51
3.7.2 Zooming In/Out (S-57/C-MAP Only).........................................................................3-52
3.7.3 Switching the Range (S-57/C-MAP Only) ................................................................3-53
3.7.4 Switching the Scale (S-57/C-MAP Only) ..................................................................3-54
3.8 ARCS Chart Display Options (ARCS Only) ........................................................................3-55
3.8.1 High Resolution Area Selection (ARCS Only)..........................................................3-55
3.8.2 Selecting Larger/Smaller Chart (ARCS Only) ..........................................................3-55
3.8.3 Selecting Chart under Cursor (ARCS Only) .............................................................3-56
3.8.4 Selecting Chart from All (ARCS Only) ......................................................................3-57
3.8.5 Changing Active Panels (ARCS Only)......................................................................3-58
3.8.6 Loading a Low Resolution Chart (ARCS Only) ........................................................3-59
3.8.7 To Select the High Resolution Chart (ARCS Only) ..................................................3-59
3.8.8 Displaying the Note and Diagram (ARCS Only).......................................................3-60
3.8.9 Displaying Temporary and Preliminary Notice (ARCS Only)....................................3-61
3.8.10 Adjusting Datum (ARCS Only) ...............................................................................3-62
3.9 Selecting a S-57 Chart (S-57 Only).....................................................................................3-66
3.10 Displaying a User Chart ....................................................................................................3-67
3.11 Accepting the S-57 Updating Chart ...................................................................................3-68
3.12 User-Marking/Highlighting.................................................................................................3-69
3.12.1 Marking the Event Mark (EVENT) ..........................................................................3-69
3.12.2 Marking the Information Mark.................................................................................3-71
3.12.3 Marking the Tidal Stream Mark...............................................................................3-72
3.12.4 Highlighting.............................................................................................................3-73
3.12.5 Inputting Clearing Lines..........................................................................................3-74
3.13 Reading Out Information on the Objects...........................................................................3-75
3.14 Displaying Chart in Various Ways (Multi View/Wide View) ...............................................3-78
3.14.1 Multi View Screen...................................................................................................3-78
3.14.2 Selecting an Area ...................................................................................................3-79
3.14.3 Wide View Screen (S-57/C-MAP Only) ..................................................................3-80
3.15 Using the Analog Meter.....................................................................................................3-81
3.16 Own Ships Setting ([Ship] - [Option]) ...............................................................................3-82
3.16.1 Ships Shape ..........................................................................................................3-83
3.16.2 Vector Display and Heading Line at Primary Position............................................3-84
3.16.3 Danger Detection Vector and Sector......................................................................3-85
3.16.4 Track and Time Label Display ................................................................................3-86
3.16.5 Beam Bearing Line .................................................................................................3-87
3.17 Operating EBL/VRM..........................................................................................................3-88

3.17.1 Operating EBL/VRM Using the Operation Panel ...................................................3-88
3.17.2 Operating EBL/VRM Using the Menu.....................................................................3-92
3.17.2.1 Selecting 1-step/2-step Option..................................................................3-92
3.17.2.2 1-step Operation .......................................................................................3-92
3.17.2.3 2-step Operation .......................................................................................3-97
3.18 Running Fix .....................................................................................................................3-101
3.19 Maneuver Curve..............................................................................................................3-102
3.20 Cross Bearing..................................................................................................................3-104
3.21 Selecting Motion/Azimuth Mode......................................................................................3-106
3.21.1 Selecting Motion Mode.........................................................................................3-108
3.21.2 Selecting Azimuth Mode (S-57/C-MAP Only).......................................................3-109
3.21.3 Setting Chart Fix Mode.........................................................................................3-109
3.22 My Port List ..................................................................................................................... 3-111
3.22.1 Adding to My Port List .......................................................................................... 3-111
3.22.2 Deleting My Port List ............................................................................................3-112
3.23 Logbook...........................................................................................................................3-113
3.23.1 Displaying the Logbook ........................................................................................3-113
3.23.2 Setting Logbook Options ......................................................................................3-116
3.24 Setting the Chart Options................................................................................................3-118
3.24.1 Setting S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Options.....................................................................3-118
3.24.2 Setting Other Chart Options .................................................................................3-133
3.24.3 Setting Scales.......................................................................................................3-134
3.25 Setting the Alarm Options ...............................................................................................3-135
3.26 Monitoring Dragging Anchor............................................................................................3-137
3.27 Setting the View Options ([View])....................................................................................3-139
3.27.1 Setting Radar Options ..........................................................................................3-139
3.27.2 Setting ARPA/AIS Options....................................................................................3-140
3.27.3 Setting Analog Meter Options...............................................................................3-144
3.27.4 Setting Logbook Options ......................................................................................3-144
3.27.5 Clear Voyage Distance .........................................................................................3-144
3.27.6 Setting Date/Time.................................................................................................3-145
3.28 Shifting Own Ship Position..............................................................................................3-146
3.28.1 Shifting Using the Cursor .....................................................................................3-148
3.28.2 Shifting by Entering the Position ..........................................................................3-148
3.28.3 Shifting by Entering the Offset Value....................................................................3-149
3.29 Canceling the Ship Offset ...............................................................................................3-149
3.30 Printing Display (Only when Connected to a Printer)......................................................3-149
3.31 Saving the Screen (Only when Connected to Backup Device).......................................3-150
3.32 Displaying the Startup Menu (Exit the Navigation & Planning) .......................................3-150
Chapter 4 Route Planning
4.1 Route Planning......................................................................................................................4-2
4.1.1 Setting the Route Options ..........................................................................................4-4
4.1.2 Route Planning Using the Table Editor.......................................................................4-8
4.1.2.1 Table Editing Mode........................................................................................4-8
4.1.2.2 Table Editing Menu and Button Functions (Table Editor) ..............................4-9
4.1.2.3 Operation Flowchart for Table Editor...........................................................4-13
4.1.2.4 Making a New Route File (Table Editor) .....................................................4-15

4.1.2.5 Editing a Previous Route File (Table Editor) ...............................................4-25
4.1.2.6 Importing Route Files ..................................................................................4-26
4.1.2.7 Exporting Route Files..................................................................................4-27
4.1.3 Route Planning Using the Graphic Editor.................................................................4-28
4.1.3.1 Graphic Editing Mode..................................................................................4-28
4.1.3.2 Graphic Editing Menu and Button Functions (Graphic Editor)....................4-29
4.1.3.3 Operation Flowchart for Graphic Editor (Graphic Editing) ..........................4-34
4.1.3.4 Making a New Route File (Graphic Editing)................................................4-36
4.1.3.5 Editing a Previous Route File (Graphic Editor) ...........................................4-50
4.1.3.6 Importing Route Files ..................................................................................4-51
4.1.3.7 Exporting Route Files..................................................................................4-52
4.1.3.8 Creating a Route Using EBL/VRM Keys and Dials.....................................4-53
4.2 Creating an Alternate Route................................................................................................4-56
4.2.1 Operation Flowchart .................................................................................................4-56
4.2.2 Creating Alternate Route ..........................................................................................4-57
Chapter 5 Chart Editing
5.1 Chart Edit Mode ....................................................................................................................5-3
5.2 Menus and Button Functions ................................................................................................5-4
5.2.1 Chart Editing Menu.....................................................................................................5-4
5.2.2 Button Functions.........................................................................................................5-8
5.3 Operation Flowchart..............................................................................................................5-9
5.3.1 Flow of User Chart Edit ..............................................................................................5-9
5.3.2 Operation when Editing User Charts........................................................................5-11
5.3.2.1 Creating a New User Chart .........................................................................5-11
5.3.2.2 Editing a User Chart....................................................................................5-14
5.3.2.3 Merging User Charts ...................................................................................5-16
5.3.2.4 Importing User Charts .................................................................................5-17
5.4 Manual Update Operation ...................................................................................................5-18
5.4.1 Flow of Manual Update.............................................................................................5-18
5.4.2 Operation when Manually Updating Objects............................................................5-19
5.5 Entering Objects..................................................................................................................5-22
5.5.1 Selecting Object Types.............................................................................................5-24
5.5.2 Entering Objects .......................................................................................................5-25
5.5.3 Hiding Objects (Only during the Manual Update Operation)....................................5-38
Chapter 6 Automatic Sailing
6.1 Automatic Sailing System......................................................................................................6-2
6.1.1 Change of Course (Turning).......................................................................................6-2
6.1.2 Route Monitoring and System Alarm..........................................................................6-3
6.2 Setting the Automatic Sailing ................................................................................................6-4
6.3 Automatic Sailing Operation..................................................................................................6-6
6.3.1 Selecting the Route and the WP ................................................................................6-7
6.3.2 Start Automatic Sailing................................................................................................6-7
6.3.3 Terminating the Automatic Sailing ..............................................................................6-8
Chapter 7 Tool Menu/ Maintenance Menu
7.1 File Manager .........................................................................................................................7-3
7.2 Chart Abbreviations...............................................................................................................7-5
7.3 Setting the User Key .............................................................................................................7-6

7.4 Connection ............................................................................................................................7-7
7.5 Sensor ...................................................................................................................................7-8
7.5.1 Primary Position and Secondary Position ..................................................................7-8
7.5.2 Bearing Setting ...........................................................................................................7-9
7.5.3 Speed Setting .............................................................................................................7-9
7.5.4 Depth Setting............................................................................................................7-10
7.5.5 Date Data Source Setting.........................................................................................7-10
7.5.6 Time Zone Data Source Setting ...............................................................................7-10
7.6 Color Test (ARCS Only) ......................................................................................................7-11
Chapter 8 Chart Portfolio
8.1 Entering/Exiting the Chart Portfolio .......................................................................................8-2
8.2 Chart Portfolio Screen ...........................................................................................................8-5
8.3 Overview Flow Chart...........................................................................................................8-20
8.3.1 Overview Flow Chart ................................................................................................8-20
8.3.2 Import/Update of S-57 Chart ....................................................................................8-26
8.3.2.1 Import of S-57 Chart in Chart Portfolio........................................................8-26
8.3.2.2 Update of S-57 Chart in Chart Portfolio ......................................................8-30
8.3.3 Import/Update of S-63 Chart ....................................................................................8-34
8.3.3.1 Import of SA Certificate file..........................................................................8-34
8.3.3.2 Selection of SA Certificate file .....................................................................8-37
8.3.3.3 Import of Cell Permit ...................................................................................8-38
8.3.3.4 Import of S-63 Chart....................................................................................8-41
8.3.3.5 Update of S-63 Chart ..................................................................................8-44
8.3.4 Import/Update of ARCS Chart ..................................................................................8-48
8.3.4.1 Checkup of ARCS .......................................................................................8-48
8.3.4.2 Import of ARCS in Chart Portfolio ...............................................................8-49
8.3.4.3 Update of ARCS in Chart Portfolio ..............................................................8-56
8.3.5 Import/Update of C-MAP Ed.2 Chart........................................................................8-59
8.3.5.1 Checkup of C-MAP Ed.2 .............................................................................8-59
8.3.5.2 Import of C-MAP Ed.2 Chart in Chart Portfolio ...........................................8-61
8.3.5.3 Update of C-MAP Ed.2 Chart in Chart Portfolio..........................................8-66
8.3.6 Import/Update of C-MAP Ed.3..................................................................................8-68
8.3.6.1 Checkup of C-MAP Ed.3 .............................................................................8-68
8.3.6.2 Import of C-MAP Ed.3 Chart in Chart Portfolio ...........................................8-69
8.3.6.3 Update of C-MAP Ed.3 Chart in Chart Portfolio..........................................8-81
8.3.6.4 Update of C-MAP Ed.3 Chart with E-mail ...................................................8-83
8.4 Editing Operations (For C-MAP Ed.2).................................................................................8-93
8.4.1 Selectable Filter ON/OFF Selection (Selectable Filter)............................................8-93
8.4.2 Selecting all Source Charts (Select All)....................................................................8-93
8.4.3 Deleting the System Chart (Delete)..........................................................................8-93
8.5 Filtering the Source Charts (For C-MAP Ed.2)....................................................................8-94
8.6 View Operations ..................................................................................................................8-95
8.6.1 Getting Chart Information ([Information]) .................................................................8-95
8.6.2 Viewing the ARCS License Information (For ARCS)................................................8-96
8.6.3 Viewing the Version Information of the Chart Portfolio.............................................8-96
8.7 Setting the Chart Portfolio ...................................................................................................8-97
8.7.1 [S-57] Accepting Chart Update.................................................................................8-97

8.7.2 Setting the S-63 Options ..........................................................................................8-98
8.7.3 Setting the C-MAP Options ......................................................................................8-99
8.7.4 Setting the ARCS Options ......................................................................................8-100
8.7.5 Setting the Boot Options ........................................................................................8-100
8.7.6 Setting the Advanced Options ................................................................................8-101
Chapter 9 Playback
9.1 Entering/Exiting the Playback ...............................................................................................9-2
9.2 Playing Back the Logging Data .............................................................................................9-8
Chapter 10 Maintenance and Inspection
10.1 Confirming Alarm...............................................................................................................10-3
10.2 Daily Maintenance.............................................................................................................10-4
10.2.1 Color Pattern (S-57) ...............................................................................................10-5
10.2.2 Gray Scale..............................................................................................................10-6
10.3 Replacing Consumables ...................................................................................................10-7
10.4 The PWR FAIL Lamp and Power Supply Input .................................................................10-7
10.5 User Maintenance Menu ...................................................................................................10-8
10.5.1 Backup Option ........................................................................................................10-8
10.5.2 Hardware Key Information....................................................................................10-10
10.6 Troubleshooting...............................................................................................................10-11
Chapter 11 After-Sales Service
11.1 Maintenance Service .........................................................................................................11-2
11.2 Retention Period of Repair Parts.......................................................................................11-2
11.3 When Asking for Service ...................................................................................................11-2
11.4 Checks and Inspection ......................................................................................................11-2
Chapter 12 Disposal
12.1 Disposal of the Product .....................................................................................................12-2
12.2 Disposal of Used Batteries................................................................................................12-2
12.3 Disposal of LCD Module ...................................................................................................12-2
Chapter 13 Specifications
13.1 Bridge Display Terminal ....................................................................................................13-2
Chapter 14 Reference
14.1 Alarm Fuction ....................................................................................................................14-2
14.2 Chart-Related Alarm Information.......................................................................................14-6
14.2.1 Alarm Information of ARCS Chart...........................................................................14-6
14.2.2 Alarm Information of C-MAP Ed.3 Chart ................................................................14-7
14.2.3 Alarm Information of S-57/S-63 Chart ....................................................................14-8
14.3 Abbreviation for Geodetic System...................................................................................14-12
14.4 Data Formats of Files that ECDIS can Import/Export .....................................................14-13
14.4.1 File Types .............................................................................................................14-13
14.4.2 File Names ...........................................................................................................14-13
14.4.3 CSV File Data Structure .......................................................................................14-13
14.4.3.1 Route Files ..............................................................................................14-14
14.4.3.2 User Chart Files ......................................................................................14-19
14.4.3.3 Logbook File............................................................................................14-31
Index
END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR JAN-701/901M SERIES ECDIS SOFTWARE
Repair Request Form
Overview
1-1
1.1 Function
This equipment is navigation system with ECDIS (Electronic Chart Display and Information System)
functions conforming to the ECDIS Performance Standards adopted in Resolution A.817 at the general
assembly of the IMO. Consequently, this equipment can become the core of an integrated navigation
system (INS) or integrated bridge system (IBS) that supports one-man bridge operation.
Safe sailing
Energy-saved sailing
ECDIS
Compliance with the ECDIS defined by the IHO/IMO
Availability of S-57edition 3.0/3.1 (supporting S-63) format, C-MAP Ed.2/Ed.3, and ARCS as chart
databases (when C-MAP Ed3 is used with the optional C-MAP Ed3 upgrade kit)
Own ships track display and planned-route display on the electronic chart
Automatic checking of the safety contours and dangerous areas of the own ship (not available for
ARCS)
ARPA target display and AIS target display on the electronic chart
Superimpose display of radar echo on the electronic chart (when ECDIS is used with the optional
radar overlay kit)
True/Relative motion display
North-up/Course-up display
Display of route information such as latitude/longitude at destinations, bearings/distances up to
waypoints, and planned arrival time
Availability of two EBLs/VRMs
Writing of memos with alphabetic characters into the electronic chart
Display of information such as the date/time, current position, heading, and ships speed
Display specifications
Size: 18.1-inch color LCD (JAN-701)
23.1-inch color LCD (JAN-901M)
Selection of colors (conforming to the IMO/IHO) suitable for the daytime, nighttime, dawn, and
dusk Display of the symbols and colors recommended by the IHO
Navigation Planning
Editing of route information
Addition, deletion, and modification of waypoints on the electronic chart
Calculation of the distance between waypoints, bearings, and planned arrival time
Up to 512 waypoints per route
Checking on the crossing of the safety contours and dangerous areas on created routes
Automatic sailing functions

Route tracking
Course change
Alarm functions
Safety depth crossing alarm

Dangerous areas crossing alarm
Waypoint arrival alarm
XTD alarm
Logging functions
Logging of navigation information onto the hard disk
Own ships playback using logged data
1 Overview
1-2
1.2 Features
This ECDIS has the following features:
Displays vector charts such as S-57 and C-MAP, and raster charts such as ARCS
Safe navigation ensured by the crossing alarm function for safety contours and dangerous areas
and the guard ring function (not available for ARCS)
Optimized displays of navigation warnings, weather warnings, and emergency messages from the
connected Navtex receiver
Ease of operation supported by high-speed drawing and high-speed processing
Ease of user chart creation
Multi view function to display two charts at a time (not available for C-MAP Ed.3 and ARCS)
Wide range view in addition to single or multi view
Route planning in two ways, using table editor or graphic editor
Creation of alternative route during voyage
Automatic sailing by connecting with autopilot
Playback function to check the voyage
S-57 update portfolio
1-3
1 Overview
1.3 Components
A list of components and optional accessories is shown below.
Components
Name
Model
Quantity
Comment
Bridge Display Terminal
Display Panel
(JAN-701)
NCD-4224
(JAN-901M)
NCD-4308
(JAN-701)
NWZ-147-AC
(JAN-901M)
NWZ-158
Main Unit
Included in the main unit

Either type A or B is included in the main
unit.
Type A has an automatic sailing function.
Type B does not have an automatic sailing
function.
Operation panel (type A)
NCE-7721-A
Operation panel (type B)
NCE-7721-B
(JAN-701)
NDC-1264
(JAN-901M)
NDC-1309
Instruction Manual (Japanese)
7ZPNA0512
Instruction Manual (English)
7ZPNA0513
Analog Interface Kit
MPXP32636
Option NOTE 1)
Serial Interface Kit
MPXP32637
Option NOTE 2)
Radar overlay kit
MPXP32691
Option
C-MAP Ed3 Upgrade kit
MPXP33436
Option
Optional keyboard
NCE-5009
Processing unit
(JAN-701)
MPXP33088
(JAN-901M)
MPXP33089
(JAN-701)
MPOL30350
(JAN-901M)
MPOL30345
Spare Parts (CMJ-462 NSK I/F)
Canvas cover
Lightproof hood
Accessary
CD Cleaner
FD Cleaner
Option
Option
7ZZNA0400
12pcs, 0.5A
7ZZNA0426
Packing in 1box
Note 1) The analog interface kit (MPXP32636) includes the serial interface kit (MPXP32637). See
the packing list included with the kit.
Note 2) If only the serial interface kit is needed and the analog interface is not necessary, then please
request MPXP32637. See the packing list included with the kit.
1 Overview
1-4
1-5
1 Overview
Analog I/F Kit

MPXP32636
1 Overview
1-6
Serial I/F Kit

MPXP32637
1.4 Construction
The outline drawing of the unit is shown below.
Mass: Approx. 125 kg
Cable Inlet
NCD-4224 Bridge Display Terminal (JAN-701)
1-7
1 Overview
Mass: Approx. 150kg
Cable Inlet
NCD-4308 Bridge Display Terminal (JAN-901M)
1 Overview
1-8
1-9
1 Overview
Flash-mount type
NDC-1264 Processing Unit
MASS:APPROX. 85kg
1 Overview
1-10
Flash-mount type
NWZ-147-AC 18.1 LCD Unit
MASS:APPROX. 10kg
1-11
1 Overview
Flash-mount type
NWZ-158 Display Panel
MASS:APPROX. 25kg
MASS:APPROX. 3.1kg
NCE7721-A Operation Panel (Type A)
MASS:APPROX. 3.1kg
NCE7721-B Operation Panel (Type B)
1 Overview
1-12
1.5 System Configuration

The following diagram shows an example system configuration connected with this equipment.
When ECDIS mode is used, it displays navigation data received from the sensor.
When Conning Display mode is used, it displays navigation data received from the external ECDIS
connected with the equipment.
1-13
1 Overview
Names
and
Functions
2-1
This equipment can be operated both from the Operation panel and the display.
2.1 Function of Operation Panel

and LCD brilliance control
(1) Function of operation panel
Fig. 2.1 and Fig. 2.2 show the operation panel. Table 2.1 describes the name and function of each
part on the operation panel.
28
29
25
10
23
11
14
12
15
17
18
13
20
24
16
26
27
19
21
22
Fig. 2.1 Operation Panel (Type A)
23
25
10
11
14
12
17
13
15
18
20
24
16
19
21
22
Fig. 2.2 Operation Panel (Type B)
2 Names and Functions
2-2
26
27
Table 2.1 Names and Functions

No.
Name
Function
POWER
Turns the power on.
PWR FAIL
Indicates the AC power supply error.

(See 10.4 The PWR FAIL Lamp and Power Supply Input.)
PWR ACK
Stops the alarm at occurrence of PWR FAIL.

(See 10.4 The PWR FAIL Lamp and Power Supply Input.)
VIDEO*1
Adjusts the brightness of radar echoes.
5
6
RAIN
*1
Suppresses rain/snow clutter.
*1
SEA
Suppresses sea clutter.
*1
GAIN
RANGE
Adjusts receiver gain.
Range up.
Range down.
*1
RADAR
Turns ON/OFF the radar echo display on the chart.
10
ALARM ACK
Press to acknowledge an alarm.
11
ROUTE PLAN
Starts/ends route the route planning function (table editor).
12
DAY/NIGHT
Changes the display color of the screen to suit the lighting conditions of the bridge.
13
PANEL
Dims the operation panel in five steps.
14
TGT DATA
Displays the detailed information of a selected ARPA or AIS target.
15
AIS ACT
Activate a selected AIS target.
16
AIS IN-ACT
Deactivate a selected AIS target.
17
AIS/ARPA
Selects AIS/ARPA display.
18
INFO
Reads out the attributes of each object on the chart.
19
HOME
Returns the own ships position into the display.
20
USER
One of the following user-registered functions is executed:

(See 7.3 Setting the User Key.)
- Starting the route graphic editor
- Starting the chart editor
- Displaying the chart option setting screen
- Displaying the own ships option setting screen
- Adding to the port name list
- Changing the ARCSs active panel
- Loading ARCSs low resolution
- Displaying the logbook
- Printing the screen contents
21
OPTION 1*2
22
OPTION 2
*2
23
EBL1/EBL2
Turns the Electronic Bearing Line ON/OFF, and operates the Electronic
Bearing Line.
24
VRM1/VRM2
Turns the Variable Range Marker ON/OFF, and operates the Variable
Range Marker.
25
TRACK BALL
The trackball is used to move the cursor on the screen for position
designation, selection of buttons on the display panel, menu
designation, etc.
26
LEFT BUTTON
Used for selecting a button, menus and options on the screen.

Pressing the left button is written as left-click in this book.
27
RIGHT BUTTON
Used for confirming alarms.

Pressing the right button is written as right-click in this book.
Makes copies of the screen contents and save them into the external equipment.
Starts the software keyboard.
2-3
Table 2.1 Names and Functions (Continued)

No.
28
Name
*3
AUTO
SAILING
29
*3
Function
GUARD
Used in combination with the [AUTO] or [TURN] switches.
*4
AUTO
Starts or stops automatic sailing.

Use this switch in combination with the [GUARD] switch.
TURN*4
Starts turning.
Use this switch in combination with the [GUARD] switch.
SET CO.
This switch is also used to create maneuver curves.
JOYSTICK
Use this switch to create maneuver curves.
*1: Effective only when an optional radar overlay kit is installed.

*2: May not be effective depending on the system configuration used.
*3: Effective only when type A operation panel is used.
*4: Effective only when the equipment is linked to auto pilot.
(2) LCD brilliance control

The screens brightness can be adjusted by using the brilliance control on the display panel.
By keeping the brilliance control pressed, the screen s brightness will be adjusted to an optimal
condition automatically.
JAN-701
Brilliance control
JAN-901M
Brilliance control
Note:
For JAN-901M, pressing the brilliance control will automatically adjust the screen s brightness to
an optimal condition.
When the adjustment is completed, AUTO ADJUSTMENT COMPLETE will appear on the display.
Press the brilliance control again to erase the indication.
2-4
2.2 Function of the Screen

The screen consists of two areas, the chart display area and display panel (information display area). The
menu title bar appears when this equipment enters the menu mode.
<MENU
Menu title bar
<MENU
North arrow mark
Chart display area

Message display area 1
Display panel
Message display area 2
Chart Display Area:

The chart display area displays the electronic chart stored on hard disk. (S-57, C-MAP and/or ARCS
charts)
On the chart, the following will be displayed according to your settings:
Your ships symbol and vector at the primary position
Your ships symbol and vector at the secondary position
Head line
Primary position track and time label
Secondary position track
EBL/VRM markers
RADAR echo
Other ship symbols, vectors and ships track (when ARPA/AIS is installed)
etc.
Also, various screen panels will be displayed on electronic charts according to the function in use.
Message Display Area 1:

When an alarm occurs, an alarm display button (see 2.2.1 Display Panel) will flash, and the details of
the alarm will be displayed at the same time. When multiple alarms occur at the same time, the detailed
alarm information will be displayed alternately for fixed intervals. When an alarm is released (see 3.3.7
How to Release the Alarm ([ALARM ACK])), the details of the alarm will no longer be displayed.
Message Display Area 2:

Position shifts and other caution messages will be displayed. These messages will be displayed as long
as the condition persists. No alarms will occur even if a message is displayed in this area.
2-5
Display Panel:
The display panel displays various navigation information for sailing including alarms. Also, buttons that
will be frequently used for navigation operation are arranged in this panel.
Memo: All of the button functions in the display panel can be accomplished by the menu operation.
Menu Title Bar:

When the [MENU] button on the display panel is left-clicked, the menu title bar opens on top of the screen
to allow menu operation.
Left-clicking the [MENU] button once again or left-clicking the chart display area will close the menu title
bar.
2-6
2.2.1 Display Panel

The contents of display panel will change according to the chart being selected, either S-57/C-MAP or
ARCS. The following shows the typical displays common to S-57/C-MAP and ARCS.
Name of positioning system
Name of primary system position
Geodetic system name
[MENU] button used to enter the menu mode.
Course and speed of primary (The vector of the vessels motion
over the ground.)
Ships heading
Log speed (speed through the water)
Course to steer (CTS) (It is displayed during Automatic Sailing.)
Vector time
Depth
Date and time of Local Mean Time. (
) shows the time zone.
Current primary system position (Latitude/Longitude)

Route name being selected (UNLOAD appears if nothing is
selected. Drop-down list shows all route names.)
Next waypoint being selected (Drop-down list shows the selectable
waypoints manually.)
Auto sailing status. See Auto Sailing Status Panel on page 2-11.
Information panel for To WP, XTD, Dest WP, Route and
Drift. See page 2-10 and 2-11.
The contents of this CHART panel differs depending on the chart

type. For S-57/C-MAP, see page 2-8. For ARCS, see page 2-9.
Alarm display buttons. Up to 3 alarm names and the number of alarms are
displayed. e.g. ARR (Arrival) To see all alarms, left-click the [Alarm List]
button. You will see the detailed description of each alarm.
Software keyboard.
See 3.1.3.2 Use of the Software Keyboard.
Displays the system name from which information is received.
RADAR 1
ARPA 1
AIS
AIS (Automatic Identification System)

ARPA 1, ARPA2, or ARPA 1/2
RADAR 1 or RADAR 2
Coordinate of the cursor position (C : Cursor)

Bearing and distance from own ship
2-7
(1) CHART Panel

CHART Panel for S-57/C-MAP
When left-clicked, shows the registered port name list. Selected port
name position will be displayed on the chart.
When left-clicked, EVENT mark is put at the own ship position.
SENC (System Electronic Navigation Chart) information level selection
buttons. When the button is lit in green, corresponding SENC is
displayed.
BASE: Shows basic information such as geographic area. (This is not
intended to be sufficient for safe navigation.)
STANDARD:
Shows standard information (First selection at power ON).
!:
Shows all objects that belong to standard information.
OTHER: Shows all information.
The selecting Drop-down list is lit in green.

Scale of the chart being displayed (Drop-down list shows all
available scales.)
Range of the chart being displayed (Drop-down list shows all
available ranges.)
Motion (selectable with the drop-down list button)
True:
Your ship moves on the chart. When the ship reaches
the predetermined limit on the screen, the chart is
automatically shifted to keep display the ship.
Relative:
Your ship stays on the screen and the geographic
objects move instead.
Free:
Chart is displayed regardless of the ships movement.
Azimuth (selectable with the drop-down list button)
North Up: The chart always orients north.
Course Up: Your ships heading always faces up on the screen.
(The chart rotates. This is effective in the relative mode.)
Rotation:
You can rotate the chart by the specified amount
using the degree specifying box on this panel.
Rotational degree entry box for Azimuth Rotation.

When Fix button is clicked (in red), the currently displayed chart is
held even if zoom in or zoom out are used.
HOME:
Displays your ship on the screen.
Zoom Area: You can magnify the specified area using a rubber
band.
Wide View: You can display additional wide range view in the
display panel area, which makes you easier to see
your ships geometric position.
Zoom In:
You can magnify the range.
Zoom Out: You can reduce the range.
2-8
CHART Panel for ARCS
Note:
Function of the [EVENT], [PORT LIST] and [HOME]
buttons is the same as for S-57/C-MAP.
Displays the geodetic system of the chart.

Displays the original scale of the chart.
Scale of the chart being displayed
Range of the chart being displayed
Motion (selectable with the drop-down list button)
True:
Your ship moves on the chart. When the ship reaches
the predetermined limit on the screen, the chart is
automatically shifted to keep display the ship.
Relative: Your ship stays at the center of the chart and the
geographic objects move instead.
Free:
Chart is displayed regardless of the ships movement.
Chart offset values
Selects a larger chart.

Selects a smaller chart.
Opens the Select Chart panel. You can select the ARCS chart
you want. See, 3.8.4 Selecting Chart from All (ARCS Only).
2-9
(2) To WP, XTD, Dest WP, Route and Drift Panels

To WP:
Distance from the ship to the to
Bearing from the ship to the to
waypoint
waypoint
Estimated Time To Go to the to
waypoint
Estimated Time of Arrival at the to

Speed to arrive at the to
waypoint
waypointby the planned time
XTD:
Track deviation (Deviation from the direct route.)
Cross Track Limit (Port side)
Cross Track Limit (Starboard side)
Dest WP:
Select from Actual Speed / Calc. Ave. Speed / Calc. ETA
Actual Speed:
Displays time to go and estimated time of arrival to the
destination No. by the actual speed
Calc. Ave. Speed:
Displays speed to the destination No. by the setting of
estimated time of arrival
Calc. ETA:
Displays time to go and estimated time of arrival to the
destination No. by the setting of speed
Destined waypoint (selectable from the drop-down list)

Speed to arrive at the destined waypoint by the estimated time of arrival
Distance from own ship to the waypoint.
distance, but the total distance of the leg.)
(Not the straight-line
Time To Go to the destined waypoint

Estimated Time of Arrival at the destined waypoint
2-10
Route:
New Course
To WP
[New Course]
Own Ship
Drift:
Current direction calculated by the difference between the COG and

HDG vectors
Current speed calculated by the difference between the COG and
HDG vectors.
(3) Auto Sailing Status Panel

The auto sailing status panel will be displayed as follows:
Displays the autopilot steering mode.

See the autopilot instruction manual for descriptions of the various
steering modes.
BLANK: Not Auto Sailing
BLANK:
Not Auto Sailing
MAN:
KEEP:
Keep tracking the current leg
Manual Turning mode
AUTO: Auto Turning mode
DIRECT: Direct route to Waypoint

TURN:
Changing the steering
AVOID:
Under ship-avoiding operation
NotRDY: Not ready to Auto Sailing (The route has not been loaded, or a POS1, Gyro,
Log, or A/P alarm has occurred.)
READY:
Ready to Auto Sailing
CONV:
Conventional (Normal) type Auto Sailing
TCS:
TCS type Auto Sailing
Note:
To use auto sailing feature, the Auto Pilot equipment must be connected.
2-11
2.2.2 Menu Title Bar

When the [MENU] button on the display panel is left-clicked, the menu title bar opens and you can access
to various menus.
[MENU] Button
The following shows the menu trees:

Table 2.2 Menu Tree
Main Menu
(1) Cursor
Submenu
Reference
(1) Scroll
3.6.2
(2) Zoom Area
3.7.1
(3) High Resolution Area
3.8
(4) EBL1/VRM1(Dashed-Line)
(5) EBL2/VRM2(Dash-Dotted-Line)
(6) Remove EBL/VRM
(2) Chart
Submenu/Option
(1) Ship-Centered
3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(2) Floating
3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(1) Ship-Centered
3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(2) Floating
3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(7) Running Fix
3.18
(8) Remove Running Fix
3.18
(9) ARPA Manual Acq
(1) ARPA Release
(2) Activate AIS
3.3.9
(3) Deactivate AIS
3.3.9
(4) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Information
3.13
(5) Other Information
3.13
(6) Maneuver Curve
3.19
(7) Remove Maneuver Curve
3.19
(8) Cross Bearing...
3.20
(0) Option...
3.17.2.1
(1) Marking/Highlighting
(2) Off Center
(3) ARCS
(1) Event-Mark
3.12.1
(2) Information Mark
3.12.2
(3) Tidal Stream Mark
3.12.3
(4) Highlight
3.12.4
(5) Delete Event-Mark...
3.12.1
(1) Enter Position...
3.6.5
(2) Add to my Port List...
3.22.1
(3) My Port List...
3.6.4, 3.22.2
(4) Home
3.6.1
(1) Select Chart under Cursor
3.8.3
(2) Select Chart from all...
3.8.4
2-12
Table 2.2 Menu Tree -- Continued

Main Menu
Submenu
(2) Chart
Submenu/Option
(3) Change Active Panel
3.8.5
(4) Load Low Resolution
3.8.6
(5) Note and Diagram
3.8.8
(6) Temporary and Preliminary
3.8.9
(7) Adjust Datum Offset...
3.8.10
(8) Datum Transformation...
3.8.10
(4) Select S-57 Chart...

(5) User Charts
3.9
(1) Select User Chart...
3.10
(2) Chart Editor...
5.3
(3) Unselect User Charts
3.10
(6) Manual UpDating...

(7) Scale
(8) Azimuth
(9) Motion
5.1, 5.4.2
(1) Select Scale
3.7.4
(2) Select Range
3.7.3
(3) Zoom In
3.7.2, 3.8.2
(4) Zoom Out
3.7.2, 3.8.2
(1) North Up
3.21.2
(2) Course Up
3.21.2
(3) Rotation
3.21.2
(1) True
3.21.1
(2) Relative
3.21.1
(3) Free
3.21.1
(1) Fix View
3.21.3
(2) Accept S-57 Updates
3.11
(3) Print Display
3.30
(4) Save Screen
3.31
(0) Option
(3) Ship
(1) Adjust
(2) Monitoring Dragging Anchor
(1) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS...
3.24.1
(2) Other Charts...
3.24.2
(3) Scale...
3.24.3
(1) Cursor
3.28.1
3.28.2
(3) Enter Offset...
3.28.3
(4) Clear Offset
3.29
(1) Create Monitoring Circle
3.26
(2) Clear Monitoring Circle
3.26
(0) Option...
(4) View
Reference
(1) Day-Night
(2) Radar
3.16, 3.16.1 -- 3.16.5

(1) Day Bright
3.3.6
(2) Day Whiteback
3.3.6
(3) Day Blackback
3.3.6
(4) Dusk
3.3.6
(5) Night
3.3.6
(6) Panel Dimmer
3.3.5
(1) Radar 1
3.3.8
(2) Radar 2
3.3.8
(3) Range Rings
3.3.8
2-13

Main Menu
Submenu
(4) View
(3) ARPA / AIS
(5) Guard Zone2
(1) ARPA1
3.3.9
(2) ARPA2
3.3.9
(3) Internal ARPA
(4) AIS
3.3.9
(5) ALL
3.3.9
(6) ARPA Release ALL
(7) Deactivate All AIS
3.3.9
(8) ALL List
3.3.9
(9) Select List
3.3.9
(5) Logbook
3.23.1
(1) Single View
3.14.1
(2) Top Bottom
3.14.1
(3) Right Left
3.14.1
(4) Right Top View
3.14.1
(5) Left Top View
3.14.1
(6) Right Bottom View
3.14.1
(7) Left Bottom View
3.14.1
(8) Select Area
3.14.2
(9) Wide Range View
3.14.3
(1) Radar...
3.27.1
(2) Guard Zone
(3) ARPA/AIS...
3.27.2
(4) Display Panel
3.15
(5) Logbook...
3.23.2
(6) Voyage Distance Clear
3.27.5
(7) Date / Time...
3.27.6
(1) Select Route...
3.4.2
(2) Unload Route
3.4.2
(3) Select Next WP...
3.4.2
(4) Create Alternate Route
4.2.1, 4.2.2
(5) Planning
(7) Alarm
(4) Guard Zone1
3.15
(0) Option
(6) Auto Sail
Reference
(4) Analog Meter

(6) Multi View
(5) Route
Submenu/Option
(1) Table Editor
4.1.2
(2) Graphic Editor
4.1.3
(6) Calculate Distance to Run
3.4.3
(0) Option...
4.1.1
(1) Start...
6.3.2
(2) Stop
6.3.3
(3) Start Avoiding
(4) Stop Avoiding
(0) Option...
6.2
(1) List...
3.3.7
(2) History...
3.3.7
(0) Option...
3.3.5, 3.25
2-14

Main Menu
(8) Tool
Submenu
Submenu/Option
(1) File Manager...

(2) Chart Portfolio...
Reference
7.1
(1) Create
8.1
(2) Top Window
8.1
(3) Chart Abbreviation
7.2
(4) Navigation Data Graphs...
(5) Set User Key
7.3
(6) Bilingual
(9) Maintenance (1) Connection...
7.4
(2) Sensors...
7.5
(3) Color Test...
7.6
(0) For Engineer
Installation manual
(0) Exit
3.32
2-15
Basic
Operation
of ECDIS
3-1
Do not place any object on the operation panel.

Avoid placing anything extremely hot, in particular, as this may deform the
panel.
Do not apply any undue shock on the operation panel, trackball and dials.
Otherwise, a malfunction may result.
Notes on Description:
(1) Keys/Buttons/dials/menu names:
The keys on the operation panel, buttons on the display panel and the menu names are written as
[xxxx] in this book.
Example:
[RADAR] key (on the operation panel)
[MENU] button (on the display panel)
[(1) Cursor] (menu name)
(2)
Menu operation description:

The sequential operation to access to a menu is written as follows:
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(2) Information Mark] in that order.
You will learn how to access to a menu later.
Before starting operation, please understand how to operate the menu referring to 3.1 Menu
Operation.
The flowchart described in 3.2 General Flowchart will give you general procedure for this
equipment.
3 Basic Operation of ECDIS
3-2
3.1 Menu Operation

To operate this equipment, it is necessary to know how to select menus and set options in the menus.
Basic procedure to access to a menu and set options using the trackball section are described here.
Also, major panel (dialog box, etc.) types that will appear during operation, and how to enter numbers
and letters are described.
3.1.1 How to Select the Menu

3.1.1.1 How to Use the Trackball
Trackball section on the operation panel
Trackball
(Moves the cursor.)
Left button
(Left-click)
Right button
(Right-click)
Trackball:
The trackball is used to move the cursor on the
screen for position designation, selection of buttons
on the display panel, menu designation, etc.
Left button:
Used for fixing and selecting a position on the chart,
or selecting a button, menus and options on the
screen. Pressing the left button is written as
left-click in this book.
Right button (Shortcut menu selection button):
Used for displaying a shortcut menu on the screen.
Pressing the right button is written as right-click in
this book.
Major cursors
Cross Cursor
Indicates the position on the chart.
Marking Cursor
Appears while in User Chart Edit/
Manual Update mode and Route
Graphic mode. Used to add objects
and WPs.
Edit Cursor
Appears while in User Chart Edit/
Manual Update mode and Route
Graphic mode. Used to change
objects and WPs.
Arrow Cursor (Pointer)
Indicates the position on the display
panel, menu title bar and panel
(dialogue box, etc.)
3-3
Lens Cursor
Appears when area zoom function is
selected. The rubber band can be
drawn to magnify an area.
Hand Cursor
Appears when the cursor is moved
while pressing and holding down the
left button in the chart area. You can
grip and move the chart freely.
Box Cursor
Indicates the position on the chart
while in User Chart Edit/Manual
Update mode and Route Graphic
mode.
3.1.1.2 How to Select the Menu

As for example, the following menu operation is described here.
The general menu selection procedure is as follows:
(1) Opening the menu (entering Menu mode)
(2) Selecting the menu
(3) Selecting the submenu/options
(1) Opening the menu

For opening the menu, left-click the [MENU] button on the display panel of the screen as follows:
The menu title bar appears on the upper part of the screen.
[Menu Title Bar]
Step-by-step operation to press the [MENU] button on the display panel:

1) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor to the [MENU] button.
2) Left-click the left button on the trackball section to select the [MENU] button.
Then the menu title bar will open.
Explained as Left-click the [MENU] button.
The menu title bar opens.
How to close the menu:

Left-click the [MENU] button on the display panel or left-click at any position on the chart.
3-4
(2) Selecting
[(2) Chart] ([MENU] - [(2) Chart])
Select the [(2) Chart] on the menu title bar.

The Chart menu will open.
Step-by-step operation to select [(2) Chart] menu:

1) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor to [(2) Chart] on the menu title bar.
2) Left-click the left button on the trackball section to select the [(2) Chart] menu.
Then, the [(2) Chart] menu will open.
Explained as Left-click [(2) Chart].
The [(2) Chart] menu opens.
3-5
(3) Selecting
[(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(2) Information Mark]
1) Left-click [(1) Marking/Highlighting] on the Chart menu.

Then, the Marking/Highlighting submenu will open.
2) Left-click [(2) Information Mark].
Then, the Location/Attribute panel will open.
Shifting the cursor

will also open the
submenu.
How to Close the Panel:

Left-click the [OK] button or [Cancel] button.
[OK]:
Enables settings in the panel and close the panel.
[Cancel]:
Close the panel without changing the contents of the panel.
3-6
3.1.1.3 How to Use the Shortcut Menu

You may use the shortcut menu by pressing the right button (by right-clicking).
Example 1: By right-clicking on the chart display
Right-clicking the chart may
open a shortcut menu.
Left-click a menu item you want.

e.g. Zoom In.
Example 2: By right-clicking on the chart display while performing operation
Right-clicking on the chart may open a shortcut menu.
Left-click Abort to abort the current operation step.
3-7
3.1.2 Various Panels

The major panel types that will appear on the screen and how to operate them are described here.
Value entry box

You can enter numbers.
1) First, left-click the arrow mark or the entry
box.
2) Next, enter the value.
3) To fix the entry, select other value entry
box, if any, or the [ENT] key.
Drop-down list
1) Left-click the button to open the
dropdown list.
2) Left-click an item you want from the
list.
Text box
You can enter numbers and letters.
How to enter, see 3.1.3 How to Enter Numbers and Letters.
3-8
Tabs
You can display one of panels by selecting a tab.
1) Left-click one of tabs to display a panel.
Check box
Left-click the item to turn it ON or OFF.
The check mark () shows that the
selected item is set to ON.
Option button (Radio button)

You can select one of items you want.
Left-click one of items to turn it ON.
(Other items are automatically tuned
OFF.) The check mark (
) shows the
selected item.
List box
You can select any item in the list.
Left-click the item to turn it ON or OFF.
The check mark () shows that the selected item
is set to ON.
To scroll up/down the list:
Left-click the [UP]/[DOWN] button.
While left-clicking the scroll bar, move the
trackball so that it moves upward or downward.
The scroll bar will be located on the right side or at
the bottom of the panel.
Command buttons
Left-click the button to perform the button function.
3-9
3.1.3 How to Enter Numbers and Letters

You can enter numbers and letters into the value entry box or text box using the alphanumeric graphic
buttons on the display or optional full key board.
3.1.3.1 Use of the PS/2 Keyboard

Note:
You cannot enter letters using the PS/2 keyboard in case an optional PS/2 keyboard is not
installed.
1) Loosen the 2 screws in front of the equipment that fasten the PS/2 keyboard.
Screws (2 places)
2) Pull out the PS/2 keyboard.
Put in the PS/2 keyboard in the reverse order and fix it firmly when you place it.
3-10
3.1.3.2 Use of the Software Keyboard

Left-click [Keyboard] of [Alarm List] button.
On the operation panel
Press the [OPTION2] key.
The software keyboard will be displayed.
[Keyboard]
Like the PS/2 keyboard, numbers/characters/symbols can be input by clicking the keys on the software
keyboard. To switch between uppercase and lowercase characters, left-click the [Shift] button. While the
[Shift]+[Lock] button is enabled, the uppercase input mode is active, and the [Shift]+[Lock] button is
displayed on a yellowish green background.
To close the software keyboard, left-click the [Close]
button.
[Shift] button
[Close] button
Uppercase and lowercase characters are switched each

time the [Shift] button is left-clicked.
Note:
The software keyboard may not be displayed depending on the system configuration used.
3-11
3.1.3.3 Numerical Input

This arrow mark shows the entry box.
Procedure to enter value:

1) Left-click the arrow mark or the value entry box.
3532.028'N
Black underlines
Red underline
2) To change the value with the red underline, press the numeric keys on the operation panel.
Then, the red underline moves to the next value.
For example, press [3] and then [3].
3332.028'N
Black underlines
Red underline
Black underlines
3) To change the value with the red underline, press the numeric keys on the operation panel.
Then, the red underline moves to the next value.
For example, press [4] and then [5].
3345.028'N
Black underlines
Red underline
Black underlines
4) Change the value 998 in the same way.
5) To fix the entry, press the [ENT] key.
How to switch between N (North) and S (South):
To change the line under N into red, point the cursor at N by moving the trackball and left-click.
To switch the letter N and S by turnes, press [0] to [9] or [A] to [Z].
The same procedure applies to E (East) and W (West).
3-12
3.1.3.4 Character Input

This section explains the character input rules.
To input an uppercase character from the software keyboard, click the [Shift] button to enable, and
then click the character button.
Example: Input [M].
Click the [Shift] button, confirm that the [Shift] button is enabled turning royal blue and that
the button display has changed to the uppercase mode, and then click the [M] button.
To input an uppercase character from the optional PS/2 keyboard, press the character key while
holding down the [Shift] key.
Example: Input [M].
Press the [M] key while holding down the [Shift] key.
Example of inputting the characters Note 1:

Text box
1) Left-click on the arrow mark or in the text box. The cursor will appear in the text box.
2) With the software keyboard, enable the [Shift] button and left-click the [N] button to input [N].
With the PS/2 keyboard, press the [N] key to input [N] while holding down the [Shift] key.
Character cursor
3) Press the [O] button to input o.
4) Press the [T] button to input t.
5) Press the [E] button to input e.
6) Press the [1] button, and press the [ENTER] key to fix the entry.
1
Editing of input characters:

If you input Nott by mistake, press the [Backspace/<-] button.
The last-input t will be deleted. The rightmost character is deleted each time the [Backspace/<-]
button is pressed.
If you input Notte by mistake, turn the trackball to insert the cursor between the tt, and left-click.
Then, press the [Backspace/<-] button to delete the first-input t. Alternatively, press the [Delete]
button to delete the second t.
The character following the cursor is deleted each time the [Delete] button is pressed.
3-13
3.2 General Flowchart

The following shows a general flowchart to use JAN-901 and the flowchart for sailing.
3.2.1 General Flowchart

[Startup Menu]
Power switch ON
[Startup Screen]
Startup Menu
selection
Input ARCS PIN
(ARCS only)
Startup Screen
[MENU] button
[Navigation & Planning Screen]
Navigation & Planning

Screen
The [Startup Screen] will be

automatically displayed if [ ]
is left-clicked or no operation is
conducted for 10 seconds.
Adjustments
Screen brightness
Operation panel brightness
Sound volume
Radar echo, etc.
Sailing
(For detailed description, see 3.2.2 Flowchart for

Sailing.)
Operation panel
operation
Display panel
operation
Rout Planning
Table editing
Graphical editing
User chart making/

editing
[MENU]
Menu operation
Create alternate
route
Exit and shutdown
Chart display area

(From the menu )
ROUTE selection
WP selection
Sailing monitoring
Alarm monitor
(Arrival, Route, etc.)
Display panel
(Information
display area)
Press the [POWER] key
Power switch OFF
3-14
Chart Portfolio
(S-57 chart updating)
3.2.2 Flowchart for Sailing

Sailing start
Select ROUTE
Select To WP
Move you ship to the sea
Alarms:
If an alarm occurs, the alarm panel will blink in red and a sound will be heard.
Check the alarm contents and, after confirming it, press the [ALARM ACK]
key on the operation panel. Pressing the [Alarm List] button on the display
panel shows the alarm contents. (For detailed description, see 3.3.7 How to
Release the Alarm ([ALARM ACK]).)
Select a route name you want from the display panel. (Initially "UNLOAD" is
shown.)
Select the To WP (for example 1 or AUTO SELECT).
Move your ship manually. Your ship will always be displayed on the chart.
Your ship's symbol
Ship's bearing
To WP
Note:
Be sure that the background color is not
sky blue. If it is sky blue, your ship position
is shifted by the offset function. In this
case, return its color to gray. See, 3.29
Canceling the Ship Offset.
Bearing to the To WP
About Auto Sailing:

You can use automatic sailing when using together with an Auto Pilot equipment. For details, see
chapter 6 Automatic Sailing.
3-15
Flowchart for Sailing -- Continued
Route monitoring
("ARR (Arrival)" occurs
when arrived at the WP.)
When the ship crosses a waypoint boundary, there will be an updated next
WP, and an ARR (arrival) alarm occurs.
After confirming the alarm contents, press the [ALARM ACK] key on the
operation panel or the alarm button on the display panel to stop the alarm.
It repeats itself until the

ship arrives at the last
WP before the final
destination.
When the ship exceeds the boundary of the final destination, "ROUTE" alarm
Arrived at the final destination
("ROUTE" alarm occurs.)
will occur.
After confirming the alarm contents, press the [ALARM ACK] key on the
operation panel or the alarm button on the display panel to stop the alarm.
Unload the route
Select "UNLOAD". Then the route selected disappears from the screen.
End of sailing
3-16
3.3 Power ON/OFF and Preparation

How to turn the power ON and OFF and preparation before sailing are described here.
Note that, when you turn the power OFF, you must terminate the system by following the termination
sequence described here.
Also, how to recover the system in case of hung up is explained.
3.3.1 Power ON ([POWER])

Press the [POWER] key.
The power turns on, and the [PWR] key will light. After a short while, the startup menu will be displayed.
Do not turn on the power of the equipment with a floppy disk inserted in the
floppy disk drive.
The equipment will not start normally.
[POWER] key
When ON: Lighting
3-17
3.3.2 Selecting the Startup Menu

The power turns on, and the [POWER] key will light. After a short while, the Startup menu will be
displayed.
You can select one of items.
If [
] is left-clicked, the [Startup screen] will first appear, and then the Navigation & Planning screen
will be displayed.
Chart Portfolio
You can update the S-57 chart. Left-clicking this menu will open the chart portfolio screen. (See chapter
8 Chart Portfolio.)
Playback
You can update the S-57 chart. Left-clicking this menu will open the chart portfolio screen. (See chapter
8 Chart Portfolio.)
Color Pattern
Displays the S-57 chart color pattern. (See 10.2.1 Color Pattern (S-57))
Gray Scale
Displays the gray scale for the color test. (See 10.2.2 Gray Scale)
Note:
The [Startup Screen] will be automatically displayed if no operation is conducted for 10 seconds.
[Startup Menu]
3-18
3.3.3 Startup Screen and ARCS PIN Input (ARCS Only)

1) If ARCS has been installed, the ARCS PIN panel will be displayed after [Navigation &
Planning] is selected in the Startup menu. Input the ARCS PIN and left-click on the [OK] button.
The [Startup screen] will be displayed if the inputted ARCS PIN is correct and the [OK] button is
left-clicked on the ARCS PIN panel, or if the [Cancel] button has been left-clicked. If ARCS
has not been installed, however, the ARCS PIN panel will not be displayed. The [Startup
screen] will be displayed instead.
Note:
ARCS will not be displayed unless a correct
ARCS PIN is inputted on the ARCS PIN
panel.
ARCS will not be displayed if the [Cancel]
button is left-clicked on the ARCS PIN
panel.
The ARCS PIN panel is displayed only
once
after
[Navigation
&
Planning]
is
selected.
To show the ARCS PIN panel again after
left-clicking [Cancel], turn off the power of
ECDIS, and then, turn it on again to resume
the startup procedure.
ARCS will not be displayed after its contract
term has expired.
Note:
Use the software keyboard or PS/2
keyboard to input ARCS PIN.
Be sure to carefully read the caution
displayed on the startup screen.
[Startup Screen]
3-19
2) After the Startup screen appears, the Navigation & Planning screen will be displayed after a
short while.
[Navigation & Planning Screen (Example)]
3-20
3.3.4 Power OFF Operation

The power is turned off and the [POWER] key light goes out.
[POWER] key
When OFF: Unlit
Note:
If the [POWER] key is pressed during Navigation & Planning, the [Startup Menu] will be displayed
momentarily, but the power will eventually be turn off.
3.3.5 Adjusting the Brightness and Sound Volume

Perform the following adjustments as required.
(1) Brightness of the screen ([BRILL])

Adjust the Brilliance control on the LCD monitor to adjust the brightness on the screen.
JAN-701
JAN-901M
Brilliance control
Brilliance control
3-21
(2) Brightness of the operation panel ([PANEL])

Key operation:
1) On the operation panel
Press the [PANEL] key.
Each time you press the key, the brightness changes.
You can adjust the brightness in five steps.
Menu operation:
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(1) Day-Night] - [(6) Panel Dimmer] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, or User Chart editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(1) Day-Night] - [(6) Panel Dimmer] in that order.
The Panel panel will appear.
2) The panel brightness is changed in five steps by left-clicking the [Adjust Panel Dimmer] button.
(3) Volume Adjustment

Select [MENU] - [(7) Alarm] - [(0) Option] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, or User Chart editing menu
The Alarm List Option panel will appear.
3-22
2) The alarm volume is changed in seven steps by left-clicking the [Adjust Volume] button.*1
3) Set the output of sound. Volume is a setting value of the [Adjust Volume] button.
OFF1 or OFF2 is used to connect with the One Touch Alarm System. Usually use the level
in DE-FAULT.
Alarm
Sound Level
DEFAULT
OFF1
OFF2
AUTO
CALL
Setup
A/P
POS1
POS2
JUMP
DIFF
GYRO
LOG
LowSP
ARR
OffCo
XTE
Route
Radar
ARPA
Chart
ARCS
SfCnt
AREA
DNG
Anch
Timer
HARD
The sound level of OFF2

varies depending on the
setting during installation. *2
: Alarm sounds.
: Alarm will not sound.
*1
The volume of key click sound remains the same regardless of the sound level setting.
*2
The sound level of OFF2 varies depending on the setting between this equipment and the
Watch Alarm System during installation.
While relay output to the Watch Alarm System is set, the alarm does not sound.
3-23
3.3.6 Changing the Display Color ([DAY/NIGHT])

You can change the display color to obtain optimum display matched with the lighting conditions on the
bridge. Select one of the following display colors
Day Bright
Day Whiteback (For S-57/C-MAP only)
Day Blackback
Dusk (For S-57/C-MAP only)
Night
Key operation:
Press the [DAY/NIGHT] key.
Each time you press the key, the display color changes.
Menu operation:
Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(1) Day-Night] in that order, and then select one of items you
want.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(1) Day-Night] in that order.
The mark will be attached to the selected item.
In the following screen, [(1) Day Bright] is selected.
When you select one of items, the menu closes and the display color of the screen will be
changed.
Note:
When you change display colors, note that a [Night] color especially can make displayed
information difficult to read/see.
3-24
3.3.7 How to Release the Alarm ([ALARM ACK])

When an alarm occurs, a buzzer sound and the alarm button on the display panel blinks to notify the
operator of an alarm. At the same time, the details of the alarm are displayed in Message Display Area
1. When multiple alarms occur at the same time, the alarm display will change at a fixed interval. To
notify the alarm, three alarm buttons and the [Alarm List] button are used. The three buttons are used to
display the abbreviated name of the alarm. While the [Alarm List] button is used to open the Alarm
panel to see the details of the alarm.
After confirming the contents of the alarm, press the [ALARM ACK] key on the operation panel or left-click
the alarm button on the display panel to stop the alarm. The details of alarms that have been stopped
will not be displayed in Message Display Area 1. You can display the history of alarms by using the
menu operation. (See 3.23 Logbook)
Note:
Do not stop the alarm unless you confirmed its cause.
Memo: For alarm settings, see 3.25 Setting the Alarm Options.
(1) When no alarm is found

If no alarm is found, only the [Alarm List] button is displayed and the button lights in green.
Nothing is displayed here.
Lights in green.
(2) When an alarm occurs

The alarm and the [Alarm List] button blink in red and an alarm sounds.
Up to three alarms can be displayed here.
Blinks in red.
Shows the number of alarms.
(3) Stopping the blinking alarm

1) Confirm what kind of alarm has occurred.
Press the [ALARM ACK] key.
The blinking alarm will stay lit.
- Left-clicking the alarm button (e.g. [ARR]) on the display panel will also stop the alarm.
To confirm the alarm contents, see (4) Opening the alarm list in page 3-27.
Blinks in red.
Blinks in red.
Stays lit in red.
Stays lit in red.
or
Left-click the alarm
button (e.g. [ARR])
3-25
Example:
If an XTE (Cross Track Error) occurs, the XTE alarm occurs and the [XTE] button blinks in red.
Blinking stops when you press the [ALARM ACK] key on the operation panel or when you
left-click the [XTE] button on the display panel, and the [XTE] button stays in red.
When the ship enters the limit, the [XTE] alarm is released and the alarm name XTE
disappears from the button.
Also, if the ship enters the limit during blinking the alarm, the alarm is released.
Note:
The alarm lit or blining in red disappears only when the alarm cause is removed.
2) If two or more alarms have occurred, confirm the cause of alarms and press the [ALARM ACK]
key on the operation panel repeatedly until all alarms stop.
Left-clicking the alarm button repeatedly will also stop the alarms.
To stop the blinking alarms, you can repeatedly left-click the left-most alarm button. (As you
press the left-most alarm button, the alarm not yet stopped will shift to the left for easy alarm
stopping operation.)
3-26
(4) Opening the alarm list

1) At any time, left-click the [Alarm List] button on the display panel.
Then, the Alarm List panel opens.
If you open the Alarm List panel when the alarm blinks, the alarm button in the Alarm List
also blinks.
After confirmation, you can stop the blinking alarm by left-clicking the alarm button in the
Alarm List. The color of the left-clicked button stays lit in red.
You can also open the Alarm List panel from the menu:
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Alarm] - [(1) List] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(6) Alarm] - [(1) List] in that order.
2) Left-click the [Close] button to close the Alarm List panel.
Button blinks in red:
The alarm occurs and it is not acknowledged yet.
Button stays in red:
The alarm is acknowledged but it is continuing.
Button changes to green when the alarm cause is removed.
Button in green: No alarm.

Button in gray (inactive button):
The alarm does not occur in the current system configuration.
3-27
(5) Displaying the alarm history table

You can display the alarm history on the sailing.
Note:
The alarm history is cleared once [Navigation & Planning] exits. To check the past alarm
lists, see 3.23 Logbook.
Menu operation:
Select [MENU] - [(7) Alarm] - [(2) History] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(6) Alarm] - [(2) History] in that order.
Then, the Alarm History panel opens.
2) Left-click the [Close] button to close the Alarm History panel.
Alarm:
Alarm category
Message:
Detailed description of the alarm
Date/Time:
Date when the alarm is acknowledged
Acknowledge:
Date when the alarm is checked
Remove:
Date when the causes of the alarms are removed
3-28
3.3.8 Displaying the Radar Image ([RADAR])

You can turn ON/OFF the radar image on the chart. The radar image can be adjusted with the dials on
the operation panel.
Note:
To display a radar image, the optional rader board must be installed on the unit. Also, a radar
image must be sent from the radar system.
It is not possible to display the image from the Radar in chart conversion by Chart Portfolio.
If the radar system displays a short-range image, and a long-range image on the ECDIS at the
same time, the radar image on the ECDIS may be distorted.
While the radar image is displayed, the display range can be changed in 10 steps (0.5/0.75/1.5/3/6/
12/24/48/96/120nm).
For ARCS, the available display range differs depending on the chart displayed. If a display range
beyond 120nm is selected, the radar image will be turned off automatically.
Memo: For Radar settings, see 3.27.1 Setting Radar Options.
(1) Radar display ON/OFF from the menu

Turning ON/OFF the Radar 1:
Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(2) Radar] - [(1) Radar 1] in that order.
Each time you left-click [(1) Radar 1], the Radar 1 display is turned ON and OFF.
When it is turned ON, the mark is attached to the [(1) Radar 1].
The menu is closed and the image from the Radar 1 will be superimposed on the chart.
When the radar image is turned ON, the display range rings for radar echoes are shown in red.
Turning ON/OFF the Radar 2:
Each time you left-click [(2) Radar 2], the Radar 2 display is turned ON and OFF.
When it is turned ON, the mark is attached to the [(2) Radar 2].
The image from the Radar 2 will be superimposed on the chart.
Turning ON/OFF the Range Rings:
Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(2) Radar] - [(3) Range Rings] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(2) Radar] - [(3) Range Rings] in that order.
Each time you left-click [(3) Range Rings], the range ring display is turned ON and OFF.
When it is turned ON, the mark is attached to the [(3) Range Rings].
The range rings will be superimposed on the chart.
3-29
(2) Radar display ON/OFF from the operation panel

Press the [RADAR] key.
The image from the radar selected by the menu operation above will be superimposed on the chart.
To clear the image, press the key again.
(3) Radar image adjustment (on the operation panel)

Note:
If menu panel adjustment ([(4) View] -[(0) Option] - [(1) Radar] Rader Option panel) is
selected, the following dials do not work. In this case, change the menu setting to activate the
dials. For details, see 3.27.1 Setting Radar Options.
[VIDEO]: Adjusting the brightness of radar echoes
The [VIDEO] dial adjusts the brightness of radar echoes. Turning the [VIDEO] dial to the right
increases the brightness. Adjust to the best brightness to view radar echoes.
[RAIN]: Suppressing rain and snow clutter
The [RAIN] dial suppresses clutter caused by rain and snow. Turning the [RAIN] dial
(ANTI-CLUTTER RAIN dial) to the right enhances the contours of targets that are hidden in
images of rain and snow.
Take care not to over-adjust this dial. Otherwise, you may miss small targets. This dial also
reduces sea clutter. So, using both the [RAIN] and [SEA] dials is more effective. Normally, keep
this dial turned as far as possible to the left.
[SEA]: Suppressing sea clutter
The [SEA] dial lowers the reception sensitivity in near distances to reduce sea clutter. Turning the
[SEA] dial (ANTI-CLUTTER SEA dial) to the right increases the effect of suppressing sea clutter.
Take care not to over-adjust this dial. Otherwise, you may miss small targets like buoys and small
boats.
[GAIN]: Adjusting sensitivity
The [GAIN] dial adjusts the reception sensitivity of RADAR echo. Turning the [GAIN] dial to the
right increases the reception sensitivity and widens the distances in which RADAR echo can be
observed.
Take care not to over-adjust this dial, as reception noise on screen increases. This worsens the
contrast and makes it more difficult to tell the difference between targets and RADAR echo.
Alternatively, turning the [GAIN] dial to the left to view near distances or screens containing closely
packed targets, decreases the reception sensitivity making targets easier to view.
Take care not to over-adjust this dial. Otherwise, you may miss small targets.
3-30
3.3.9 Turning the ARPA/AIS Target Display ON/OFF ([AIS/ARPA])

You can turn ON/OFF the ARPA/AIS target information on the chart using the operation panel or from the
menu.
Notes:
ARPA information is displayed only when it is received from the ARPA radar system.
AIS information can be displayed only when it is received from the AIS receiver.
For ARPA/AIS target settings, see 3.27.2 Setting ARPA/AIS Options.
(1) ARPA/AIS display ON/OFF using the operation panel

Press the [AIS/ARPA] key.
The target information sent from the radar currently selected will be superimposed on the chart.
(2) ARPA/AIS display ON/OFF from the menu

ARPA 1, ARPA 2 and AIS can be independently selected. Selecting ALL can turns ON and OFF
ARPA 1, ARPA 2 and AIS displays at the same time.
Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(3) ARPA/AIS] - [(1) ARPA 1], - [(2) ARPA 2], - [(4) AIS], or - [(5)
ALL] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(3) ARPA/AIS] - [(1) ARPA 1], - [(2) ARPA 2], - [(4) AIS], or - [(5)
ALL] in that order.
Each time you select [(1) ARPA 1], [(2) ARPA 2], or [(4) AIS], its display is turned ON and OFF.
When you select [(5) ALL], items [(1) ARPA 1], [(2) ARPA 2], and [(4) AIS] are simultaneously
turned ON and OFF.
When the selected item is turned ON, the mark is attached.
3-31
(3) Opening the ARPA/AIS list

Note that the items Bearing, Distance, CPA and TCPA in the table are the filtered value by the
ARPA/AIS option settings. See 3.27.2 Setting ARPA/AIS Options.
Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(3) ARPA/AIS] - [(8) ALL List] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(3) ARPA/AIS] - [(8) ALL List] in that order.
The ARPA/AIS List panel opens.
2) Perform the following operation.
Left-click one of the tabs, to open the ARPA - Port, ARPA-Starboard, or AIS list.
When you opened AIS panel, the [View AIS Detail] button becomes active.
Left-click the [Close] button to close the ARPA/AIS List panel.
List items:
The items are the same for ARPA-Port, ARPA-Starboard and AIS. The P1, P2, etc. are the target
number.
Bearing:
Bearing to the ARPA/AIS target
Distance: Distance to the ARPA/AIS target

Heading: Heading of the ARPA/AIS target
Course:
Course of the ARPA/AIS target
Speed:
Speed of the ARPA/AIS target
Position of the ARPA/AIS target

CPA (Closest Point of Approach)
TCPA (Time to Closest Point of Approach)
Status:
Status of the ARPA/AIS target
3-32
[View AIS Detail] button function:

You can view the detailed information on AIS.
When you left-click this button, the AIS Information panel will open.
Left-click the [Close] button to close the AIS Information panel.
- Ships Name: Name of the AIS target ship

- MMSI: 9-digit unique user ID
- Status: Status of the AIS target
Sleeping
Activate
Lost
- Nav. Status: Navigation status of the AIS target
0: UNDER WAY USING ENGINE: Under way
1: AT ANCHOR: Anchoring
2: NOT UNDER COMMAND: Not under command
3. RESTRICTED MANOEUVRABILITY: Steering capabilities are limited
4: CONSTRAINED BY HER DRAUGHT: Draft is limited
5: MOORED: Mooring
6: AGROUND: Grounding
7: ENGAGED IN FISHING: Fishing
8: UNDER WAY SAILING: Sailing
9: RESERVED FOR HSC: High-speed craft
10: RESERVED FOR WIG: Wing-in-ground effect craft
15: NOT DEFINED: Undefined
- Call Sign: Call sign on the own station (up to 7 characters)
- IMO No.: 9-digit number
- CPA: Closest point of approach to the AIS target
- TCPA: Time to closest point of approach to the AIS target
- Position Sensor: Types of sensors the AIS target uses
0: Undefined
1: GPS: GPS
2: GLONASS: GLONASS
3: Combined GPS/GLONASS: GPS/GLONASS combined type
4: Loran-C: Loran-C
5: Chayka: Chayka
6: Integrated Navigation System: Integrated Navigation System
3-33
7: Surveyed: Measuring type

8-15: Not used: Not used
- Position Accuracy: 0: Low, 1: High
- Ships Type: Types of AIS target
2X: WIG: Wing-in-ground effect craft
30: FISHING VESSEL: Fishing vessel
31: TOWING VESSEL: Towing vessel
32: TOWING VESSEL-L > 200M B -> 25M: A towing vessel having a length of 200m or longer, or a width
of 25m or longer
33: DREDGE OR UNDERWATER OPE (Engaged in dredging or underwater operation): A vessel that is
dredging or conducting underwater operations
34: VESSEL-DIVING OPE (Engaged in diving operation): A vessel conducting underwater operations
35: VESSEL-MILITARY OPE (Engaged in military operation): A vessel being engaged in military
operations
36: SAILING VESSEL: Sailing vessel
37: PLEASURE CRAFT: Pleasure craft
4X: HSC (High speed craft): High-speed craft
50: PILOT VESSEL: Pilot vessel
51: SEARCH AND RESCUE VESSELS: Salvage vessel
52: TUGS: Tugboat
53: PORT TENDERS: Tender boat
54: WITH ANTI-POLLUTION EQUIP (Vessels with anti-pollution facilities or equipment): Clean-up vessel
55: LAW ENFORCEMENT VESSELS: Patrol vessel
58: MEDICAL TRANSPORTS: Medical vessel
59: RESOLUTION NO18: MOB-83 (Ships according to Resolution No18 (Mob-83)): Vessels defined by
the Radio Regulation
6X: PASSENGER SHIPS: Passenger ship
7X: CARGO SHIPS: Cargo ship
8X: TANKER: Tanker
9X: OTHER TYPE OF SHIP: Other types of ships
For categories 2X, 4X, 6X, 7X, 8X, and 9X, the second digit indicates types of loaded cargoes/status.
X1: CATEGORY A (DG/HP/MP)
X2: CATEGORY B (DG/HP/MP)
X3: CATEGORY C (DG/HP/MP)
X4: CATEGORY D (DG/HP/MP)
X9: NO ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
X0: ALL SHIPS OF THIS TYPE
For categories 6X, 7X, 8X, and 9X, the second digit indicates a vessel status.
X5: NOT UNDER COMMAND: Not under command
X6: RESTRICTED BY (her ability) MANOEUVRE: Steering capabilities are limited
X7: CONSTRAINED BY (her) DRAUGHT: Draft is limited
Latitude: The latitude at which the AIS target is situated
Longitude: The longitude at which the AIS target is situated
Bearing: Bearing from own ship to the AIS target
Distance: Distance between own ship and the AIS target
Course: Bearing of the AIS target
Speed: Speed of the AIS target
Length: Length of the AIS target
Beam: Beam of the AIS target
Draft: Draft of the AIS target
Heading: Heading of the AIS target
Rate of Turn: Turning speed of the AIS target
Destination: Destination of the AIS target
ETA:ETA of AIS target
3-34
(4) Activating and Deactivating AIS Targets ([AIS ACT] / [AIS IN-ACT])
The default for AIS targets is display in the inactive state. The procedures below are used for
activating and deactivating AIS targets.
Activating:
Press the [AIS ACT] key.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(2) Activate AIS] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(3) Cursor] - [(2) Activate AIS] in that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [Activate AIS] from the shortcut menu.
The cross cursor will change to a box cursor.
2) Move the cursor with the track ball to an AIS target that is not active, then left-click on it. The
AIS target will become active, the status will be changed to active, and the vector will be
displayed.
Deactivating:
Press the [AIS IN-ACT] key.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(3) Deactivate AIS] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(3) Cursor] - [(3) Deactivate AIS] in that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [Deactivate AIS] from the shortcut menu.
The cross cursor will change to a box cursor.
2) Move the cursor with the track ball to an AIS target that is active, then left-click on it. The AIS
target will become inactive, and the vector will not be displayed.
Inactive
Active
Deactivating all:
Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(3) ARPA/AIS] - [(7) Deactivate All AIS] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(3) ARPA/AIS] - [(6) Deactivate All AIS] in that order.
All AIS targets will be deactivated, and the vectors will not be displayed.
3-35
(5) Panel Display of ARPA/AIS Target

Left-click on the ARPA/AIS target displayed on the screen so that ARPA/AIS information will be
displayed on the Selected Target panel.
Press the [TGT DATA] key.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(5) Other Information] in that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [Other Information] from the shortcut menu.
The cross cursor becomes the box cursor.
2) Use the trackball to move the cursor to the ARPA/AIS target, and then left-click.
The Selected Target panel will open and ARPA/AIS target information will be displayed.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(3) ARPA/AIS] - [(9) Select List] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(3) ARPA/AIS] - [(9) Select List] in that order.
If you wish to have the Selected Target panel open in advance,
- Up to 3 targets can be simultaneously displayed on the Selected Target panel. The target that was
selected first is displayed in the top panel. As new targets are selected and displayed, previous targets
move down by one. When the fourth target is selected, the bottom target display panel will no longer
display the first target selection.
- To delete a panel display, left-click on the [Release] button provided in each panel. If there is a panel
below the deleted panel, it moves up by one.
Target Label:
Name of the ARPA/AIS target
Speed:
Speed of the ARPA/AIS target
Bearing:
CPA:
Closest point of approach to
the AIS target
Distance:
Distance to the ARPA/AIS target
Bearing towards the ARPA/AIS target
Course:
Course to the ARPA/AIS target
TCPA:
Time to closest point of
approach to the AIS target
[Additional] tab
[Common] tab
Name:
Name of the AIS target (not
displayed for ARPA targets)
[AIS Detail] button:

When a panel is displaying AIS
target information, the AIS
Information panel will also be
Position:
displayed (see page 3-33 for AIS

detailed information).
Current position of the ARPA/AIS target

Status:
[Release] button:
Release the selected target.
Current status of the ARPA/AIS target
3-36
3.3.10 System Restoration in Case of Abnormal Operations

If the power does not turn off, then hold it down for approximately 10 seconds to turn it off.
[POWER] key
After a while, press the [POWER] key on the operation panel to turn ON the system again.
3-37
3.3.11 Using the CD Drive and Floppy Disk Drive

Opening the panel on the front of the main unit will allow you to use the CD drive and floppy disk drive.
Floppy disk drive
CD drive
Eject button: Use to open
and close the tray.
Access lamp: Will light green

when the writing to or reading
from a floppy disk.
Eject button:
floppy disk.
Access lamp: Will light green

when information is being read
from the CD.
Use to eject a
Note:
Do not remove a floppy disk from the floppy disk drive when the access lamp is on.
3-38
3.4 Selecting ROUTE and To WP

When you start sailing, select the ROUTE and To WP as follows: Note that the route file extension shows
the route type. More specifically, the extension .rtn is used for Normal type and .rta is used for ANTS
type.
3.4.1 Selecting ROUTE and To WP Using the Display Panel

(1) Selecting the route using the display panel
1) Left-click the drop-down list button to open the ROUTE list.
2) Left-click the route name you want in the drop-down list.
When you select the route name, it is read from hard disk and the route image is displayed on
the chart.
The initial route status is UNLOAD.
Deleting the route:

To delete the route being selected from the chart, left-click the drop-down list button to open the
ROUTE list, and then left-click UNLOAD.
The selected route is deleted from the screen.
Notes:
If the scheduled route is on floppy disk or on the navigation workstation, you can copy it to
hard disk using the File Manager. See 7.1 File Manager.
(2) Selecting waypoint using the display panel

As you sail, the waypoint number that the ship is currently heading to is displayed.
There are two ways, automatic and manual, for selecting the waypoint number.
Automatic selection (Auto Select):

The waypoint nearest the current position becomes the next waypoint. When your ship passes this
waypoint, the waypoint is automatically updated to the next waypoint.
1) Left-click the drop-down list button to open the To WP list.
2) Left-click the AUTO SELECT.
3-39
Manual selection:
To select any waypoint, manually select the waypoint.
1) Left-click the drop-down list button to open the To WP list.
2) Left-click any waypoint number.
For example, when you start from the beginning of the
selected route, left-click 1 in the To WP drop-down
list.
3.4.2 Selecting ROUTE and To WP from the Menu

(1) Selecting the route from the menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(1) Select Route] in that order. The Select Route panel
opens.
2) Select the route by left-clicking it, and then left-click the [OK] button. Then, the selected route is
displayed on the chart. Name of this route is displayed on the ROUTE panel of the display
panel.
Left-clicking the [Display WP List] button will open the Select Next WP panel. For this panel
operation, see the next page.
To unload the selected route:

Select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(2) Unload Route] in that order.
Then, the route disappears from the chart and the ROUTE panel displays UNLOAD.
- You can also delete the route from the screen by selecting UNLOAD in the ROUTE panel.
3-40
(2) Selecting the waypoint from the menu

Select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(3) Select Next WP] in that order.
The Select Next WP panel opens.
2) Select the WP you want by left-clicking it, and then left-click the [OK] button. Then, the selected
WP is displayed on the To WP panel of the display panel.
3-41
3.4.3 Calculating Distance to Run

You can calculate the distance between WPs or between own ship and a WP with the calculator
(Calculating Distance panel).
Select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(6) Calculate Distance to Run] in the order.
Then, the Calculating Distance panel opens.
2) Left-click the drop-down list button in the [From] panel, and select [Way Point], [Picked Point], or
[Own Ship]. If you have selected [Way Point] or [Own Ship], select the WP number you want
from the WP No. drop-down list. If you have selected [Picked Point], specify coordinates by
left-clicking an arbitrary point on the route.
3) Left-click the drop-down list button in the [To] panel, and select [Way Point] or [Picked Point]. If
you have selected [Way Point], select the WP number you want from the WP No. drop-down list.
If you have selected [Picked Point], specify coordinates by left-clicking an arbitrary point on the
route.
4) The distance from the start point to the end point is automatically calculated, and the calculation
result is displayed in the [Distance] box. Left-click the [Close] button.
[Select WP/Own Ship.]
[Select WP No.]
[Resultant]
3-42
Example use of [Calculate Distance] panel:

When selecting [Way Point]
Select [Way Point] and an arbitrary WP No.
The calculation result is displayed.
The route between the selected WPs is shown in green.

When selecting [Picked Point]
Select [Picked Point], and left-click an arbitrary
point on the route.
Own ship position
The route from the arbitrary point to WP No. 02 you have selected is shown in green.
3-43
When selecting [Own Ship]

Own ship position
Select [Own Ship].
Select WP to go through.
The route from the own ship position to WP No. 03 via selected WP is shown in green.
3-44
3.5 Changing the Object Category

(S-57/C-MAP Only)
SENC (System Electronic Navigation Chart) information available for display is subdivided into three
object categories, display base, standard display, and all other information. You can change the object
category using the display panel.
Display Base:
Standard Display:
Other:
Important objects that cannot be deleted from the charts, such as coastline and own ships
safety contour.
Objects less important than display base, such as drying line, indication of fixed and floating
aids to navigation and boundaries of fairways, channels, etc.
Other objects, such as spot soundings, submarine cables and pipelines, ferry routes and
details of all isolated dangers.
Note:
The initial chart screen status is Standard Display. For safety for sailing, use the standard display
or other information display, and not the display base.
You can change the object category by left-clicking the [BASE], [STANDARD], or [OTHER] button
on the display panel.
The illuminating button in green is the selected one. The [BASE] button is always lit.
1) Left-click either button as follows:
Illuminated in green when selected
During sailing, select [STANDARD] or [OTHER].
Left-click [STANDARD]
Left-click [OTHER]
Left-click [BASE]
Left-click [STANDARD]
You can also use the menu to select an object category. Also, in the [STANDARD] and
[OTHER] display methods, you can specify how objects belonging to these categories should
be displayed.
will display all objects that belong to standard display and that have been
set for display.
will display all objects that belong to standard display.
For selection of object display, see 3.24.1 Setting S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Options.

About the display in the chart area:
You will see all layers being selected.
For better understanding, you can think that various layers are
used to make up the chart display. For example, standard display
consists of the display base and information (objects) for
standard display. This means that the display base is the basic
one layer and the information for standard display is another
layer, and the standard display is made up by overlapping both
layers.
Another additional layers may be own ship, user chart, event
mark, EBL/VRM, radar image, etc.
Layer
Layer
Layer
Layer
EVENT mark, ect.

Objects of "OTHER"
Objects of "STANDARD"
Objects of "BASE"
Standard Display: Base and standard display are lit in green.

Other: Base, standard display and other are lit in green.
3-45
[BASE display example]
[STANDARD display example]
[OTHER display example]
Notes:
The display will be in gray without displaying a chart when a corresponding chart does not exist in
the display area, when a chart exists with only a part of data, or when the display scale does not
match the chart scale. In this case, change the scale to check for a chart.
3-46
3.6 Shifting the Chart

The chart can be shifted by the following methods:
[HOME] button
Using the cross cursor (Left-click at any position on the chart)
Gripping the chart with the hand cursor (While left-clicking, move the hand cursor.)
[PORT LIST] button
Using the position entry panel
3.6.1 Shifting the Chart with the [HOME] button

At any time, you can shift the chart where your ship to a position in the chart area with plenty of room to
advance. This function will be helpful, if you have lost your ship on the chart.
Key operation:
Press the [HOME] key.
Menu operation:
1) On the display panel
Left-click the [HOME] button.
- You can also perform the operation from the menu.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(2) Off Center] - [(4) Home] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(2) Off Center] - [(4) Home] in that order.
Your ship will return to a

position in the chart area with
plenty of room to advance.
Own ship symbol
[Screen Display of Home Position]
3-47
3.6.2 Shifting the Chart with the Cross Cursor

You can shift the chart using the cross cursor by simply left-clicking at any position on the chart. Then,
the position becomes the center of the chart.
For the detailed explanation of Motion mode, see 3.21 Selecting Motion/Azimuth Mode.
True Motion:
1) Rotate the trackball and move the cross cursor to the position you want to set it at the center of
the chart.
2) Left-click at that position.
Cross cursor intersecting point
[Moving to the Center of the Screen]

Note:
If the cursor is not the cross cursor (e.g. lens cursor), select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(1) Scroll]
to return the cursor to the cross cursor. Right-clicking and selecting the shortcut menu
Abort will also return the cursor to the cross cursor.
Relative Motion:
You can shift the location of ship display within the chart view.
1) Rotate the trackball and move the cross cursor to the location you want to set it the ship display.
2) Left-click at that position.
[Moving the location of ship display]
3-48
3.6.3 Shifting the Chart with the Hand Cursor

You can grip the chart and move it freely.
1) Rotate the trackball and move the cursor to the position you want to grip the chart.
2) While keeping left-clicked, rotate the trackball to move the chart. At this time the cursor changes
to the hand cursor
Hand cursor
Note:
If the ship is out of chart view, motion mode change to free automatically.
3.6.4 Shifting the Chart with the [PORT LIST] Button

If a port is already registered, you can switch to that chart. The registered chart is displayed with the
registered scale.
To return to the original chart where the ship is there, press the [HOME] button.
Note:
Before using this function, you should register a desired position as a port. See 3.22.1 Adding to
My Port List.
(1) Button operation to jump to the port

Left-click the [PORT LIST] button.
The drop-down list for ports opens.
2) Left-click a port name you want to jump there.
The position registered as the port will be displayed at the center of the screen.
Registered position as a port
3-49
(2) Menu operation to jump to the port

In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(2) Off Center] - [(3) My Port List] in that order.
The Marked Position panel opens, where position and scale column are shown.
- To jump to the port, left-click a port name then the [Jump] button.
- To delete the registered port, left-click a port name then the [Delete] button.
- To close the panel, left-click the [Close] button.
3.6.5 Displaying the Chart by Entering the Position

You can see the chart to the position you want by entering the position in the position entry panel.
You can operate from the menu only.
To return to the original chart where your ship is, press the [HOME] button.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(2) Off Center] - [(1) Enter Position] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(2) Off Center] - [(1) Enter Position] in that order.
The Enter Position panel opens.
2) Enter the position (latitude and longitude), and left-click the
[OK] button.
The panel closes and the chart will be displayed to the
designated position.
3-50
3.7 Zooming In/Out the Chart (S-57/C-MAP Only)

The chart can be zoomed in or out by the following methods:
Zoom area function using the rubber band ([Zoom Area])
Zoom in/out ([Range +/-]/[Zoom In]/[Zoom Out]/Menu/Shortcut menu)
Range selection (Range drop-down list)
Scale selection (Scale drop-down list)
3.7.1 Zooming Area Using the Rubber Band

(S-57/C-MAP Only)
You can enlarge the area surrounded by the rubber band full in the display. You can operate using the
operation panel, display panel , or menu.
1) Select the function by performing one of the following methods:
On the display panel
Left-click the [Zoom Area] button.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(2) Zoom Area] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(3) Cursor] - [(2) Zoom Area] in that order.
Right-click on the chart, then select [Zoom Area] from the shortcut menu.
The cross cursor changes to the lens cursor.
2) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor to the top left of the area A you want to enlarge, and
left-click there.
3) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor to the bottom right of the area B you want to enlarge,
and left-click there.
The rubber band surrounds the specified area to be enlarged.
After enlarged, the lens cursor returns to the cross cursor.
Selected area
[Zooming area using the rubber band]
Switching charts:
Usually, charts with different scales are displayed in the same area.
Due to the zoom in/zoom out functions, charts with a matching scale are selected and displayed.
When a displayable scale range is assigned to an original scale of a chart and when this original scale
is beyond the range, the chart will not be displayed unless there are other displayable charts.
This equipment shows in background a chart that looks like a world map as a reference. This chart
will be displayed when charts are zoomed out to a scale of 1:1,500,000 or smaller.
3-51
3.7.2 Zooming In/Out (S-57/C-MAP Only)

You can zoom in or out using the [RANGE +/-] key, [Zoom In]/[Zoom Out] button, or [Zoom In]/[Zoom Out]
menu.
(1) Zooming in/out using the operation panel

Press the [RANGE +] or [RANGE -] key.
Each time the key is pressed, the chart is zoomed in or out by the amount or
the scale set by the system.
- Select range or scale for the zooming method.
- For switchable ranges, see 3.7.3 Switching the Range (S-57/C-MAP Only). For scales, see
3.7.4 Switching the Scale (S-57/C-MAP Only).
(2) Zooming in/out using the display panel

Left-click the [Zoom In] or [Zoom Out] button.
Each time you press the key, the chart is zoomed in or out by the amount
set by the system.
(3) Zooming in/out from the menu

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(7) Scale] - [(3)
Zoom In] / [(4) Zoom Out] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing
menu, User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(7) Scale] - [(3)
Zoom In] / [(4) Zoom Out] in that order.
Each time you select the menu, the chart is
zoomed in or out by the amount set by the
system.
Or the same result can be achieved by
right-clicking on the chart, then selecting [Zoom
In]/[Zoom Out] from the shortcut menu.
Over-scale alarm:
When the ship enters a different chart, an over-scale occurs
if the displayed chart is more than double in size than the
original data. The vertical lines as seen in the figure on the
right will be displayed on the chart and will appear to notify
lower chart accuracy and clarity.
The vertical lines will not display if the size has been made
larger (double or more) through proper operation.
3-52
Warning lines for overscaling
3.7.3 Switching the Range (S-57/C-MAP Only)

You can switch the range of the chart using the drop-down list on the display panel or using the menu.
(1) Switching the range using the display panel

Left-click the range switching drop-down list button.
2) Left-click the range in the list. The color of indicator left side of range switching drop-down list
changes green.
The chart is zoomed in or out according to the range you have selected.
Zoomed out
Zoomed in
(2) Switching the range from the menu

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(7) Scale] - [(2) Select Range] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(7) Scale] - [(2) Select Range] in that order.
Available ranges are displayed.
- You cannot select the inactive range. Also, this
range is locked to the radar range, so that it
cannot be changed to active.
2) Left-click the range value you want.
The chart is zoomed in or out according to the
range you have selected.
Inactive range
3-53
3.7.4 Switching the Scale (S-57/C-MAP Only)

You can switch the scale of the chart using the drop-down list on the display panel or using the menu.
(1) Switching the scale using the display panel

Left-click the scale switching drop-down list button.
2) Left-click the scale in the list.
The chart is zoomed in or out according to the scale you have selected.
(2) Switching the scale using the menu

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(7) Scale] - [(1) Select Scale] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(7) Scale] - [(1) Select Scale] in that order.
Available scales are displayed.
2) Left-click the scale value you want.
The chart is zoomed in or out according to the scale you have selected.
Note:
To enable or disable the selectable scales,
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(0) Option] - [(3) Scale] in that order.
For details, see 3.24.3 Setting Scales. Disabled scale will be displayed inactively (faintly).
Zoomed out
Zoomed in
3-54
3.8 ARCS Chart Display Options (ARCS Only)

The following display options are explained here.
High resolution area selection with the cross cursor
Larger chart/smaller chart selection (using [Larger Chart]/[Smaller Chart] buttons on the display panel,
[Zoom In]/[Zoom Out] in the shortcut menu)
Various options accessible from the menu
3.8.1 High Resolution Area Selection (ARCS Only)

When you use a low resolution chart, you can display the high resolution area with the cross cursor.
Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(3) High Resolution Area] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(3) Cursor] - [(3) High Resolution Area] in that order.
2) Left-click the cross cursor. Then the high resolution area is displayed on the screen with the
left-clicked position centered.
3.8.2 Selecting Larger/Smaller Chart (ARCS Only)

In the ARCS chart, you can select a larger or smaller chart using the display panel, menu, or the
[RANGE+/-] key on the operation panel.
Press the [RANGE +] or [RANGE -] key.
On the display panel
Left-click the [Larger Chart] or [Smaller Chart] button.
Each time you left-click the button, the larger chart or smaller chart will be displayed.
In the normal menu

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(7) Scale] - [(3) Zoom In] / [(4) Zoom Out] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(7) Scale] - [(3) Zoom In] / [(4) Zoom Out] in that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [Zoom In]/[Zoom Out] from the shortcut menu.
Note:
An error message may be displayed when you switch a larger or smaller chart. For details of
error messages, see 14.2.1 Alarm Information of ARCS Chart.
3-55
3.8.3 Selecting Chart under Cursor (ARCS Only)

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(1) Select Chart under Cursor] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(1) Select Chart under Cursor] in that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [Select Chart under Cursor] from the shortcut menu.
Move the cursor to the desired chart with the track ball, then left-click to open the [Select Chart]
panel.
2) Left-click the chart No. you want and then left-click the [OK] button.
The panel closes and the selected chart is displayed on the screen.
If Preview is turned on, a low resolution chart of the temporarily chosen chart will be displayed.
Note:
When a chart is not displayed but a corresponding chart is displayed in the display area, the area
where a chart exists will be displayed in blue and the area where a chart does not exist will be
displayed in gray.
3-56
3.8.4 Selecting Chart from All (ARCS Only)

You can select a chart from all the charts loaded in the hard disk.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(2) Select Chart from all] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(2) Select Chart from all] in that order.
The Select Chart panel opens.
2) Left-click the chart No. you want, and then left-click the [OK] button.
The panel closes and the selected chart is displayed on the screen.
If Preview is turned on, a low resolution chart of the temporarily chosen chart will be displayed.
You can open the Select Chart panel by left-clicking [Select Chart] button on the
display panel.
3-57
3.8.5 Changing Active Panels (ARCS Only)

A panel is displayed as a blue square for each chart. A selected chart will be displayed.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(3) Change Active Panel] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(3) Change Active Panel] in that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [Change Active Panel] from the shortcut menu.
An available chart will be displayed as a blue square.
2) Left-click on the blue rectangular so that the selected chart will be displayed.
Blue square
[Selected chart]
3-58
3.8.6 Loading a Low Resolution Chart (ARCS Only)

You can select the low resolution chart.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(4) Load Low Resolution] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(4) Load Low Resolution] in that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [Load Low Resolution] from the shortcut menu.
Then, the low resolution chart is displayed on the screen.
3.8.7 To Select the High Resolution Chart (ARCS Only)

1) Right-click the cursor on the chart and select the High Resolution Area from the shortcut menu
by left-clicking it. Then, the orange square frame with the lens cursor appears. The area
surrounded by the orange frame shows the are to be magnified.
2) Move the cursor (orange frame) to specify the area to be magnified and left-click the cursor.
Orange frame
[Magnified chart: High resolution chart]
3-59
3.8.8 Displaying the Note and Diagram (ARCS Only)

You can display the note and diagram list defined by the current chart.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(5) Note and Diagram] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(5) Note and Diagram] in that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [Note and Diagram] from the shortcut menu.
The Note and Diagram panel opens.
2) When the desired items are selected, the notes and diagrams for the corresponding chart are
displayed. The panel can be closed with the [Close] button, and the chart will return to the
original display position.
Note:
The note and diagram information is included in the ARCS chart. If the chart used does not
include such information, the notes and diagrams will not be displayed.
3-60
3.8.9 Displaying Temporary and Preliminary Notice

(ARCS Only)
You can display the temporary and preliminary notice list of the current chart.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(6) Temporary and Preliminary] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(6) Temporary and Preliminary] in that order.
The Temporary and Preliminary panel opens.
Depending on the chart used, the items may not be displayed on the panel.
2) Select the item you want to display, and then left-click the [OK] button.
Then, the Information panel of the temporary and preliminary notice list for the current chart is
displayed as shown in the picture.
Temporary and Preliminary Notices can be displayed only when the chart has been updated.
Note:
The temporary and preliminary notices are included in the ARCS chart. If the chart used does not
include such notices, they will not be displayed.
3-61
3.8.10 Adjusting Datum (ARCS Only)

(1) Entering offset
Note:
Do not adjust datum offset unless you need it. This adjustment will be required only when the
geodetic system of the chart is the local one and its display position is misaligned.
You can shift the chart position by entering offset values (latitude/longitude) or by using the cursor.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(7) Adjust Datum Offset] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(7) Adjust Datum Offset] in that order.
The Chart Shift panel opens.
2) Enter the offset value and left-click the [OK] button.
3) When the dialogue is opened, the current offset value specified by the user is displayed.
The offset value can be cleared with the [Clear] button.
If an offset value is already input or an offset value for WGS-84 is set in the chart data, then that
value will be displayed in the [Chart Shift] panel.
When an offset value for WGS-84 is set in the chart data, pressing the [Clear] button will return
the display to that value.
3-62
Using the Cursor:

1) In the Chart Shift panel, left-click the [by Cursor] button.
The cursor type changes.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the first position. Then, move the cursor to draw the orange line
to determine the amount of offset, and left-click the cursor at the second position.
Then, the offset values thus obtained are displayed on the Chart Shift panel. (You can edit the
value.)
Note that the cursor position is always displayed at the bottom of the display panel.
3) Left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
Orange Line
Cursor
The chart will move the specified offset value. The chart offset value display section will be
displayed in blue, and Chart Shift will be displayed in Message Display Area 2 of the screen.
Also, the shift amount will be displayed in the display panel.
Chart Shift display
Shift amount
3-63
(2) Transforming the datum

You can convert the geodetic datum of a position or the own ships position to the WGS-84 system.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(8) Datum Transformation] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(8) Datum Transformation] in that order.
The Change Datum panel opens.
2) Enter the reference position using one of the following methods:

Enter the position into the value entry boxes.
Left-click the [Ship Position] button to enter the own ships position.
Left-click the [by Cursor] button and left-click the cursor at the position you want. Then, the
position is entered.
3) Left-click the Geodetic Datum From drop-down button, then select the geodetic system of the
conversion source from the list.
The geodetic system will be converted, and the position after shifting and offset value will be
displayed.
4) After confirming the position after shifting and the offset displayed in the [Chart Shift] box,
left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
The chart will move by the offset value, and the offset display section of the chart will be
displayed in blue. Chart will be displayed in the message display area of the screen.
3-64
Note:
Chart position for the WGS84 system
Chart position for the local

geodetic system
X, Y: Offset value for WGS-84

When X and Y are contained in the chart data, the geodetic system is converted automatically,
and the chart is displayed inclusive of these offset values. At this time, the chart position for the
primary geodetic system is displayed in blue on the display panel, and Chart Shift To WGS-84 is
displayed in the screen message area.
In such a case, the geodetic system conversion function will be deactivated even if offset values
are set in the Change Datum panel and the [OK] button is left-clicked, and the message The
Datum is already WGS-84 will be displayed on the panel.
3-65
3.9 Selecting a S-57 Chart (S-57 Only)

After power ON, the chart on which your ship exists is automatically called up so that the voyage can be
monitored at all times. When you want to display other chart, perform the following operation.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(4) Select S-57 Chart] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(4) Select S-57 Chart] in that order.
The Select Chart panel opens.
2) Left-click the chart name you want and then left-click the [OK] button.
The Select Chart panel closes and the selected chart is displayed on the screen.
By pressing the [HOME] button on the display, you can display the chart on which your ship is.
3-66
3.10 Displaying a User Chart

You can display a user chart you have made.
Note:
Before use of this function, you need to make a user chart beforehand. See chapter 5 Chart
Editing.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(5) User Charts] - [(1) Select User Chart] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(5) User Charts] - [(1) Select User Chart] in that order.
The Open Chart File panel opens.
2) Left-click the user chart name you want and then left-click the [OK] button.
The Open Chart File panel closes and the selected user chart is displayed on the screen.
To clear the displayed user chart from the screen:

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(5) User Charts] - [(3) Unselect User Charts] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(5) User Charts] - [(3) Unselect User Charts] in that order.
Then, the user chart is cleared from the screen.
3-67
3.11 Accepting the S-57 Updating Chart

You can merge the S-57 updating charts with the original charts. Whether you merge the updating chart
here in Navigation & Planning screen or you merge it when importing with the Chart Portfolio is selectable
in the Chart Portfolio setting. (For Chart Portfolio operation, see 8.7.1 [S-57] Accepting Chart Update.
1) Be sure that the SENC information level is set to [STANDARD] or [OTHER] and not [BASE].
[STANDARD] or [OTHER] is selected.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(2) Accept S-57 Updates] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(2) Accept S-57 Updates] in that order.
The Accept Updates panel opens.
3) Left-click one of the S-57 updating charts in the table.

If you want to display and check the updating objects, left-click the [Show] button.
Then, the S-57 updating chart will be displayed on the chart.
The objects of the updating chart will be superimposed on the original chart and show in red.
Accept updating
objects by left-clicking
the [OK] button.
Updating objects will be

displayed in red.
The updating objects are merged

with the original chart and its color is
changed from red to normal one.
4) Left-click the [OK] button.

The panel closes and the updating objects are merged with the original chart.
3-68
3.12 User-Marking/Highlighting
You can input the following marks on the chart.
EVENT mark:
During voyage, you can put an event mark at the ship position.
Information mark: You can put an information mark at any position.

Tidal stream mark: You can put an tidal mark at any position. The speed (knot) and bearing can be
input.
Highlighting:
You can put a highlight area at any position for your reference.
Information mark
Highlighing
Own ship
EVENT mark
Knot
Bearing
Tidal Stream mark
3.12.1 Marking the Event Mark (EVENT)

(1) Event marking using the display panel
During voyage, you can put an EVENT mark ( ) at the point where your ship is located.
Left-click the [EVENT] button.
- To check the information on the EVENT mark, see 3.13 Reading Out Information on the
Objects.
(2) Event marking using the menu

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(1) Event-Mark] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(1) Event-Mark] in that order.
The Location/Attributes - Event Mark panel opens.
3-69
2) In the Location/Attributes - Event Mark panel, perform the following editing operation.
Enter time if you want to correct the displayed time.
Enter comment on the event.
You can edit the minimum scale and maximum scale that limit the display of the EVENT mark.
To fix the contents and close the panel, left-click the [OK] button.
You will see that the EVENT mark ( ) is put on the chart.
Position of the EVENT mark
EVENT mark
(3) How to delete the EVENT mark

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(5) Delete Event-Mark] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(5) Delete Event-Mark] in that order.
The Delete Event Mark panel opens.
2) Left-click the EVENT No. you want and then left-click the [Delete] button.
The panel closes and the selected EVENT mark is deleted from the chart.
3-70
3.12.2 Marking the Information Mark

You can put an information mark (
) at any point on the chart.

The Location/Attributes - Information panel opens and the cross cursor changes to the
cursor.
2) Rotate the trackball and move the cursor to the point you want and left-click at that position.
The left-clicked position is displayed in the position box of the panel.
3) In the Location/Attributes - Information panel, perform the following editing operation.
Enter the comment on the information mark.
You can edit the minimum scale and maximum scale that limit the display of the information
mark.
To edit the information mark position, left-click the [Edit] button.
The latitude and longitude entry panel opens.
Enter the value and left-click the [OK] button.
You will see that the information mark (
) is put on the screen.
Position of the information
Information mark
For viewing the information on the information mark or editing/deleting the information mark,
see 3.13 Reading Out Information on the Objects.
3-71
3.12.3 Marking the Tidal Stream Mark

You can put a tidal stream mark at any point on the chart. The tidal stream mark has the bearing and
stream speed in knot. You can edit them after putting the tidal stream mark on the chart.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(3) Tidal Stream Mark] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(3) Tidal Stream Mark] in that order.
The Location/Attributes - Tidal Stream panel opens and the cross cursor changes to the
cursor.
2) Rotate the trackball and move the cursor to the point you want and left-click at that position.
The left-clicked position is displayed in the position box of the panel.
3) In the Location/Attributes - Tidal Stream panel, perform the following editing operation.
Set/Drift setting
- Left-click either Actual or Predicted.
- Enter the bearing and speed.
Enter comment on the tidal stream mark.
You can edit the minimum scale and maximum scale that limit the display of the tidal stream
mark.
To edit the tidal mark position, left-click the [Edit] button.
You will see that the tidal stream mark is put on the screen.
Position of the tidal stream mark
Knot
Bearing
Tidal Stream mark
For viewing the information on the tidal stream mark or editing/deleting the tidal stream mark,
see 3.13 Reading Out Information on the Objects.
3-72
3.12.4 Highlighting
You can use a polygon to highlight any parts of a chart. This function can be used when you wish to
make notations.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(4) Highlight] in that order.
The Location/Attributes - Highlight panel opens and the cross cursor changes to the
cursor.
2) Use the trackball to move the cursor to the part to be highlighted.
Then, click on the
coordinates of a point which will be the starting point of the area to be highlighted.
3) In the Location/Attributes - Highlight panel, perform the following editing operation.
Enter comment on the highlighting.
You can edit the minimum scale and maximum scale that limit the display of the highlighting.
To edit the highlighting position, left-click the [Edit] button.
You will see that the highlighting is put on the screen.
Highlighting
Top of a highlighted area
For viewing the information on the highlighting or editing/deleting the highlighting, see 3.13
Reading Out Information on the Objects.
Note:
When entering data that requires detailed editing, use the user chart (See chapter 5 Chart
Editing).
3-73
3.12.5 Inputting Clearing Lines

Clearing lines can be displayed by using EBL/VRM.
1) When EBL/VRM is operating (see 3.17 Operating EBL/VRM), the start point and end point of
clearing lines should be determined from the base point and intersecting points of EBL/VRM,
and then the right button on the track ball should be clicked.
2) Place the cursor over [Create Clearing Line] in the shortcut menu to display Not Less Than
and Not More Than, and left-click on either of them.
3) Clearing lines from the center of ERL/VRM to their intersecting points will be drawn.
NLT:
Not Less Than

NLT116 means Not less than 116.
NMT: Not More Than

NMT152 means Not more than 152.
For viewing the information on clearing lines or editing/deleting clearing lines, see 3.13
Reading Out Information on the Objects.
3-74
3.13 Reading Out Information on the Objects

Each of the objects on the chart has its own information (e.g. lighthouse, buoy, depth contour, land, river).
For example, if an object is a lighthouse, information such as lighting color and frequency can be readout.
If the object is depth contour, the water depth can be read out. The chart will be the original chart
(S-57/C-MAP/ARCS). Also, you can read out the information on the marks such as the EVENT mark
you entered.
(1) Reading out the object on the S-57/C-MAP/ARCS chart using the operation panel ([INFO])
Press the [INFO] key.
The cross cursor will change to the box cursor.
2) Rotate the trackball to point the cursor to the object on the chart, and left-click.
The Information panel opens displaying information about the selected object.
[Example display]
(2) Reading out the object on the S-57/C-MAP/ARCS chart using the menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(4) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Information] in that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Information] from the shortcut menu.
).
Then, the cross cursor changes to the box cursor (
2) Rotate the trackball, point the cursor to the object on the chart, and left-click the cursor.
Then, the Information panel opens according to the selected object.
To close the panel, left-click the [Close] button.
[Example: When [(9) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Information] is selected]
3-75
Displaying additional chart information:

When an object has additional information, the name of the additional information will be displayed in
the combo box under the Information panel.
1) Select the information name to be displayed, then left-click the [Show] button.
2) The additional information will be displayed.
To close the additional information, left-click the [Close] button.
3-76
(3) Reading out the event/tidal stream/highlight mark/user data information and clearing
line
Or right-click on the chart, then select [Other Information] from the shortcut menu.
).
Then, the cross cursor changes to the box cursor (
2) Rotate the trackball, point the cursor to the object on the chart, and left-click the cursor.
Then, the Information panel opens according to the selected object.
To edit the object, left-click the [Edit] button.
The Location/Attributes panel used when inputting the mark, mentioned earlier is opened.
To delete the object, left-click the [Delete] button.
To close the panel, left-click the [Close] button.
[Example for the EVENT mark:]
3-77
3.14 Displaying Chart in Various Ways

(Multi View/Wide View)
This equipment has multi view and wide view functions. You can divide the chart screen into two
sections in which the same charts or different chart (not different geodetic system) can be displayed in
various ways. (Note that the multi view function is not available for ARCS and C-MAP Ed.3.)
Also, with
the wide view function, you can see the additional wide view screen in the display panel area.
Active screen
Own ship's symbol
View 1 screen
Multi view
screen example
View 2 screen
View 1 screen
View 2 screen
View 2
Inactive screen
Wide view screen
[Multi View and Wide View]
3.14.1 Multi View Screen

You can display two screens, View 1 and View 2 simultaneously. The active screen (selected screen)
has a blue title bar as shown in the above figure. The other side screen is inactive.
To set the View 1 screen active, for example, left-click the View 1 screen. At this time, off-center will be
used to place the cursor in the center of the screen for that view. If off-center is not desired, move the
cursor to the title bar of the view, then left-click.
Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(6) Multi View] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(6) Multi View] in that order.
2) Left-click one of the submenus to select the multi view type.
Then, the selected multi view is displayed.
- Single View
- Top Bottom
- Right Left
- Right Top View
- Left Top View
- Right Bottom View
- Left Bottom View
3-78
(Single view)
(Top Bottom view)
(Right Left view)
(Right Top view)

View 2
View 1
View 2
View 1
View 1
View 2
(Left Top view)
(Right Bottom view)
(Left Bottom view)
View 2
View 1
View 1
View 1
View 2
View 2
To return to the single view:

Left-click [(1) Single View]. Then, the screen will return to the normal screen (single view).
Note:
In View 2, the radar overlay, route, ARPA/AIS target ship symbols, own ships track, user chart
objects and manual updates are not displayed.
3.14.2 Selecting an Area

A selected area will be displayed as the Right Top view.
Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(6) Multi View] - [(8) Select Area] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(6) Multi View] - [(8) Select Area] in that order.
The cursor becomes the lens cursor.
2) If previous view mode was single view, the area selected with the lens cursor will be displayed
as the Right Top view. If previous view mode was multi view, selected area in view1 is displayed
in view2.
3-79
3.14.3 Wide View Screen (S-57/C-MAP Only)

You can display the wide view screen on the display panel. The buttons that were the wide view screen
section move to the upper part of the screen.
Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(6) Multi View] - [(9) Wide Range View] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(6) Multi View] - [(9) Wide Range View] in that order.
The wide view screen appears in the display panel area.
In the wide view screen, the currently displayed area is surrounded by the blue line.
If the same chart is displayed in multi view, the view 1 chart area will be surrounded by a blue
line and the view 2 chart area will be surrounded with a red line.
[Close] button
Wide view
Area currently displayed (Blue line)
To close the wide view screen:

Left-click on the [Close] button on the left top corner of the screen.
Then, the wide view screen disappears from the display panel and the buttons return to the original
place.
3-80
3.15 Using the Analog Meter

During voyage, you can display the analog meter on the display panel.
You can see the course,
heading, course to steer, set, etc. on the analog meter. Also, you can select the items to be displayed
on the analog meter.
Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(4) Analog Meter] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(4) Analog Meter] in that order.
The following analog meter is displayed.
On the analog meter panel, items with the arrow mark (e.g. COURSE) are represented by the
indicators of the analog meter. The color of the item and that of the indicator match each other.
So, you can easily identify each indicator from the color.
The white mark corresponds to the white pointer.
(Color matches each other in all items.)
Course and speed (The vector of the vessels motion over the
ground and the course of the route selected.)
Ships heading
Log speed (speed through water)
Course to Steer
Note: It is displayed during Automatic Sailing only.
Current direction calculated by the difference between the COG and
HDG vectors
Current speed calculated by the difference between the COG and
HDG vectors
SET (Light blue arrow)

HEADING (Gray arrow)
COURSE (White arrow)
CTS (Red triangle)
[Close] button
To close the analog meter:

Left-click the [Close] button on the analog meter.
Turns ON/OFF the arrow

marks on the panel.
Changing the items to be displayed on the analog meter:

Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(0) Option] - [(4) Display
Panel] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, User Chart
Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(0) Option] - [(3) Display
Panel] in that order.
Then, the Analog Display Option panel opens.
2) Left-click to turn ON/OFF the items you want to display and
left-click the [OK] button.
3-81
3.16 Own Ships Setting ([Ship] - [Option])

The following settings on own ship are explained here.
Primary position (of own ship) and secondary position settings
Vector display and heading line at the primary position
Danger detection vector and sector
Primary position track and time label, etc.
Each item is shown in the following figure.
COG vector
Sector (up to 360 degrees)
Heading line
Own ship (Primary position)
Time labels
Every 10 to 60 min.
HDG vector
Danger detection vector
Own ship (Secondary position)
Tracking dots
Tracking spot
Every 1 to 60 sec. Every 10 sec. to 10 min.
Max. 60 min.
Tracking period (1 to 24 hours)
[Own Ships Setting Items]
3-82
3.16.1 Ships Shape

You can select your ships shape, either symbol (a) or outline (b). Either (a) or (b) will be displayed at the
primary position on the chart.
Shape of the outline (b) depends on the scale of the chart and the width and length of the ship setting at
installation.
Even though you choose the outline (b), the symbol (a) will be displayed unless enlarged chart is
selected. When the chart is enlarged, the outline (b) will be displayed.
Width of ship according to scale
Length of ship according to scale
(a)
(b)
[Your Ship Symbol]

Select [MENU] - [(3) Ship] - [(0) Option] in that order.
The Own Ship Option panel is displayed.
2) In the Ships Shape panel, left-click either Symbol (a) or Out Line (b).
Then, left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
3-83
3.16.2 Vector Display and Heading Line at Primary Position

The COG vector (vector of the vessels motion over the ground), HDG vector (vector of the vessels
motion through the water) and heading line can be displayed for your ships symbol.
The COG and HDG vectors can be displayed at lengths proportional to the ships current speed in
minutes. For example, if the vector length is set as 10 minutes, a vector with 1-minute notches (non-tilled),
and 6-minute notches (tilled) is displayed.
The tip of the vector is the expected position in 10 minutes assuming that the ship sails at the current
speed.
COG vector
Expected position after
10 min., for example
Vector length
Heading line
HDG vector
Vector time mark
[Vector Display and Heading line]

2) Set each item on the Vector panel.
To display the heading line ON/OFF, left-click the Display Head Line on the Track/Head Line
panel. Then, left-click the [OK] button on the Own Ship Option panel. Then, the panel will
close.
Turns ON/OFF the COG vector display.
Turns ON/OFF the HDG vector display.
COG/HDG vector time until the ship
reaches the expected position. (Max. 60
min.)
Vector Time Mark ON/OFF
Heading line ON/OFF
3-84
3.16.3 Danger Detection Vector and Sector

You can set the danger detection vector and sector for your safety. The danger detection vector can be
set the monitoring area of the cross line of the safety contour and the danger area etc. While, the sector
can be set to monitor dangerous objects around your ship. The danger detection vector is shown in the
rectangular shape and the tip of the vector is the expected time assuming that the ship sails at the current
speed. The sector and its radius can be set as required.
COG vector
Sector radius in nm
Sector
Danger detection vector
Angle
HDG vector
Danger detection vector in minute
[Danger Detection Vector and Sector]

2) Left-click each item on the Alarm Detection panel and then click the [Set Alarm Limit] button.
The Alarm List Option panel opens.
Sector display ON/OFF
Danger detection vector display ON/OFF
3) Left-click the Vector and Sector and enter the value

Vector: Danger detection vector in minute
Sector: Sector radius in nm and the angle (up to 360 degrees)
4) Left-click the [OK] button on the Alarm List Option panel, and then the [OK] button on the Own
Ship Option panel to close all panels.
3-85
3.16.4 Track and Time Label Display

The primary position of own ship is memorized to hard disk every second, and up to 24 hours of
information is displayed on the chart as the track as follows:
Own ship (Primary position)
Time labels
Every 10 to 60 min.
Tracking dots
Every 1 to 60 sec.
Max. 60 min.
Tracking spot
Every 10 sec. to 10 min.
Tracking period (1 to 24 hours)
[Primary Position Track and Time Label]

2) In the "Track/Head Line" panel, left-click Display Tracking and Display Time Label to select
them.
3) Select one of seven colors you want from the drop-down list. Also enter values while reading
the complete sentence written on the panel.
Then, left-click the [OK] button on the Own Ship Option panel to close it.
Color of ships track (Red, Green, Blue,

Magenta, Orange, Brown, or Black)
1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 16, or 24 hour
0, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 min.
1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 sec.
10, 20, or 30 sec., or 1, 2, 3, 5, 10 min.
10, 30, 60 min.
3-86
3.16.5 Beam Bearing Line

2) Left-click the item to select it, and enter value to the value entry box.
Beam bearing line
Left-click to turn it ON/OFF.
Beam bearing line/OFF
Beam bearing line/ON
3) Left-click the [OK] button on the Own Ship Option panel to close it.
3-87
3.17 Operating EBL/VRM

There are two ways to draw the EBL (Electronic Bearing Line)/VRM (Variable Range Maker) on the chart.
Using the [EBL1/2] and [VRM1/2] keys and EBL/VRM dials on the operation panel
Using the menu or the shortcut menu (1 step or 2 step operation selectable)
3.17.1 Operating EBL/VRM Using the Operation Panel

On the operation panel, two sets of EBL/VRMs can be used for measuring bearing and distance. You can
also set your ships position or any position as the center (base point) of the EBL/VRM.
(1) Displaying and clearing the EBL1/VRM1 marker

If you press the [EBL1] or [VRM1] key, the EBL1 or VRM1 marker with your ship as the base point,
and the EBL1/VRM1 information panel are displayed. These markers are displayed as a dashed
line. Each of these markers are controlled by turning the EBL or VRM dial.
Distance of VRM1
Information for EBL1/VRM1
Bearing of EBL1
EBL1
Your ship
VRM
Position of crossing point of EBL1/VRM1
Position information for cursor
To clear the EBL1 marker or VRM1 marker:

Press the [EBL1] or [VRM1] key again.
(2) Displaying and clearing the EBL2/VRM2 marker

If you press the [EBL2] or [VRM2] key, the EBL2 or VRM2 marker with your ship as the base point,
and the EBL2/VRM2 information panel are displayed. These markers are displayed as a dash
dotted line to distinguish them from EBL1/VRM1. Each of these markers are controlled by turning
the EBL or VRM dial.
To clear the EBL2 marker or VRM2 marker:
Press the [EBL2] or [VRM2] key again.
(3) Switching EBL1/VRM1 marker and EBL2/VRM2 marker operations

The following describes how to switch operation when the EBL1 and EBL2, or VRM1 and VRM2
markers are simultaneously displayed.
For example, lets assume that EBL1 and EBL2 are displayed on the screen, and that EBL2 can be
operated by the EBL dial. In this case, press the [EBL1] key so that the EBL1 can be operated by
the EBL dial.
3-88
It is possible to operate EBL1.
EBL2 appears and it is possible to

operate EBL2.
It is possible to operate EBL1.
[Switching of EBL1/VRM1 Marker and EBL2/VRM2 Marker -- Ship-centered EBL/VRM]

These can be moved independently, such as EBL1 and
VRM2 or EBL2 and VRM1.
The intersecting point positions in these cases will be
displayed by combinations of the previously displayed
EBL1/VRM1 and EBL2/VRM2.
When EBL and VRM are displayed independently, only their
bearing and distance will be displayed.
Notes:
For VRM1 and VRM2, use [VRM1] and [VRM2] key in the same way as for EBL1 and EBL2.
They will be displayed as floating EBL/VRM while operating in free mode. (See the next page.)
3-89
(4) Changing the EBL/VRM marker base point

The following example describes how to change the base point for EBL1 from your ships position
to another position.
VRM1, EBL2 and VRM2 are operated in the same way as EBL1.
1) With the EBL1 base point displayed in the own ship position, hold down the [EBL1] key for more
than two seconds. Then, the EBL/VRM cursor appears.
2) Move the EBL/VRM cursor to the new base point position by rotating the trackball.
3) Left-click at the position you want. The base point is fixed at that position.
(Press [EBL 1] key for more than two seconds, base point of EBL/VRM can change again.)
Hold down for more than 2 sec.
Move the EBL cursor to

a destination point.
The EBL cursor appears.

Left-click
The EBL cursor disappears

and EBL1 is fixed.
[Moving the Base Point -- Floating EBL/VRM]
3-90
The following operation should be carried out to set the base point of floating EBL/VRM at the ships
center:
1) Make sure that the base point of the displayed EBL1 is not fixed and floating. Hold down the
[EBL1] key for more than 2 seconds.
The base point moves to where the ship is.
Hold down for more than

2 seconds.
(Floating EBL/VRM)
(Ship-centered EBL/VRM)
The EBL cursor appears.
The base point is reset at the ship's position.
[Resetting the Base Point at the Ship's Position]
3-91
3.17.2 Operating EBL/VRM Using the Menu

You can draw EBL and VRM on the chart either 1-step method or 2-step (step-by-step) method.
In the 1-step method, EBL and VRM appear at the same time. In the 2-step method, EBL appears and,
after fixing EBL, VRM appears. Also, you can draw ship-centered EBL/VRM or floating EBL/VRM.
3.17.2.1 Selecting 1-step/2-step Option

Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(0) Option] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(3) Cursor] - [(0) Option] in that order.
The EBL/VRM panel opens.
2) Left-click either 1 Step or 2 Step and then press the [OK] button to close the panel.
1 Step: Quicker operation (Both EBL and VRM appear on the chart.)
2 Step: Step-by-step operation (First EBL and then VRM)
3.17.2.2 1-step Operation

(1) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line) Ship-Centered operation (1-step operation)
1) Select 1 Step option in 3.17.2.1 as mentioned above.
Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(4) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)] - [(1) Ship-Centered] in that
order.
order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)] - [Ship-Centered] from the
shortcut menu. The EBL1 and VRM1 are displayed on the chart.
3-92
Intersection
Your ship
Bearing of EBL1
Position of crossing
point of EBL1/VRM1
1: EBL1/VRM1
Distance of VRM1
3) Rotate the trackball to move the EBL1 and VRM1 and then left-click at the position you want.
Then, the EBL1 and VRM1 are fixed on the chart.
The bearing and distance are displayed on the chart.
To delete the fixed EBL1/VRM1:
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(6) Remove EBL/VRM] - [(1) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)] in that
order.
order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [Remove EBL/VRM] - [EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)] from the
shortcut menu.
Tips: Useful shortcut -- Abort

During EBL/VRM operation, for example, you can cancel the current operation step by the following
procedure.
Right-click at any position on the
chart to open the shortcut menu.
Abort shortcut menu will open.
Rotate the trackball to move

the cursor on the Abort.
3-93
Left-click Abort to abort

the current operation step.
(2) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line) floating operation (1-step operation)

1) Select 1 Step option in 3.17.2.1.
2) In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(4) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)] - [(2)
Floating] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, User Chart Editing menu, select [MENU] [(3) Cursor] - [(4) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)] - [(2) Floating] in that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)] - [Floating] from the shortcut
menu.
The EBL1 and VRM1 appear on the chart at the same time.
3) Rotate the trackball to move the center point at the position you want and left-click there.
4) Rotate the trackball to move the EBL/VRM cursor and then left-click at the position you want.
Then, the EBL1 and VRM1 are fixed on the chart.
In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(6) Remove EBL/VRM] - [(1) EBL1/VRM1
(Dashed-Line)] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, User Chart Editing menu, select [MENU] - [(3)
Cursor] - [(6) Remove EBL/VRM] - [(1) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)] in that order.
shortcut menu.
Center point
Intersection
3-94
(3) EBL2/VRM2 (Dash-Dotted-Line) Ship-Centered operation (1-step operation)

Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(5) EBL2/VRM2 (Dash-Dotted-Line)] - [(1) Ship-Centered] in
that order.
that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [EBL2/VRM2 (Dashed-Dotted-Line)] - [Ship-Centered]
from the shortcut menu.
3) Operate in the same manner as for EBL1/VRM1.
The EBL2/VRM2 lines are dash-dotted ones.
The bearing, distance and position are displayed in the same way as for EBL1/VRM1 except
for 2.
For EBL2/VRM2

In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(6) Remove EBL/VRM] - [(2) EBL2/VRM2 (Dash-Dotted-Line)] in
that order.
that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [Remove EBL/VRM] - [EBL2/VRM2 (Dashed-Dotted-Line)]
3-95
(4) EBL2/VRM2 (Dash-Dotted-Line) Floating operation (1-step operation)

Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(5) EBL2/VRM2 (Dash-Dotted-Line)] - [(2) Floating] in that
order.
order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [EBL2/VRM2 (Dashed-Dotted-Line)] - [Floating] from the
shortcut menu.
In the normal menu
that order.
that order.
3-96
3.17.2.3 2-step Operation

(1) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line) Ship-Centered operation (2-step operation)
order.
order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)] - [Ship-Centered] from the
shortcut menu.
The EBL appears on the chart.
Your ship
3) Rotate the trackball to move the EBL1 and then left-click at the bearing you want.
Then, the EBL1 is fixed and VRM1 appears on the chart.
4) Rotate the trackball to move the VRM1 and then left-click at the distance you want.
Now, both EBL1 and VRM1 are fixed at the position you intended.
After fixing, the
cursor appears.
EBL1 (fixed)
EBL1 (fixed)
Intersection
Your ship
VRM1 (fixed)
VRM1

In the normal menu
order.
order.
shortcut menu.
3-97
(2) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line) Floating operation (2-step operation)

Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(4) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)] - [(2) Floating] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(3) Cursor] - [(4) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)] - [(2) Floating] in that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)] - [Floating] from the shortcut
menu.
The EBL/VRM cursor and EBL1 appear on the chart. (Fig. (a))
3) Rotate the trackball to move the EBL/VRM cursor and then left-click at the position you want.
(Fig. (a))
4) Rotate the trackball to move the EBL1 and then left-click at the bearing you want. (Fig. (b))
Then, the EBL1 is fixed and VRM1 appears on the chart.
5) Rotate the trackball to move the VRM1 and then left-click at the distance you want. (Fig. (c))
Now, both EBL1 and VRM1 are fixed at the position you intended.
(a)
(b)
EBL1
Your ship
EBL/VRM cursor
(c)
(d)
VRM1
Intersection
EBL1 (fixed)
After fixing, the
cursor appears.

In the normal menu
order.
order.
shortcut menu.
3-98
(3) EBL2/VRM2 (Dash-Dotted-Line) Ship-centered operation (2-step operation)

that order.
that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [EBL2/VRM2 (Dashed-Dotted-Line)] - [Ship-Centered]
The EBL2/VRM2 lines are dash-dotted ones.
The bearing, distance and position are shown in the same way as for EBL1/VRM1 except for
2 at the left upper corner.
For EBL2/VRM2

In the normal menu
that order.
that order.
3-99
(4) EBL2/VRM2 (Dash-Dotted-Line) Floating operation (2-step operation)

order.
order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [EBL2/VRM2 (Dashed-Dotted-Line)] - [Floating] from the
shortcut menu.
In the normal menu
that order.
that order.
3-100
3.18 Running Fix

In the running fix function, own ship and the position to be fixed are connected with the EBL and VRM.
This connection is kept regardless of the ships movement. So, you can see the EBL and VRM of own
ship against the fixed position at all times.
Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(7) Running Fix] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(3) Cursor] - [(7) Running Fix] in that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [Running Fix] from the shortcut menu.
The EBL and VRM are displayed on the chart.
Fixed position
Your ship
*This window disappears after left-clicking.
Bearing
R: Running Fix
Position
Distance
2) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor and left-click at the position to be fixed.
The bearing and distance are displayed at the fixed place on the chart. As the ship moves, the
bearing and distance displayed change accordingly.
[Relation between your ships position and fixed position when the ship moves]
Fixed position
Your ship
The bearing and distance are displayed here.
To delete the running fix:

In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(8) Remove Running Fix] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(3) Cursor] - [(8) Remove Running Fix] in that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [Remove Running Fix] from the shortcut menu.
3-101
3.19 Maneuver Curve

Maneuver curve display function displays the predictable track when you turn the steering in a certain
conditions. By displaying a maneuver curve that has been drawn safely, the maneuver curve can be
used as a target when turning.
Supplemental line
Heading line
Planned route
REACH
Maneuver curve
WOL (Maneuver Starting Point)

WOL line
Own ship's position
WOL:
Steering point
REACH: Distance between when the wheel is steered and when the ship begins to turn
R:
Turning radius

Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(6) Maneuver Curve] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(3) Cursor] - [(6) Maneuver Curve] in that order.
The Maneuver Curve panel opens.
2) Set or select each item.

Reach
Enter the REACH (m).
Turn Mode Left-click either Radius or Rate.

Radius: Enter the constant turn diameter (nm)
Rate:
Enter the constant turn speed (deg/min.)
3-102
3) Turn the trackball to determine the start point of the supplemental line.
The position of WOL (steering point) will change depending upon the starting point of the
supplemental line.
If the WOL is behind own ships position, the line color of the WOL will change in red. In this
case, you should change the starting point of the supplemental line.
4) While holding down the [SET CO.] key on the operation panel, set the bearing of the
supplemental line with the joystick.
Moving the joystick to the left and right will change the bearing of the supplemental line, and
moving the joystick back and forth will change the radius of the turn mode.
The bearing of the supplemental line will be the bearing in which own ship will finally move. The
position of WOL will change depending upon the bearing of the supplemental line.
When the WOL is behind the ship, the WOL line becomes red. When this occurs, correct the
bearing or the position of the supplemental line.
5) Left-click the left button.
The setting will be established.
Note:
Be sure to input the value correctly. If the heading of the maneuver curve is the same as
that of your own ship, the maneuver curve will not be created.
To delete EBL maneuver curve from the chart:

In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(7) Remove Maneuver Curve] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(3) Cursor] - [(7) Remove Maneuver Curve] in that order.
3-103
3.20 Cross Bearing

This function displays cross bearings.
An angle for calculating the own ships position from the
reference point can be obtained. If a position fixing sensor such as a GPS navigation system has
encountered an error causing the own ships position to be obscure, the own ships position can be
obtained by drawing a visually observed fixed targets bearing on the chart using the cross bearing
function.

Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(8) Cross Bearing] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(3) Cursor] - [(8) Cross Bearing] in that order.
The [Cross Bearing] dialog box opens.
Reference coordinates of the cross bearing line
Reciprocal bearing from the reference point
Bearing from the reference point
Length of the cross bearing line
Selection of bearing display on the chart
(bearing/reciprocal bearing)
2) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor to the reference coordinates of the cross bearing line,
and left-click. Alternatively, enter the reference position values in the Latitude and Longitude
fields in the [Cross Bearing] dialog box.
3) Determine the angle of the cross bearing line by turning the EBL dial or entering the reciprocal
bearing viewed from the reference point.
4) Determine the length of the cross bearing line by turning the VRM dial or entering the distance.
5) The drawing of the cross bearing line is determine by left-clicking the [Set] button, and the
bearing is displayed beside the cross bearing line.
3-104
6) The cross bearing display is switched by left-clicking the [TRUE] radio button or the [REVERSE]
radio button.
[TRUE] display
[REVERSE] display
7) To display more than one bearing line, repeat steps 1) to 4). Up to ten bearing lines can be
displayed at the same time.
8) To clear all the displayed cross bearings, left-clicking [Clear].
9) To close the dialog box, left-click the [Close] button.
3-105
3.21 Selecting Motion/Azimuth Mode

You can select the motion of your ship on the chart and the azimuth of your ship relative to the chart using
the display panel buttons or the menu. Note that the selectable modes differs depending on the chart
type, either S-57/C-MAP or ARCS.
S-57/C-MAP Ed.2 Chart:

[Possible combination between Motion and Azimuth modes]
Azimuth
Motion
True
Relative
Free
For Rotation mode
North Up
Course Up
Rotation
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Azimuth drop-down
list button
Motion drop-down
list button
C-MAP Ed.3 Chart:

Motion drop-down
list button
Azimuth drop-down
list button
ARCS Chart:
Motion drop-down
list button
Explanation of each mode:

For selectable modes, see the above explanation. For example, on the S-57/C-MAP chart, you cannot
use the combination of True/Free mode and Course Up mode. Also, on the ARCS chart, you cannot
select Azimuth mode.
Motion mode (True/Relative/Free):
True
Land and other fixed objects are fixed on the display and only own ship moves on the display.
When own ship reaches the predetermined limit, the chart is automatically shifted so that own
ship always remains on the screen.
Relative Own ship is fixed at the center of the screen and the fixed objects such as land move
relatively.
Free
You can freely rotate the chart on the display regardless of the own ships direction of travel.
Also, as the ship goes, it move and will disappear from the screen.
Note:
While in Relative mode, Chart Portfolio cannot be started.
3-106
[True Mode]
Fixed
[Relative Mode]
Heading line
[Free Mode]
Fixed
Heading line
Own ship
Heading
line
Fixed
Own ship
Azimuth mode (North Up/Course Up/Rotation) (S-57/C-MAP Only):

North Up The chart is displayed so that the chart always orients the north. Fixed objects do not flicker
and are easily identified on the chart, and the true bearing of the objects can readily be read
out.
Course Up The chart automatically rotates so that the own ship always faces up on the display.
Rotation
You can rotate the chart by the specified degrees by 1-degree step.
This function is used to point the route heading up, etc.
[North Up Mode]
Heading line
[Course Up Mode]
[Rotation Mode] e.g. turned 10 degrees
Heading line
Own ship
Heading line
Own ship
Own ship
Mode change caused by the operation:

In the following cases, the motion/azimuth mode will be automatically change from the current mode to
another one.
From True mode to Free mode:
- When the own ship goes exceeding the display limit of the screen.
- When a chart where the ship does not exist is displayed by loading a new chart, including by means
of the [PORT LIST] button on the display panel.
From Relative mode to Free mode:
- When the chart is scrolled.
- When a chart is loaded, including by means of the [PORT LIST] button on the display panel.
From Free mode to True mode:
- When the [HOME] button is left-clicked.
The rotation made in Free mode is retained if the mode is changed over to True.
Note:
Course Up/Rotation is valid only the chart scale is not lower than 1/5,000,000.
3-107
3.21.1 Selecting Motion Mode

You can select Motion mode using the display panel or from the menu.
Note:
While Chart Portfolio is running, Motion mode [Relative] cannot be selected.
(1) Selecting Motion mode using the display panel

Left-click the Motion drop-down list button.
Motion drop-down
list button
2) Select one of items (True, Relative, or Free) by left-clicking it.

For C-MAP Ed.3, Motion mode [Relative] is not available.
(2) Selecting Motion mode from the menu

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(9) Motion] - [(1) True], - [(2) Relative], or - [(3) Free] in that
order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(9) Motion] - [(1) True], - [(2) Relative], or - [(3) Free] in that
order.
3-108
3.21.2 Selecting Azimuth Mode (S-57/C-MAP Only)

You can select Azimuth mode using the display panel or from the menu.
(1) Selecting Azimuth mode using the display panel

1) Left-click the Azimuth drop-down list button on the display panel.
Azimuth drop-down
list button
For Rotation mode
2) Select one of items (North Up, Course Up, or Rotation) by left-clicking it.
Then, the display changes according to your selection.
If you select Rotation, enter its rotational angle in degrees. (0 - 359 degrees).
If True or Free is selected in Motion mode, Course Up cannot be selected.
For C-MAP Ed.3, Azimuth mode [Course Up] is not available.
(2) Selecting Azimuth mode from the menu

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(8) Azimuth] - [(1) North Up], - [(2) Course UP], or - [(3) Rotation]
in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(8) Azimuth] - [(1) North Up], - [(2) Course UP], or - [(3) Rotation]
in that order.
The selected Azimuth mode will be carried out.
3.21.3 Setting Chart Fix Mode

Regardless of Motion mode or Azimuth mode, the currently displayed chart will be fixed and no other
charts will be loaded.
Note:
For C-MAP Ed.3, Chart Fix mode is not available.
(1) Setting Fix mode using the display panel.

Left-click on the [Fix] button.
left-click
The button turns red, and the chart display becomes fixed.
Gray
Red
2) Left-click on the [Fix] button again to cancel Fix mode.

The button turns gray again.
(2) Setting Fix mode using the menu

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(1) Fix View] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(1) Fix View] in that order.
The chart display becomes fixed.
2) Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(1) Fix View] in that order again to cancel Fix mode.
3-109
Example use of Chart Fix mode:

If the chart (JP440JBE) is zoomed out while Chart Fix mode is turned off, the wide area chart
(JP24NC9G) will be loaded to replace the chart automatically.
1:30,000
JP44OJBE
1:250,000
JP24NC9G
If the chart (JP440JBE) is zoomed out while Chart Fix mode is turned on, it is fixed in the display, and
no other chart will be loaded to replace it.
1:30,000
JP44OJBE
1:250,000
JP44OJBE
3-110
3.22 My Port List

3.22.1 Adding to My Port List
You can register any position on the chart to the My Port List. After registration, you can directly access
to that position by selecting a port name from the My Port List.
The general registration procedure is as follows:
Select a chart and scale.
Register the position to the My
Shift the position you want approximately
Port List using the menu.
at the center of the chart.

1) Display the position you want to register to the My Port List.
S-57/C-MAP:
The current position will be registered as it is to the My Port List with the current scale. So,
center the position you want before you register it to the My Port List.
When you want to select another position, shift the chart area (see 3.6 Shifting the Chart) and
zoom in/out the chart (see 3.7 Zooming In/Out the Chart (S-57/C-MAP Only)) as required.
ARCS:
The current chart position will be registered as it is to the My Port List with the current size. So,
center the position you want before you register it to the My Port List.
When you want to select another chart:
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(1) Select Chart under Cursor] or - [(2) Select Chart
from all] in that order. For details, see 3.8.3 Selecting Chart under Cursor (ARCS Only) or
3.8.4 Selecting Chart from All (ARCS Only).
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(2) Off Center] - [(2) Add to my Port List] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(2) Off Center] - [(2) Add to my Port List] in that order.
The Add to my Port List panel opens.
3) Enter a name you want to register and left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
Up to 15 characters can be input.
To display the chart registered as My Port List:

Left-click the [PORT LIST] button on the display panel and select the port name you have entered.
(You can also select from the menu.) For details, see 3.6.4 Shifting the Chart with the [PORT LIST]
Button.
3-111
3.22.2 Deleting My Port List

You can delete the registered port name from the My Port List as follows:
The Marked Position panel opens, where the registered port names are shown.
2) Left-click the port name you want to delete, and then the [Delete] button.
The selected port name will be deleted.
3) Left-click the [Close] button to close the panel.
3-112
3.23 Logbook
You can display the logbook where various voyage information is written. The recorded items and the
items shown on the logbook table are selectable with the logbook option. How to display the logbook and
how to select the items to be saved are explained here.
3.23.1 Displaying the Logbook

The items displayed in the logbook are selectable. For the selection, see the next 3.23.2 Setting
Logbook Options.
Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(5) Logbook] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(5) Logbook] in that order.
The Logbook panel opens. Contents of the logbook are as follows:
(Note that, to see all the contents, scroll the panel.)
No., Date, Time,
Event (kind of alarm, EVENT, Navtex, etc. -- depends on the Logbook Option settings.),
POS1, POS2, Latitude, Longitude, COG, SOG, Heading, Log,
Av. Speed 4h, Av. Speed 24h (average speed recent 4/24 hours),
Voyage Dist. (G ), Voyage Dist. (W) (Voyage distance (Ground)/(Water)),
Chart, Set, Drift, Wind Dir. (direction), Wind Speed, Wave Dir. (direction), Wave Height,
Air Press (pressure), Temp., Water Temp., Engine Rev. (revolution), Comments
Note:
The voyage distance can be reset to 0.0nm. (See 3.27.5 Clear Voyage Distance.)
The voyage distance is available only if the interface with the ship speed sensor is in a log pulse
format.
Some of the items of Logbook may not be available depending on the hardware and system
configuration used.
3-113
Button Operation (left-click the button):

[Close]:
Closes the panel.
[Jump]:
Left-click the record data, and then left-click this button. Then, the position of
recorded data is displayed at the center of the screen.
[Print]:
The Print panel will open. You can print out the Logbook data after setting the
printing conditions.
(This is only valid when a printer is connected.)
Selected Message: The selected recorded data is printed.
From/To:
[Input]:
The data in the date range entered in the input box is printed.
You can manually enter the following values and comment as required. When the
[OK] button is left-clicked, the entered values are displayed in the Logbook panel.
(The No. in this panel corresponds to the No. in the Logbook panel.)
[Filter]:
The Logbook Option panel opens. You can set the filtering conditions. For logbook
option settings, see the next 3.23.2 Setting Logbook Options.
[Export]:
Logbook content is saved as a CSV file. The saved file can be opened with a
spreadsheet program and edited with a personal computer.
Select one of the
following items in the Export panel:

Selected Message: The selected record data will be exported.
From/To:
Logs saved during the term specified in the entry boxes will be
exported.
3-114
The Save As panel will be displayed after you left-click on the [OK] button in
the Export panel. Input the name of the file in the [File name] box, select
the folder in which the file is to be saved, then left-click the [OK] button.
For the data format of the logbook to be exported, see 14.4 Data Formats
of Files that ECDIS can Import/Export.
[Delete Navtex]:
Left-click the log that is including Navtex in the Event column, and then
left-click this button to open the Delete panel.
Select either of the following to delete desired log number that includes
Navtex.
Selected Message: When the [OK] button is left-clicked, the selected log No.
in the Logbook panel is deleted.
Before:
Enter the date/time you want delete the Navtex

messages before the entered date/time.
When the [OK] button is left-clicked, the Navtex
messages before the set date/time are deleted.
[View Navtex]:
Left-click the log that is including Navtex in the Event column, and then
left-click this button to open the Letter panel that shows the detailed
information on the Navtex messages.
You can mark it if you select Marking on the Chart. You can set expiration
date then. When Expire Date is off, a marking is deleted after the reception 15
days later.
3-115
3.23.2 Setting Logbook Options

You can filter the trigger conditions to record the log data in the logbook. Also, you can filter the trigger
conditions to save the log data which will only be used to display in the Logbook panel explained in
3.23.1 Displaying the Logbook.
Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(0) Options] - [(5) Logbook] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(0) Options] - [(5) Logbook] in that order.
The Logbook Option panel opens.
2) Left-click the option items you want to select in the Logging and View panels, and left-click
the [OK] button.
Note:
Some of the option items of Logbook may not be available depending on the hardware and
system configuration used.
Log data is automatically saved according to the settings on the Logging panel. Also, log
data will be saved for displaying in the Logbook panel,
For example, if you left-click and select At Noon. The log data is saved at noon.
Contents of the logbook options are as follows:
At Noon:
Data will be saved at
12:00 (LTM).
Every X minutes:
Data will be saved after
set duration of time.
Route Alarm:
Data will be saved when
an alarm related to ARR,
OffCo, XTE or Route.
Chart Alarm:
Data will be saved when
an alarm related to Chart,
SfCnt, AREA, DNG or
ARCS.
When press X:
Data will be saved when the [Event] button is held down.
Autosail/Sensors:
Data will be saved when an alarm related to AUTO, CALL, A/P, POS1, POS2, JUMP,
DIFF, GYRO, LOG, LowSp, Radar or ARPA.
Navtex:
Data will be saved when data from Navtex are received.
Others:
Data will be saved when any other kind of alarm (Setup, HARD or Timer) occurs.
[Navtex Option]:
The Filtering for display panel opens. (See the next page.)
3-116
Set the Navtex message filtering conditions by selecting each item on the Station,
Month/Year and Message panels. Then, left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
The Navtex messages received from the selected Station will be filtered by the condition set
by the Month/Year and Message, and then they will be saved as the Navtex information for
displaying on the chart.
The following Navtex mark will be displayed on the chart according to the
Navtex information.
Station:
You can filter the stations by specifying the first letter of the station name.
For example, if you select the letter A, the station name that begins with A
will be accepted. If you do not select Filtering, Messages of all the stations
will be not accepted.
Month/Year:
You can filter the Navtex messages by specifying the month/year.
Message:
You can filter the Navtex messages by specifying the kind of the message. If
you do not select Filtering, the navigational warnings will be not accepted.
Notes:
The above Navtex filtering function is provided for message display in Logbook.
The function is not for receiving or recording Navtex messages.
The Navtex messages to be received vary depending on the filter setting of the Navtex receiver.
For details, see the Navtex receiver instruction manual
3-117
3.24 Setting the Chart Options

You can set the various chart options.
3.24.1 Setting S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Options

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(0) Option] - [(1) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(0) Option] - [(1) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS] in that order.
The Chart Option panel opens. This panel consists of three panels View Common, View1
and View2, each of which can be selected by left-clicking the tab.
[View Common panel]
Notes:
You can select CMAP Version setting when the [View Common] panel is selected from the normal
menu but you cannot select a chart when the [View Common] panel is selected from the Table
Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, or User Chart Editing menu.
3-118
(1) Setting the View Common panel

The settings made here apply to View1 and View2 panels for single/multi-view.
1) Select a setting item and enter a value in the value entry box. Left-click the [OK] button on the
panel to close it.
a) Display Category (S-57/C-MAP Only)
Base/Standard/Other
Selection is the same as when the [BASE], [STANDARD] and [OTHER] buttons on the
display panel are used. For detailed function, see 3.5 Changing the Object Category
(S-57/C-MAP Only).
b) Area Boundary (S-57/C-MAP Only)
Plane : Plane boundary (The boundary of the area is drawn by the dotted lines)
Boundary of the area
Symbolized : Symbolized boundary (The boundary of the area is drawn by the symbolized
line)
Boundary of the area
3-119
c) Redraw
Border range:
Sets the border range to shift the chart when ship reaches it. (Effective
only when motion True is selected.) Border range can set from 30%
to 80%.
Margin (Course up): This function is effective only when the Cource up mode is selected.
(See 3.21.2 Selecting Azimuth Mode (S-57/C-MAP Only).)
The
chart will be turned step-by-step by the angle set here. Namely, if the
Margin is set to 10 degrees, the chart will be rotated each time the
ship turns more than 10 degrees.
[Border range setting]

When your ship is proceeding in the direction of the arrow in the figure
When set border range is 50%

When your ship reaches the border range, the chart automatically shifts as follow:
When set border range is 70%

When your ship reaches the border range, the chart automatically shifts as follow:
3-120
d) Chart Symbol (S-57/C-MAP Only)

Paper Chart:
Lighthouses and other symbols are shown as indicated on the paper charts.
Simplified:
A color-coded symbol is displayed.
Full Light Line: The range of lighthouse light is displayed in circle. When the Full Light Line
is set to ON, the size of the circle changes according to the chart scale.
When the chart is enlarged, the circle becomes large accordingly.
Consider Scale Minimum: When this item is selected, if the chart is reduced exceeding the
minimum scale set in a symbol, the symbol will not be displayed.
The minimum scale of a symbol differs among symbols. Also,
note that this item will not work when the chart (symbol) contains
no information.
[When Paper Chart is selected]

marks displayed on Electronic
Chart Display indicate that there are
rocks or other dangerous obstacles
in the water area where the vessel is
sailing.
Display of
marks depends on
the settings of Depth Alarm. For the

method of setting Depth Alarm, see
e) Depth Alarm (S-57/C-MAP Only)
in 3.24.1 Setting S-57/C-MAP/ARCS
Options.
[When Simplified is selected]
3-121
[Full Light Line setting]

When Full Light Line is OFF
Range of lighthouse light
When Full Light Line is ON
Range of lighthouse light

The size of the circle changes
according to the chart scale.
3-122
[Consider Scale Minimum setting]

When the minimum scale of spot depth is 1:40000 and a chart display scale is 1:50000:
When [Consider Scale Minimum] is on
When [Consider Scale Minimum] is off
3-123
e) Depth Alarm (S-57/C-MAP Only)

Shallow Contour:
The color of the sea indicated on the chart for the preset depth can be
changed.
Safety Contour:
Depth smaller (or shallower) than the preset value are displayed
enhanced.
If there is no safety depth line on the chart, a deeper safety depth line
than you set is displayed.
Safety Depth:
Spot soundings smaller than the preset value are displayed enhanced.
Deep Contour:
The color of the sea indicated on the chart for the preset depth can be
changed.
Two Colour Depth: Generally, the sea is displayed on charts with sea depths divided into
four colors. However, when Two Colour Depth is selected, the sea
depths are displayed in two colors, with Shallow Contour and Safety
Contour displayed as one color, and Safety Depth and Deep Contour
displayed as another color. This feature is used to clearly indicate and
divide the sea into safe areas and dangerous areas where care must be
taken during the voyage, just like Shallow Pattern described earlier.
Shallow Pattern:
The Shallow Pattern check mark adds grid lines to shallow sea set at
Shallow Contour and Safety Contour in the four selectable depths. This
function is for highlighting areas that require special care during the
voyage.
[Shallow Contour/Safety Contour/Deep Contour settings]

Shallow Contour
Deep Contour
Land
very shallow water

medium-shallow water
medium-deep water
deep water
Safety Contour
3-124
[Two Colour Depth setting]

When Two Colour Depth is OFF (The sea is indicated in four colors.)
Land
Shallow Contour
Safety Contour
Safety Depth
Deep Contour
When Two Colour Depth is ON (The sea is indicated in two colors.)
3-125
[Shallow Pattern setting]

When Shallow Pattern is ON (Shallow pattern is displayed.)
Shallow Pattern
When Shallow Pattern is OFF (Shallow pattern disappears.)
f) C-MAP Ed.3 Database

ENC or World of C-MAP Ed.3 can be selected for display.
(This feature is available only when C-MAP Ed.3 has been installed.)
3-126
(2) Setting the View1 panel

The View1 panel setting is used for the View 1 screen. Namely, this settings apply to the single
view screen (normal screen), or the View 1 screen when you select multi view function to display
View 1 and View 2 screens. (For multi view function, see 3.14 Displaying Chart in Various Ways
(Multi View/Wide View).)
1) Left-click the setting items to set them ON and OFF.
Left-click the [OK] button on the panel to close the panel.
[View1 panel]
Multi screen view statuses:

The top right square on the view panel shows how view is divided. The blue area is the display area for
the current view.
(For multi screen display, see 3.14.1 Multi View Screen)
Single view
Top Bottom view
Right Left view
3-127
Right Top view
a) Type (Type of chart)

S-57:
S-57 chart is displayed. C-MAP Ed.2 can be selected for simultaneous

display.
C-MAP Ed.2: C-MAP Ed.2 chart is displayed. S-57 can be selected for simultaneous
display.
C-MAP Ed.3: C-MAP Ed.3 chart is displayed.
ARCS:
ARCS chart is displayed.
Notes:
ARCS can be selected only if the ARCS chart has already been installed and the ARCS
PIN is correctly inputted when the Navigation & Planning is started.
ARCS and other S-57 or C-MAP cannot be selected at the same time.
b) Text Size (S-57/C-MAP only)
Expands characters. (Limited to the standard size)

Reduces characters.
The character size in the text to which the
mark is attached can be changed.
Example: Land reagion
Standard
Reduced
Expanded
Reduced
Expanded
Expanded
Reduced
Reduced
Expanded
Expanded
Reduced
Expanded
Reduced
3-128
c) Layer (S-57/C-MAP only)

Layers displayed on the chart are listed below. There are [-] layer, [S] layer, and [O] layer.
[-]: Items that can be set when the chart object display is in [BASE], [STANDARD], or
[OTHER] mode.
[S]: Items that can be set when the chart object display is in [STANDARD] or [OTHER] mode.
[O]: Items that can be set when the chart object display is in [OTHER] mode.
(For chart object display, see 3.5 Changing the Object Category (S-57/C-MAP only).
Display of each layer listed below can be turned on/off:
Layers in S-57/C-MAP Ed.2
[S] objects:
Land reagion, Sea area/named water area
Causeway, Dam, Dyke, Gate
Dyke, Slope topline, Airport, Bulding, single, Crane, Landmark, Built-up area
Swept area
Sand wave, Tunnel, Cable, Submarine
Navigation line
Recommended track
Ferry route
Radar range, Radar line
Restricted area
Ferry route, Military practice area, Offshore production area
Caution area, Fairway
Fishing ground, Marine farm/culture
Anchorage area, Anchor berth
Cable area, Pipeline area
Dumping ground, Cargo transshipment area, Incineration area
Daymark
Navigational system mark
topmarks
light
Fog signal, Retro-reflector, Radar transponder beacon, Radar reflector
Pilot boarding place, Signal station, Trafic, Signal station, Warning
[O] objects:
Quality of data
Nautical publication information
Coverage, Compilation scale of data
Local magnetic anomary, Magnetic variation
Sloping ground, Land elevation, Slope topline
Vegetation, Lake, Rapids, River, Water fall, Tideway
Building, Fortified structure, Land mark, Silo/Tank, Airport, Road, Railway
Check point, Harbour facility
Distance mark
Berch, Crane, Drydock, Mooring/Warping facility, Gate
3-129
Sounding
Depth area, Depth counter
Water turbulance, Tide..., Current-non-gravitational
Seabed area, Weed/Kelp, Spring
Fishing-facility
Obstruction, Wreck, Underwater/Awash rock
Cable, Submarine, Pipeline, Submarine/on lamd
Continental shelf area
Custom zone, Free port area, Harbour area
Fishery zone
Administration area, Contiguous zone, Exclusive economic zone
Radar station, Radio station, Coastguard station, Rescure station
[-] objects:
Updated Objects
Layers in C-MAP Ed.3
[S] objects:
Land reagion, Sea area/named water area
Causeway, Dam, Dyke, Gate
Dyke, Slope topline, Airport, Bulding, single, Crane, Landmark, Built-up area
Swept area
Sand wave, Tunnel, Cable, Submarine
Navigation line
Recommended track
Ferry route
Radar range, Radar line
Restricted area
Ferry route, Military practice area, Offshore production area
Caution area, Fairway
Fishing ground, Marine farm/culture
Anchorage area, Anchor berth
Cable area, Pipeline area
Dumping ground, Cargo transshipment area, Incineration area
Daymark
Navigational system mark
Fog signal, Retro-reflector, Radar transponder beacon, Radar reflector
Pilot boarding place, Signal station, Trafic, Signal station, Warning
[O] objects:
Quality of data
Nautical publication information
Coverage, Compilation scale of data
Local magnetic anomary, Magnetic variation
Sloping ground, Land elevation, Slope topline
Vegetation, Lake, Rapids, River, Water fall, Tideway
3-130
Building, Fortified structure, Land mark, Silo/Tank, Airport, Road, Railway

Check point, Harbour facility
Distance mark
Berch, Crane, Drydock, Mooring/Warping facility, Gate
Sounding
Depth area, Depth counter
Water turbulance, Tide..., Current-non-gravitational
Seabed area, Weed/Kelp, Spring
Fishing-facility
Obstruction, Wreck, Underwater/Awash rock
Cable, Submarine, Pipeline, Submarine/on lamd
Continental shelf area
Custom zone, Free port area, Harbour area
Fishery zone
Administration area, Contiguous zone, Exclusive economic zone
Radar station, Radio station, Coastguard station, Rescure station
[-] objects:
Updated Objects
d) Text (S-57/C-MAP Only)
The texts that will be displayed on the chart. You can turn the display of the following texts ON
and OFF.
Text in S-57/C-MAP Ed.2
Important text (Vertical Clearance bridge, overhead cable, so on)
Name/Number of: buoys, beacons, so on
Light description
Note on chart data or nautical publication
Nature of seabed
Geographic names
Value of: magnetic variation, swept depth
Height of islet or land feature
Berth number
National language
Text in C-MAP Ed.3
Important text(Vertical Clearance bridge, overhead cable, so on)
Other text (Name of building so on)
Light description
Note on chart data or nautical publication
Geographic names & Generic Text
National language
3-131
(3) Setting the View2 panel

The View2 panel setting is used for the View 2 screen. This settings apply to the view 2 screen
(the second screen) which will be displayed when multi view function is used. The view 2 screen will
not be displayed if you use a single screen (normal screen). (For multi view function, see 3.14
Displaying Chart in Various Ways (Multi View/Wide View).)
The setting contents are the same as for View 1 panel mentioned earlier.
The setting items are as follows:
Type (Type of chart)
Layer
Text
Text Size
Note:
Use the [View 1] panel to change the chart type from S-57/C-MAP to ARCS.
Multi screen view statuses:

The top right square on the view panel shows how view is divided. The blue area is the display area
for the current view.
(For multi screen display, see 3.14.1 Multi View Screen)
Single view
Top Bottom view
Right Left view
3-132
Right Top view
3.24.2 Setting Other Chart Options

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(0) Option] - [(2) Other Charts] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(0) Option] - [(2) Other Charts] in that order.
The Other Charts Option panel opens.
3-133
3.24.3 Setting Scales

The Scale panel opens.
2) Left-click the scale you want to turn ON and OFF.
Memo:
The scales selected here will be displayed when you left-click the Scale drop-down list button on
the display panel. Also, when you select the scale from the menu, the scales selected here are
shown actively. While the scales that are not selected here will be displayed inactively.
3-134
3.25 Setting the Alarm Options

You can set the various alarm options.
The Alarm List Option panel opens.
2) Left-click the setting items to set them ON and OFF, and, for the items that require value entry,
enter the value.
Then, left-click the [OK] button on the panel to close the panel.
a) Limit
Difference between POS1 and POS2:
Displays an alarm on the screen when the POS1 and POS2 have deviated by more than
the distance preset here.
Shift of Primary Position
Displays an alarm on the screen when the movement distance per unit hour (1 second) of
the ship is larger than the distance preset here. This is useful for detecting when something
influences your ships position in such a way that it is displayed at a wrong position on the
chart. (This does not apply when Dead-Reckoning (DR) is used.)
Off Course (OffCo)
Displays an alarm on the screen when your ship has veered off the current course more
than the preset angle.
3-135
Early Course Change indication (ECC):

WOL arrival alarm (currently not available)
Arrival Last WP (Route):
Displays an alarm on the screen when the time required to arrive at the final destination is
reduced to the amount you have set.
Timer:
An alarm sounds at the time preset here.
Vector:
Danger detection vector in minute
Sector:
Sector radius in nm and the angle width in degree (up to 360 degrees)
*: For vector and angle width, see 3.16.3 Danger Detection Vector and Sector.
b) Area (S-57/C-MAP Only)
You can set whether or not to display an alarm on the screen when a symbol on the chart
contacts a danger detection vector by setting each of the items ON and OFF.
Subjects of the items are as follows:
Traffic Separation Zone
Traffic Crossing
Traffic Roundabout
Traffic Precautionary
Two Way Traffic
Deeper Water Route
Recommended Traffic Lane
Inshore Traffic Zone
Fairway
Restricted Area
Caution Area
Offshore Production Area
Military Practice Area
Seaplane Landing Area
Submarine Transit Area
Ice Area
Channel
Fishing Ground
Fishing Prohibited
Pipeline Area
Cable Area
Anchorage Area
Anchorage Prohibited
Spoil Ground
Dumping Ground
Dredge Area
Cargo Transshipment Area
Incineration Area
Specially Protected Area
3-136
3.26 Monitoring Dragging Anchor

A circle can be drawn to monitor a dragging anchor at the user-specified position. When the own ship
moves and part of outline of the own ship goes out of this circle, a dragging anchor alarm occurs.
A dragging anchor monitoring circle can be created with the own ship as the center or with the position at
which you left-click on the chart as the center.
Occurrence of dragging anchor alarm
The dragging anchor monitoring circle

Select [MENU] - [(3) Ship] - [(2) Monitoring Dragging Anchor] - [(1) Create Monitoring Circle]
in that order.
The Monitoring Dragging Anchor panel opens.
The central position of the current monitoring circle is displayed on the screen. By default, the
heading forward position is displayed as the center of the circle. Left-clicking on the chart can
also set the position as the center of the dragging anchor monitoring circle.
2) Enter the radius of the dragging anchor monitoring circle (10 to 999 m).
The dragging anchor monitoring circle is displayed.
To re-set a dragging anchor monitoring circle, cancel the monitoring circle beforehand.
How to close the dragging anchor monitoring circle:

Select [MENU] - [(3) Ship] - [(2) Monitoring Dragging Anchor] - [(2) Clear Monitoring Circle] in
that order.
The dragging anchor monitoring circle is cleared.
3-137
Dragging anchor alarm:

When the Alarm list panel opens if a dragging anchor alarm occurs, the [Anch] button blinks in
red.
[Anch] button: Dragging Anchor.
3-138
3.27 Setting the View Options ([View])

You can set various options related to View menu.
3.27.1 Setting Radar Options

Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(0) Option] - [(1) Radar] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(0) Option] - [(1) Radar] in that order.
The Radar Option panel opens.
2) After setting the items as required, left-click the [Close] button on the panel to close it.
Notes:
For details on each setting item, refer to the INSTRUCTION MANUAL for Radar being used.
The Rader Option panel will not be displayed if an optional radar board is not installed.
IR (Interference Rejection):
This function is used to remove unnecessary signals
from other radars when they are superimposed over the
selected radar signal.
Echo Color:
This drop-down list button sets the color of the radar
echo. You can set one of four colors: green, red, yellow
and amber.
Gain/Anti Sea Clutter/Anti Rain Clutter/Echo Brill
You can adjust these items using the dials on the
operation panel other than using the dialog box.
Select [Use Keyboard] when you use the dials on the
operation panel.
To Adjust the Radar Image Using the Radar Option
Panel:
1) Left-click Use This Dialog to turn ON it.
2) Select value with the scroll bar.
If you left-click
and turn ON Auto, automatic
setting will apply.

3) Left-click the [Close] button to close the Radar
Option panel.
3-139
3.27.2 Setting ARPA/AIS Options

Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(0) Option] - [(3) ARPA/AIS] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(0) Option] - [(2) ARPA/AIS] in that order.
The ARPA/AIS Option panel opens.
enter the value. Left-click the [OK] button on the panel to close the panel.
Note:
For details on each setting item, refer to the INSTRUCTION MANUAL for ARPA/AIS to be
used.
The following items can be set:

For the ARPA and AIS target symbols that will be displayed, see the next page.
a) ARPA Target
Display Vector: Displays the vector for the ARPA/AIS targets.
b) ARPA/AIS Target
Display Track: Displays the track for the ARPA/AIS targets.
Note:
Tracking spots of ARPA/AIS are cleared by changing screen, e.g. Zooming In/Out.
3-140
c) AIS Target
High Priority filter for display:
Ring:
The AIS targets within the specified distance are displayed.
Sector: The AIS targets within the specified bearing with the heading as the center are
displayed.
Heading line
Sector area
Guardring area
Own ship
120nm
Note:
Maximum number of visible targets are 200. For over 200 targets, at first the targets
attributed danger have priority to show. And secondary the targets without danger are
shown the nearest from own ship one by one.
AIS Danger Status:
CPA (Closest Point of Approach):
Determines that the AIS target is in danger of a collision, if the distance between the own
ship and the AIS target is within the set distance.
TCPA (Time to Closest Point of Approach):
Determines that the AIS target is in danger of a collision, if the time to reach the own ship is
within the set time.
Note:
Danger targets are able to show within the area inside the dotted line of the above figure
even if the targets are outside of Sector/Guardring area (Radius of the dotted line is
120nm). When a new danger target detect outside of Sector/Guardring area with still
showing maximum targets, the danger one is shown and the farthest target is lost.
ARPA Identitiy:
When an AIS target is displayed inside a radius of the set distance of the ARPA target, they
are regarded to represent an identical ship, and the ARPA target disappears from the
screen while the AIS target remains active.
AIS target remains active.
AIS target
ARPA target
ARPA target is not

shown.
Set distance
When ARPA Identity is OFF
When ARPA Identity is ON

3-141
d) External/Internal ARPA
Use Internal ARPA: Internal ARPA is not available currently.
ARPA symbols:
Item
Symbol
Color
Tracked target
Green
Red (blink)
Dangerous target
Lost target
Green
Initial acquisition mark
Green
AIS symbols:
Item
Symbol
Color
Sleeping target
Green
Activated target
Green
Green
depend on
Selected target
other status
Dangerous target
Red (blink)
Green
Lost target
COG (valiable length)

ROT (fixed length)
HDG (fixed length)
HDG
[Sleeping target]
[Activated target]
3-142
Conditions for AIS lost targets:

When the data of an AIS target cannot be received for a specified time, the target data is
considered to be lost. As shown in the table below, a time period for judging a target as lost
varies depending on the class of receive data and the target status.
[SOLAS-compliant ship] (Class A)
Time until judgment
Target status
of lost target
Vessel below 3 knots and it is now at anchor or on the berth
18 min
Vessel of 3 knots or more and it is now at anchor or on the berth
60 sec
Vessel of 0 to 14 knots
60 sec
Vessel of 0 to 14 knots and it is now changing the course
60 sec
36 sec
Vessel of 14 to 23 knots and it is now changing the course
36 sec
Vessel of 23 knots or more
12 sec
Vessel of 23 knots or more and it is now changing the course
12 sec
[SOLAS-incompliant ship] (Class B)

Time until judgment
Target status
of lost target
Vessel below 2 knots
18 min
180 sec
90 sec
Vessel of 23 knots or more
30 sec
When an AIS dangerous target is lost and the target data cannot be received for 1 minute, the
target and target data are deleted.
3-143
3.27.3 Setting Analog Meter Options

How to set the analog meter options is explained in 3.15 Using the Analog Meter.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(0) Option] - [(4) Display Panel] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(0) Option] - [(3) Display Panel] in that order.
You can set the analog meter options.
3.27.4 Setting Logbook Options

How to set the logbook options is explained in 3.23.2 Setting Logbook Options.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(0) Option] - [(5) Logbook] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(0) Option] - [(4) Logbook] in that order.
You can set the logbook options
3.27.5 Clear Voyage Distance

Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(0) Option] - [(6) Voyage Distance Clear] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(0) Option] - [(5)Voyage Distance Clear] in that order.
The Question panel opens.
2) Left-click the [OK] button, voyage distance of logbook is cleared.
3-144
3.27.6 Setting Date/Time

When your ship is in the same time zone as the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), Time Zone is 0:00,
and UTC and ships local mean time (LMT) are the same.
Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(0) Option] - [(7) Date/Time] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(0) Option] - [(6) Date/Time] in that order.
The Date/Time panel opens.
enter the value.
The following items can be set:

a) Source of UTC
Set the date/time when MANUAL has been selected in the date/time data source setting.
For details, see 7.5.5 Date Data Source Setting.
When the [Set] button is left-clicked, the [Date Time Change] panel opens.
Enter date/month/year/ hour:minite:second numerals in the numeric input box.
b) Initial Time Zone

Set the time difference when MANUAL has been selected in the time zone data source
setting. For details, see 7.5.6 Time Zone Data Source Setting.
You can also use [+30min] and [-30min] button to set time.
(E=+, W=-)
The LMT and the time zone are displayed at the top of the display panel as follows:
LMT
Time zone
Note:
When an item other than MANUAL has been set in the date/time data source setting,
date/time setting procedure is not necessary.
3-145
3.28 Shifting Own Ship Position

During voyage, you can shift own ships position on the chart using one of the following methods:
Shifts to the position designated by left-clicking the cursor (Cursor)
Shifts by entering the latitude/longitude (Enter Position)
Shifts by entering the offset value (Enter Offset)
Shifted own ship

Actual own ship
When shifting the own ship position with an offset, a reference point mark can be displayed in the position
after the offset. A panel for setting the reference point will be displayed.
Please set the following items:

Position to display the reference point:
The position can be modified by left-clicking the [Edit] button.
Min Scale: Sets the minimum scale in which the reference point mark is displayed.
Max Scale: Sets the maximum scale in which the reference point mark is displayed.
Sensor:
Selects the type of reference positioning data that is to be displayed for reference
point marks.
DR/GPS/Decca/Loran/Radar/Estimated/Visual/Astronomical/MFD/Transit
Time:
Displays the time to be displayed for reference point marks.
Comment: Comments for a reference point mark can be input.

OK:
A reference point mark will be displayed in the specified location.
Cancel:
No reference point mark will be displayed.
3-146
Reference Point Mark

Time moved
Type of reference positioning
For veiwing the information on reference point mark or editing/deleting reference point mark, see
3.13 Reading Out Information on the Objects.
Do not use the offset function during navigation.

If the equipment is used with the offset value entered as the own ship
position, the position of your ship displayed on the screen is shifted from the
real one, and accidents may result.
When the offset values are entered, the background color of the position
panel on the display panel is colored in sky blue, and the message Position
Shift is displayed in the message display area. Check these indications,
and cancel the offset function if necessary.
3-147
3.28.1 Shifting Using the Cursor

Select [MENU] - [(3) Ship] - [(1) Adjust] - [(1) Cursor] in that order.
The Question panel box opens.

The ship offset cursor appears.
3) Rotate the trackball and move the cursor to the position
you want, and then left-click there.
4) The reference point setting panel is displayed.
5) Own ship will shift to that position.
To clear the offset:
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(3) Ship] - [(1) Adjust] - [(4) Clear Offset]
Ship offset cursor
in that order.
3.28.2 Shifting by Entering the Position

Select [MENU] - [(3) Ship] - [(1) Adjust] - [(2) Enter Position] in that order.
2) Enter the position and left-click the [OK] button.

4) Own ship will shift to that position.
To clear the offset:
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(3) Ship] - [(1) Adjust] - [(4) Clear Offset] in that order.
3-148
3.28.3 Shifting by Entering the Offset Value

Select [MENU] - [(3) Ship] - [(1) Adjust] - [(3) Enter Offset] in that order.
The Enter Offset panel opens.
2) Enter the amount of offset to be shift and left-click the [OK] button.
4) Own ship will shift by the amount of offset entered.
3.29 Canceling the Ship Offset

In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(3) Ship] - [(1) Adjust] - [(4) Clear Offset] in that order.
The offset applied to own ship can be canceled. As the offset is canceled, the color of the position
display on the panel changes from sky blue to gray.
3.30 Printing Display

(Only when Connected to a Printer)
By using a printer connected to the workstation, you can print out dialog boxes, such as logbooks, or
panels displayed on the screen.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(3) Print Display] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(3) Print Display] in that order.
The Print panel opens.
2) Set for printing and left-click the [OK] button on the panel to close the panel.
Printing will starts.
3-149
3.31 Saving the Screen

(Only when Connected to Backup Device)
An image of the displayed screen can be saved on the hard disk as a 256-color bit map file.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(4) Save Screen] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(4) Save Screen] in that order.
The image file of the screen will be saved with a file name in the following format:
YYYY MM DD _ HH MM SS.bmp
Year
Date
Minute
Month
Hour Second
(Example) If the file was created at 10:50:15 on 6 June 2003, the file name would be
20030606_105015.bmp.
3.32 Displaying the Startup Menu

(Exit the Navigation & Planning)
After the Navigation & Planning is exited, the [Startup menu] will be displayed.
For the [Startup menu], see 3.3.2 Selecting the Startup Menu.
Select [MENU] and then [(0) Exit].
The Question panel will be displayed.
2) Left-click on the [OK] button.
Navigation & Planning is exited, and the [Startup menu] will be displayed
3-150
Route
Planning
4-1
In this Chapter, how to make a route is explained in 4.1. In addition, how to create alternate route during
voyage is explained in 4.2.
For selecting the route you have made in this chapter, see 3.4 Selecting ROUTE and To WP.
To set route options, see 4.1.1 Setting the Route Options.
4.1 Route Planning

You can make a route by using one of the following methods. After you have made a route, you can edit it.
Edition is possible by using either method.
Route planning using the Table Editor
You can make a route by entering each WP value in the WP entry table. Using the [View Sync] button,
the current WP can always be displayed on the chart during editing.
Route planning using the Graphic Editor
You can make a route by graphically drawing each WP on the chart.
Editing Screen and Editing Menu:

When you enter the Table Editing mode or Graphic Editing mode from the normal menu, the editing
screen is displayed.
On the editing screen, editing buttons are displayed. Further, special editing menu is provided and it
opens by left-clicking the [MENU] button on the display panel in the same way as for normal menu.
The editing button functions are included in this special menu, though some names of buttons are slightly
different from those of menus.
Note:
The special editing menu has the same menus as for normal menu. Explanation of these menus is
omitted in this Chapter.
Route Name and Extention of File:

Route Name: You can enter up to 8 characters. For example: Route-01
(Note) Characters such as . and that cannot generally be used in file names cannot
be used as route names.
Extention of File: The extension (3 additional letters) is automatically attached to the route name as
follows.
Route-01.rtn
4 Route Planning
4-2
Route shown on the Screen:

WP0
Planned course
WP1
Planned speed [kt]

Leg
Port side (in red line)

and port side width
Arrival radius
Starboard side (in green line)

and starboard side width
WP : Way Point
Note:
For each default value, see 4.1.1 Setting the Route Options.
4-3
4 Route Planning
4.1.1 Setting the Route Options

Select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(0) Option] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Tool] - [(0) Option] in that order.
Then, the Route Plan Option panel opens.
Normal Menu
Table Editing Menu
Graphic Editing Menu
2) Select an item, and enter the value in the numeric input box as needed.
Then, left-click the [OK] button to close the dialog box.
a) Date/Time for monitoring
Select UTC/LMT for arrival time display during route monitoring.
UTC display
4 Route Planning
LMT display
4-4
b) Select Route
When the checkbox of Estimated Time of Arrival is on (with a checkmark), the arrival time is
displayed at WP during route monitoring.
When Estimated Time of Arrival is off (no checkmark):
When Estimated Time of Arrival is on (with a checkmark) and UTC is

selected for Route Monitoring Time:
When Estimated Time of Arrival is on (with a checkmark) and LMT is

selected for Route Monitoring Time:
4-5
4 Route Planning
c) Default
Set the default of the route to be created during route planning.
Width Prt:
Port side width
Width Stb:
Starboard side width
Arr Radius: Arrival radius

Speed:
Planned ships speed
Sail:
RL (Rhumb line)/GC (Great circle)
Turn Rate:
Turn rate
Turn Radius: Turn radius

Time Zone: Time zone
d) Max. Latitude
Waypoints cannot be set in latitudes higher than the set latitude. If a GC leg is higher than
the set latitude, waypoints are added for limiting the GC leg to the maximum latitude.
When the GC leg between WP2 and WP3
exceeds the maximum latitude (60N)
60N
When the maximum latitude is 60 or more, a GC leg exceeding 60 can be input.
WP3 and WP4 are added for limiting the

GC leg to the maximum latitude (60N).
(RL leg between WP3 and WP4)
60N
Waypoints are added at intersections between the GC leg and 60, so a leg exceeding 60 is
not input.
e) Check Safety in Editing
During editing the route, safety check is automatically conducted.
(You can manually conduct safety check with the [Safety Check] button or select [MENU] [(7) Tool] - [(1) Check Route Safety] in the editing mode menu.)
If an error is detected during the safety check, the route will have to be reset.
(The error part is drown in black color after safety check.)
Note:
The route cannot be created if the GC leg extends over 120 and more in longitudinal direction.
4 Route Planning
4-6
f) Route Type
Select a route type when making a route file.
TCS route
Normal route
WOP
WOL
4-7
4 Route Planning
4.1.2 Route Planning Using the Table Editor

The order of explanation here is as follows:
About the Table Editing mode
Table editing menu and button functions
Operation flowchart
Detailed operation
The route you have made with the Table Editor can be edited with the Graphic Editor.

4.1.2.1 Table Editing Mode

Press the [ROUTE PLAN] key.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(5) Planning] - [(1) Table Editor] in that order.
The Table Editing screen as shown below will open.
On this screen you can make or edit the route.
[Table Editing Screen]
How to open the Table Editing Menu:

Left-clicking the [MENU] button on the display panel in the Table Editing mode will open the special menu
for Table Editor.
4 Route Planning
4-8
How to exit the table editing mode:

Left-click the [Close] button. Alternatively, in the Table Editing menu, select [(1) File] - [(0) Exit from
Route Planning] in that order.
How to print the WP table contents (only when a printer is connected):

Open the route file (WP table) to be printed, and left-click the [Print] button.
Alternatively, in the Table
Editing menu, select [(1) File] - [(7) Print WP Table] in that order.
4.1.2.2 Table Editing Menu and Button Functions (Table Editor)

(1) Table editing menu
The following shows each menu in the Table Editing mode:
Table 4.1 Table Editing Menu Tree
Main Menu
(1) File
Submenu
Submenu/Option
(1) New
4.1.2.4
(2) Open
(3) Import
(2) Edit
(3) Cursor
Reference
4.1.2.5
(1) Normal
4.1.2.6
(2) TCS
(3) 2G TCS
4.1.2.6
(4) Save
4.1.2.5
(5) Save As
4.1.2.5
(6) Export
4.1.2.7
(7) Print WP Table
(0) Exit from Route Planning
(1) Insert WP
4.1.2.4
(2) Delete WP
4.1.2.4
(3) Divide Leg
4.1.2.4
(4) Set Default
(5) Sort Reversely
4.1.2.4
(1) Scroll
3.6.2
(2) Zoom Area
3.7.1
3.8.1
(4) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)

(5) EBL2/VRM2 (Dash-Dotted-Line)
(6) Remove EBL/VRM
(1) Ship-Centered
3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(2) Floating
3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(1) Ship-Centered
3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(2) Floating
3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(7) Running Fix
3.18
3.18
(9) ARPA Manual Acq
(1) ARPA Release
(2) Activate AIS
3.3.9
(3) Deactivate AIS
3.3.9
4-9
4 Route Planning
Table 4.1 Table Editing Menu Tree -- Continued

Main Menu
(3) Cursor
(4) Chart
Submenu
Submenu/Option
Reference
3.13
3.13
(6) Maneuver Curve
3.19
3.19
(8) Cross Bearing
3.20
(0) Option
3.17.2.1
(2) Off Center
(3) ARCS
(1) Event-Mark
3.12.1
3.12.2
3.12.3
(4) Highlight
3.12.4
(5) Delete Event-Mark
3.12.1
(1) Enter Position
3.6.5
(2) Add to My Port List
3.22.1
(3) My Port List
3.6.4, 3.22.2
(4) Home
3.6.1
3.8.3
(2) Select Chart from all
3.8.4
3.8.5
3.8.6
3.8.8
3.8.9
(7) Adjust Datum Offset
3.8.10
(8) Datum Transformation
3.8.10
(4) Select S-57 Chart

(5) User Charts
3.9
(1) Select User Chart
3.10
(2) Chart Editor
5.3
3.10
(6) Manual UpDating

(7) Scale
(8) Azimuth
(9) Motion
5.4.2
(1) Select Scale
3.7.4
(2) Select Range
3.7.3
(3) Zoom In
3.7.2, 3.8.2
(4) Zoom Out
3.7.2, 3.8.2
(1) North Up
3.21.2
(2) Course Up
3.21.2
(3) Rotation
3.21.2
(1) True
3.21.1
(2) Relative
3.21.1
(3) Free
3.21.1
(1) Fix View
3.21.3
3.11
(3) Print Display
3.30
(4) Save Screen
3.31
(0) Option
4 Route Planning
(1) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS
3.24.1
(2) Other Charts
3.24.2
(3) Scale
3.24.3
4-10
Table 4.1 Table Editing Menu Tree -- Continued

Main Menu
(5) View
Submenu
(1) Day-Night
(2) Radar
(3) ARPA/AIS
Submenu/Option
3.3.6
(2) Day Whiteback
3.3.6
(3) Day Blackback
3.3.6
(4) Dusk
3.3.6
(5) Night
3.3.6
(6) Panel Dimmer
3.3.5
(1) Radar 1
3.3.8
(2) Radar 2
3.3.8
(3) Range Rings
3.3.8
(1) ARPA1
3.3.9
(2) ARPA2
3.3.9
(3) Internal ARPA
(4) AIS
3.3.9
(5) ALL
3.3.9
(6) ARPA Release All
3.3.9
(8) ALL List
3.3.9
(9) Select List
3.3.9
(4) Analog Meter
3.15
(5) Logbook
3.23.1
(6) Multi View
(1) Single View
3.14.1
(2) Top Bottom
3.14.1
(3) Right Left
3.14.1
(4) Right Top View
3.14.1
(5) Left Top View
3.14.1
3.14.1
3.14.1
(8) Select Area
3.14.2
(9) Wide Range View

(7) Synchronize Chart-View
(0) Option
(6) Alarm
(7) Tool
Reference
(1) Day Bright
3.14.3
4.1.2.4
(1) Radar
3.27.1
(2) ARPA/AIS
3.27.2
(3) Display Panel
3.15
(4) Logbook
3.23.2
3.27.5
(6) Date/Time
3.27.6
(1) List
3.3.7
(2) History
3.3.7
(0) Option
3.3.5, 3.25
(1) Check Route Safety
4.1.2.4
(2) Check Limits
4.1.2.4
(3)View Ships Parameter
(0) Option
4-11
4 Route Planning
(2) Button functions

Left-click to close the route file and exit the Table Editing mode.
Left-click when making a new route file.
Left-click to select a route file previously made.
Left-click when saving the route file currently made.
Left-click when printing the WP contents. (Only when connected to a printer)
Left-click when inserting a new WP.
Left-click when deleting a WP.
Left-click to divide the GC leg.
Left-click when checking the safety of the route. As a result of the checking,
warning dialog box will appear if the route is not safety.
Left-click to check if the route exceeds the limit (leg length, etc.).
(Currently not available)
Left-click when you want to display the WP during editing.
Left-click the drop-down list button to left-click one of the items. The Name
column contents in the editing table change according to the selected item.
Name :
You can enter name in the Name column.
WP to WP : WP to WP information is displayed.
Total :
4 Route Planning
4-12
WP0 to WPn information is displayed.
4.1.2.3 Operation Flowchart for Table Editor

The following shows the general flowchart for planning a route using the Table Editor.
File opening and saving operation differs depending on whether you make a new route file or you select a
route file previously made, though the table editing operation is the same.
(1) Making a new route file (Table Editor)

Start
Left-click to select [UNLOAD].
Clear any route if

displayed.
Enter the Table
Editing mode.
Left-click [New].
.
In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(5) Planning] - [(1) Table
Editor] in that order.
Open a new route file.
Table editing operation
WP0 entry
Position (Lat./Lon.)
WP0 entry screen
Left-click the next

WP No.
WP1 entry
Position (Lat./Lon.)
Repeat WP entry
until the final WP.
The following items are automatically

displayed. Change, if necessary.
Width (Prt/Stb)
Arr Rad
Speed [kt]
Sail (RL/GC)
Time Zone
Name
Left-click [Save]
Enter the file name.
Left-click [Close]
Exit the Table Editing mode.
End
4-13
4 Route Planning
(2) Editing the route file (Table Editor)
Start
Left-click [UNLOAD].
Clear any route if

displayed.
Enter the Table
Editing mode.
Left-click [Open].
In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(5) Planning] - [(1) Table
Select a route file you want to edit.
Select route type.
Table editing operation
Edit the WP table.
When you want to change the file name.
Left-click [Save]
To save without changing the file name.
Left-click [Save as]

in the menu.
Enter the new file
name.
Left-click [Close]
Exits the Table Editing mode.
End
4 Route Planning
4-14
4.1.2.4 Making a New Route File (Table Editor)

This explanation is made according to (1) Making a new route file (Table Editor) in 4.1.2.3 Operation
Flowchart for Table Editor.
(1) Unloading the selected route before starting

Before starting, left-click the ROUTE drop-down button on the
display panel, and then left-click the [UNLOAD] to clear any
route on the screen.
You can also unload the selected route by the following menu operation.
In the normal menu
(2) Entering the Table Editing mode

In the normal menu
Then, the Table Editing screen opens.
[MENU] Button
When you open the Table Editing menu, left-click the [MENU] button on the display panel.
Then, the Table Editing menu title bar opens. To close it, left-click the [MENU] button again, or
left-click any position on the chart.
[Table Editing Menu]
(3) Opening a new route file

1) To make a new route file, left-click the [New] button.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(1) New] in that order.
4-15
4 Route Planning
(4) Making a route

1) Left-click the Latitude and Longitude in the position column, and enter the position for WP0.
2) Left-click the next WP No. (i.e., WP1).

Then, the same position as the previous WP (i.e. WP0) is automatically set in the position
column. Also, default values are displayed in the other columns.
[Items shown in the table]
Position:
Latitude/Longitude
Width Prt:
Port side width
Width Stb:
Starboard side width
Arr Rad:
Arrival radius
Speed [kt]:
Ships speed
Sail RL/GC: Sail RL (Rhumb line)/GC (Great circle)

Time Zone: Time zone
Name:
Comment entry column.

The contents of column are changed by left-clicking
the [Name] drop-down list button and then [Name],
[WP to WP], or [Total].
Name:
You can enter a comment.
WP to WP: The Name column changes as follows:

Cse: Course to the next WP
Dist: Distance from waypoint to
waypoint
TTG: Estimated time required from
waypoint to waypoint
Total:
The Name column changes as follows:

Cse: Course to the next WP
Dist: Total distance from waypoint 0
to the specified waypoint
ETA: Total time from waypoint 0 to
the specified waypoint
4 Route Planning
4-16
[Entry example: The route displayed on the chart corresponds to the list data.]
Entering GC/RL:
To enter a sailing method, you must enter a letter G (for GC) or a letter R (for RL).
Press the [R] key.

Press the [G] key.
4-17
4 Route Planning
(5) Saving the route file

1) Left-click the [Save] button.
The Save as Route File panel opens.
2) Enter the route file name and comment. Left-click the [OK] button.
3) Left-click the [Close] button.
The Question dialog box will be displayed for confirming the file operation. Left-click Y (Yes)
to close the file. Then, the system exit the Table Editing mode and the list and table editing
buttons are cleared from the screen.
The route file can be edited even after it is saved.
Note:
The route cannot be created if the GC leg extends over 120 and more in longitudinal
direction.
4 Route Planning
4-18
How to edit in the Table Editing Menu:

Left-click WP No. 2, for example, and then left-click the [Insert] button.
Then, the new WP will be added to the WP No. 2, and the WP2 and later WPs will
move by one line downwardly.
Left-click WP No. 2, for example, and then left-click the [Delete] button.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(2) Delete WP] in that order.
Then, the WP2 is deleted and WP3 and later WPs will move by one line upwardly.
After entering WP(s), left-click the [Safety Check] button to check the safety.
Select [MENU] - [(7) Tool] - [(1) Check Route Safety] in that order.
The Route Waring Check panel opens. Left-click
Select Leg or All Leg and left click the [OK]
button. (When you use Select Leg, you should
select a WP to be checked beforehand.)
The Safety Check function checks not only the
displayed chart but also all-scale S-57/C-MAP
charts that cross the route to be checked.
If there are no safety issues, the following messages are displayed in the [Route
Check] result display box.
[For Select Leg ]
[For All Leg ]
4-19
4 Route Planning
How to edit in the Table Editing Menu -- Continued:

If the following message is displayed, you should modify the route.
The leg warned is displayed in red in the table. The leg is displayed in red on the
chart.
And dangerous objected is emphasized in black color.
Shown in red
Shown in red
You can make a route while watching the WP on the chart. For example, above chart
is made with the [View Sync] button left-clicked to set it ON.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(7) Synchronize Chart-View] in that order.
Left-click to check if the route exceeds the limit (leg length, etc.).
(Currently not available)

Select [MENU] - [(7) Tool] - [(2) Check Limits] in that order.
4 Route Planning
4-20

1) Left-click the WP with GC leg you want to divide in the WP table.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(3) Divide Leg] in that order.
(When you want to divide the leg between WP2 and WP3, select WP3.)
Then, the Divide Route WP2 to WP3 panel will open.
Every (Lon): Divides the GC leg every specified longitude value.

Every:
Divides the GC leg every specified distance.

Then, the leg is divided according to the setting. (Note that the divided leg type is
changed from GC to RL.)
[Before dividing]
[After dividing]
4-21
4 Route Planning

[Before dividing RL leg]
[After dividing]
4 Route Planning
4-22

[Editing the Course and Distance in the WP to WP display mode]
In the Table Editing mode, left-click the following drop-down list button and select
[WP to WP]. You can edit the values of Cse (Course to the next WP) and Dist
(Distance to the next WP) columns.
Example:
In the following example, the Cse and Dist for the WP1 are modified. As a result,
the position of the WP2 changes according to this modification. Since the
position of the WP2 changes, the Cse and Dist values of WP2 for WP3 also
change.
WP2 (After modification)
WP3
WP1
WP2 (Before modification)
[Editing the ETA in the Total display mode]

In the Table Editing mode, left-click the following drop-down list button and select
[Total]. You can edit the value of ETA (Estimated time of arrival to the WP from
WP0) column.
When you edit the WPns ETA, the ETA and ETD of WP0 to WPn-1 are
calculated based on the WPns ETA, and the calculated ETA values are
displayed in the table.
4-23
4 Route Planning

[Sort Reversely]
In the Table Editing mode

Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(5) Sort Reversely] in that order.
Then, the WPs in the list and chart are displayed in the reverse order.
Before reverse sorting
After reverse sorting
4 Route Planning
4-24
4.1.2.5 Editing a Previous Route File (Table Editor)

This explanation is made according to (2) Editing the route file (Table Editor) in 4.1.2.3 Operation
Flowchart for Table Editor.

In the normal menu
(2) Entering the Table Editing mode

In the normal menu
- When you open the Table Editing menu, press the [MENU] button on the display panel.
Then, the Table Editing menu title bar opens. To close it, left-click the [MENU] button again, or
[Table Editing Menu]
(3) Selecting the route file

1) To select the route file, left-click the [Open] button.
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(2) Open] in that order.
The Open Route File panel opens.
2) Select a route file you want to edit, and left-click the [OK] button.
Then, the selected file opens on the screen.
Now you can edit the file in the same way as when you make a new route file.
4-25
4 Route Planning

When saving without changing the file name:
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(4) Save] in that order.
2) Left-click the [Close] button to exit the Table Editing mode.
When saving as the new file:
1) In the Table Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(5) Save As] in the order.
2) Enter the new file name and comment, left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
If you want to change the route type, change it to another one. For detailed description, see
(5) Saving the route file in 4.1.2.4 Making a New Route File (Table Editor).
3) Left-click the [Close] button to close the file.
4.1.2.6 Importing Route Files

(1) Importing Normal Route Files
Import normal route files that were exported from this equipment.
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(3) Import] - [(1) Normal] in that order.
Then, use the Open panel to select the name of a file to be imported. Only routes having a file
name starting with rtn_ can be selected. The name of the file to be opened will be displayed in
the file name box after selecting the file. Left-click on the [OK] button to start file import (for route
export, see 4.1.2.7 Exporting Route Files).
CSV format:
For each WP of a route, a file containing a data row is created. Data are divided by a comma in this
file. You can use Microsoft EXCEL to edit this file.
4 Route Planning
4-26
(2) Importing Route Files Created with Other ECDIS Models (2G TCS)
Import CSV format route files created with other models ECDIS (JAN-3598), Total Navigator
(JAN-1290, JAN-1397), Chart Display Unit (JAN-1100) we offer.
To convert route files into CSV format, conversion software should be procured separately.
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(3) Import] - [(3) 2G TCS] in that order.
Then, use the Open panel to select the name of a file to be imported. The name of the file to be
opened will be displayed in the file name box after selecting the file. Left-click on the [OK] button
to start file import.
- About the format of route files for importing, see 14.4 Data Formats of Files that ECDIS can
Import/Export.
Note:
Use routes based on the world geodesic system (WGS-84).
4.1.2.7 Exporting Route Files

Save newly created route files or already opened route files in CSV format.
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(6) Export] in that order.
Then, use the Save As panel to select the name of a file to be exported. If a route file to be exported
already has a name, save it as rtn_[route name].csv. If you wish to change the file name, follow the
naming rules such as rtn_[route name].csv (normal route). Left-click on the [OK] button to save the
route file under the name displayed in the file name box.
Example:
When exporting a file test.rtn, its
name will be set to rtn_test.csv.
- About the format of route files for exporting, see 14.4 Data Formats of Files that ECDIS can
Import/Export.
Note:
Do not use exported routes in systems other than the world geodesic system (WGS-84).
4-27
4 Route Planning
4.1.3 Route Planning Using the Graphic Editor

The order of explanation here is as follows:
About the Graphic Editing mode
Graphic editing menu and button functions
Operation flowchart
Detailed operation
The route you have made with the Graphic Editor can be edited with the Table Editor.

The file operation using [New], [Open], [Save] and [Close] button is the same as for Table Editor. In the
Graphic Editor, you can make a route graphically by positioning the WPs. The position (latitude/longitude)
of the cursor is shown on the bottom of the display panel for your reference. After you have entered the
WP, you can move the WP with the [Move] button or edit the WP position with the [Info] button. Also, the
route you have made can be edited with the Table Editor.
For positioning the WPs, you can also use the EBL/VRM keys and dials on the operation panel.
4.1.3.1 Graphic Editing Mode

In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(5) Planning] - [(2) Graphic Editor] in that order.
The Graphic Editing screen as shown beliw will open.
On this screen you can make or edit the route graphically.
[Graphic Editing Screen]
How to open the Graphic Editing Menu:

Left-clicking the [MENU] button on the display panel in the Graphic Editing mode will open the special
menu for Graphic Editor.
4 Route Planning
4-28
How to exit the graphic editing mode:

Left-click the [Close] button. Alternatively, in the Graphic Editing menu, select [(1) File] - [(0) Exit from
Route Planning] in that order.
How to print the WP table contents (only when a printer is connected):

Open the route file (WP table) to be printed, and left-click the [Print] button. Alternatively, in the Graphic
Editing menu, select [(1) File] - [(7) Print WP Table] in that order.
4.1.3.2 Graphic Editing Menu and Button Functions (Graphic Editor)

(1) Graphic editing menu
The following shows each menu in the Graphic Editing mode:
Table 4.2 Graphic Editing Menu Tree
Main Menu
(1) File
Submenu
Submenu/Option
(1) New
4.1.3.4
(2) Open
(3) Import
(2) Edit
(3) Cursor
Reference
4.1.3.5
(1) Normal
4.1.3.6
(2) TCS
(3) 2G TCS
4.1.3.6
(4) Save
4.1.3.5
(5) Save As
4.1.3.5
(6) Export
4.1.3.7
(7) Print WP Table
(0) Exit from Route Planning
(1) Select
(2) Add WP
4.1.3.4
(3) Insert WP
4.1.3.4
(4) Move WP
4.1.3.4
(5) Delete WP
4.1.3.4
(6) Undelete
(7) Use EBL/VRM
4.1.3.4
(8) Use Assistant-Circle
4.1.3.4
(9) Divide Leg
4.1.3.4
(1) Sort Reversely
(0) WP/Leg Information
4.1.3.4
(1) Scroll
3.6.2
(2) Zoom Area
3.7.1

(6) Remove EBL/VRM
3.8.1
(1) Ship-Centered
3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(2) Floating
3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(1) Ship-Centered
3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(2) Floating
3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(7) Running Fix
3.18
3.18
(9) ARPA Manual Acq
4-29
4 Route Planning
Table 4.2 Graphic Editing Menu Tree -- Continued

Main Menu
(3) Cursor
(4) Chart
Submenu
Submenu/Option
Reference
(1) ARPA Release
(2) Activate AIS
3.3.9
(3) Deactivate AIS
3.3.9
3.13
3.13
(6) Maneuver Curve
3.19
3.19
(8) Cross Bearing
3.20
(0) Option
3.17.2.1
(2) Off Center
(3) ARCS
(1) Event-Mark
3.12.1
3.12.2
3.12.3
(4) Highlight
3.12.4
3.12.1
(1) Enter Position
3.6.5
(2) Add to my Port List
3.22.1
(3) My Port List
3.6.4, 3.22.2
(4) Home
3.6.1
3.8.3
3.8.4
3.8.5
3.8.6
3.8.8
3.8.9
3.8.10
3.8.10
3.10
(2) Chart Editor
3.10

(5) User Charts
3.9
(6) Manual UpDating

(7) Scale
(8) Azimuth
(9) Motion
(1) Select Scale
3.7.4
(2) Select Range
3.7.3
(3) Zoom In
3.7.2, 3.8.2
(4) Zoom Out
3.7.2, 3.8.2
(1) North Up
3.21.2
(2) Course Up
3.21.2
(3) Rotation
3.21.2
(1) True
3.21.1
(2) Relative
3.21.1
(3) Free
3.21.1
(1) Fix View
3.21.3
3.11
(3) Print Display
3.30
(4) Save Screen
3.31
4 Route Planning
4-30
Table 4.2 Graphic Editing Menu Tree -- Continued

Main Menu
(4) Chart
(5) View
Submenu
(0) Option
(1) Day-Night
(2) Radar
(3) ARPA/AIS
Submenu/Option
3.24.1
(2) Other Charts
3.24.2
(3) Scale
3.24.3
(1) Day Bright
3.3.6
(2) Day Whiteback
3.3.6
(3) Day Blackback
3.3.6
(4) Dusk
3.3.6
(5) Night
3.3.6
(6) Panel Dimmer
3.3.5
(1) Radar 1
3.3.8
(2) Radar 2
3.3.8
(3) Range Rings
3.3.8
(1) ARPA1
3.3.9
(2) ARPA2
3.3.9
(3) Internal ARPA
(4) AIS
3.3.9
(5) ALL
3.3.9
3.3.9
(8) ALL List
3.3.9
(9) Select List
3.15
(5) Logbook
3.23.1
(0) Option
(7) Tool
3.3.9
(4) Analog Meter

(6) Multi View
(6) Alarm
Reference
(1) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS
(1) Single View
3.14.1
(2) Top Bottom
3.14.1
(3) Right Left
3.14.1
(4) Right Top View
3.14.1
(5) Left Top View
3.14.1
3.14.1
3.14.1
(8) Select Area
3.14.2
(9) Wide Range View
3.14.3
(1) Radar
3.27.1
(2) ARPA/AIS
3.27.2
(3) Display Panel
3.15
(4) Logbook
3.23.2
3.27.5
(6) Date/Time
3.27.6
(1) List
3.3.7
(2) History
3.3.7
(0) Option
3.3.5, 3.25
(1) Check Route Safety
3.4.3
(3)View Ships Parameter
(0) Option
4-31
4 Route Planning
Shortcut Menus
Right-clicking when editing a graphic will display a shortcut menu. One of the menus below will
be displayed, depending on the operation state when right clicking.
Same button operation:

[Insert]
Divide GC leg
Selecting a leg
Same button operation:

[Add]
[Move]
[Delete]
Selecting a waypoint
Enter an object at the designated longitude and latitude.
Entering, moving and adding a route
4 Route Planning
Designate the bearing and distance from the previous way

point, and enter an object in that position.
4-32

Left-click to exit the Graphic Editing mode.
Left-click when making a new route file.
Left-click to select a route file previously made.
Left-click when saving the route file currently made.
Left-click when printing the WP contents. (Only when connected to a printer)
Left-click when terminating the current editing operation or when selecting the
WP or leg.
Left-click when adding a WP to the WP0 or the to the last WP.
Left-click when inserting a WP in the course of the route.
Left-click when moving a WP.
Left-click when deleting a WP.
Left-click when opening the information panel of the selected WP or leg.
4-33
4 Route Planning
4.1.3.3 Operation Flowchart for Graphic Editor (Graphic Editing)

The following shows the general flowchart for planning a route using the Graphic Editor.
File opening and saving operation differs depending on whether you make a new route file or you select a
route file previously made, though the graphic editing operation is the same.
The file opening and saving operation is the same as when using the Table Editor.
(1) Making a new route file (Graphic Editor)

Start
: The same procedure as for the Table Editor.
Left-click to select [UNLOAD].
Clear any route if

displayed.
Enter the Graphic

Editing mode.
Left-click [New].
In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(5) Planning] - [(2) Graphic
Open a new route file.
Graphic editing operation

WP0 entry
(using the cursor)
Next WP entry
(using the cursor)
Repeat WP entry until
the final WP.
Left-click [Save]
Enter the file name.
Left-click [Close]
Exits the Graphic Editing mode.
End
4 Route Planning
4-34
(2) Editing the route file (Graphic Editor)

Start
: The same procedure as for the Table Editor.
Clear any route if

displayed.
Left-click [UNLOAD].
Enter the Graphic

Editing mode.
In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(5) Planning] - [(2) Graphic
Left-click [Open].
Select a route file you want to edit.
Select route type.
Graphic editing operation
Edit the WP.
When you want to change the file name.
Left-click [Save]
To save without changing the file name.
Left-click [Save as]

in the menu.
Enter the new file
name.
Left-click [Close]
Exits the Graphic Editing mode.
End
4-35
4 Route Planning
4.1.3.4 Making a New Route File (Graphic Editing)

This explanation is made according to (1) Making a new route file (Graphic Editor) in 4.1.3.3 Operation
Flowchart for Graphic Editor (Graphic Editing).

In the normal menu
(2) Entering the Graphic Editing mode

[MENU] Button
When you open the Graphic Editing menu, press the [MENU] button on the display panel.
Then, the Graphic Editing menu title bar opens. To close it, left-click the [MENU] button again, or
[Graphic Editing Menu]
(3) Opening a new route file

1) To make a new route file, left-click the [New] button.
In the Graphic Editing menu
How to save the route:
The route file saving operation is exactly the same as for Table Editor.
See (5) Saving the route file in 4.1.2.4 Making a New Route File (Table Editor).
4 Route Planning
4-36
(4) Making a route

Making a route using buttons on the screen:
The following shows the way how to make a route using the buttons on the screens. (You can mix
the EBL/VRM operation with this button operation. See 4.1.3.8 Creating a Route Using EBL/VRM
Keys and Dials.) Operate while watching the cursor position displayed at the bottom of the display
panel.
Note:
If [(7) Use EBL/VRM] is on (with a checkmark), operation using EBL/VRM is to be performed.
If [(8) Use Assistant Circle] is on, operation using supplemental lines is to be performed. To
turn on/off each item, select the menu. Operation using EBL/VRM and operation using
supplemental lines cannot be turned on at the same time.
While [(7) Use EBL/VRM] is on, turning on [(8) Use Assistant Circle] turns on operation using
supplemental lines. Conversely, while [(8) Use Assistant Circle] is on, turning on [(7) Use
EBL/VRM] turns on operation using EBL/VRM.
4-37
4 Route Planning
1) Entering WPs:
Left-click at the WP (WP0) position and rotate the trackball to move the cursor to the next WP
(WP1).
Then, left-click there.
[WP0 fixing/WP0 to WP1]
[WP1 fixing]
[WP1 to WP2]
[WP2 fixing]
4 Route Planning
4-38
How to shift the chart during entering WPs:

Left-click on the chart and hold the button down, and then move the cursor to scroll the chart
while entering WPs.
2) Terminating WP entry:
Left-click the [Select] button to terminate WP entry. (You can also terminate the operation by
selecting [Abort] in the shortcut menu after right-clicking.)
[Left-clicking [Select] to stop entry]
[The route you have entered]
Note:
If a waypoint is located in a position other than an active chart when using ARCS and if another
panel exists at that position, then the panel display will change automatically.
Creating routes using EBL/VRM:

Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(7) Use EBL/VRM] in that order.
The EBL/VRM intersection becomes an entering position instead of a cursor.
Entering position
Line drawn from

the previous WP
Then, decide where the EBL/VRM
intersection will be and left-click on it.
First, left-click on the center of

EBL/VRM.
4-39
4 Route Planning
Creating routes using supplemental lines:

Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(8) Use Assistant Circle] in that order.
WP input using a supplemental line is enabled.
1) WP0 input
Move the cursor to an arbitrary position, and left-click. A supplemental line from the own
ships position will be displayed. Move the trackball to move the intersection between the
circles radius and supplemental line to WP0, and left-click.
Supplemental line
Cursor
Supplemental line
WP0
WP0
This circle is not displayed in actual operation.
4 Route Planning
4-40
2) Specify the center of the circle, and left-click.
WP0
Supplemental line
3) Move the trackball to specify the contact with the circles radius, and left-click.
The
intersection between the circle and supplemental line will be entered as a WP.
WP0
Supplemental line
WP1
4-41
4 Route Planning
How to edit in the Graphic Editing Menu:

Deleting the WP:
1) Left-click a WP you want to delete. (If you cannot select the WP, left-click the
[Select] button before starting operation.)
2) Left-click the [Delete] button. Then, the selected WP is deleted.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(5) Delete WP] in that order.
[Select WP3.]
[WP3 is deleted.]
Adding a WP to the WP0 or to the last WP:

1) Left-click the WP0 or the last WP. (If you cannot select the WP, left-click the
2) Left-click the [Add] button and rotate the trackball to move the cursor for
additional WP. Then, left-click the cursor to fix the WP.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(2) Add WP] in that order.
3) Left-click the [Select] button to terminate the adding operation.
[Select WP2 (the last WP).]
4 Route Planning
[WP3 is added.]
4-42
How to edit in the Graphic Editing Menu -- Continued:

Moving a WP (other than WP0 and the last WP):
1) Left-click a WP you want to move. (If you cannot select the WP, left-click the
2) Left-click the [Move] button and rotate the trackball to move the cursor for
moving the WP. Then, left-click the cursor to fix the WP.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(4) Move WP] in that order.
[Select WP2.]
[Move WP2.]
[WP2 is moved.]
Tips!
Left-click the WP you want to move, and then, left-click it again. [Move] mode will be activated.
4-43
4 Route Planning

Inserting a new WP between WPs:
1) Left-click the leg you want to insert a new WP there. (If you cannot select the
leg, left-click the [Select] button before starting operation.)
2) Left-click the [Insert] button and rotate the trackball to insert a new WP. Then,
left-click the cursor to fix the WP. A new WP is inserted and the number of the
later WPs is increased by 1.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(3) Insert WP] in that order.
[Select the leg.]
[Make a new WP.]
[New WP is inserted as WP2.]
Tips!
Left-click the leg where you want to insert a WP, and then, left-click it again. [Insert] mode will
be activated.
4 Route Planning
4-44

Designating coordinates by entering the position or entering the bearing/distance:
Positions can be designated by entering the position or entering the bearing/distance instead of
left-clicking on the chart to designate a coordinate when entering, moving, inserting and adding route.
Designating coordinates by entering position
1) Make sure the system will accept cursor designation of coordinates when entering, moving,
cursor type on
inserting and adding route. (Make sure that the cursor has changed to the
the chart.)
2) Click the right trackball button, then select [Enter Lat/Lon] from the shortcut menu.
3) Enter the position (longitude and latitude), then left-click the [OK] button.
The panel is closed and the position is designated.
Designating coordinates by entering bearing/distance
inserting and adding route. (Make sure that the cursor has changed to the
cursor type
on the chart.)
2) Click the right trackball button, then select [Enter Bearing/Distance] from the shortcut menu.
The Bearing/Distance panel opens.
3) Enter the bearing and distance from the previous way point, then left-click the [OK] button.
Note:
When entering the second way point of a route, the bearing and distance are those from the
previous way point. The shortcut menus cannot be used when designating coordinates that do
not require relative positions, such as the first way point of route.
4-45
4 Route Planning

Displaying/Modifying information of WP or leg:
1) Left-click a WP or leg you want to know about it. (If you cannot select the WP
or leg, left-click the [Select] button before starting operation.)
2) Left-click the [Info] button.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(0) WP/Leg Information] in that order.
When WP is selected, [Edit Way Point No.xx] panel opens, while [Edit leg x
to x+1] panel opens when Leg is selected.
Enter the value if you want to change. You can enter a name for the WP. If
you want to return each value to the default value, left-click the [Default]
button. (The default value is set in the Route Plan Option panel. See 4.1.1
Setting the Route Options.) After setting, left-click the [OK] button to close
the panel.
[Information for WP2.]
[Information for Leg.]
4 Route Planning
4-46

[Calculate Distance to Run]
You can calculate the distance between WPs or between own ship and a WP
with the calculator (Calculating Distance panel).
1) In the Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Tool] - [(2) Calculate Distance to Run] in the order.
Then, the Calculating Distance panel opens.
2) Left-click the drop-down list button in the [From] panel, and select [Way
Point], [Picked Point], or [Own Ship]. If you have selected [Way Point] or
[Own Ship], select the WP number you want from the WP No. drop-down list.
If you have selected [Picked Point], specify coordinates by left-clicking an
arbitrary point on the route.
3) Left-click the drop-down list button in the [To] panel, and select [Way Point] or
[Picked Point]. If you have selected [Way Point], select the WP number you
want from the WP No. drop-down list. If you have selected [Picked Point],
specify coordinates by left-clicking an arbitrary point on the route.
4) The distance from the start point to the end point is automatically calculated,
and the calculation result is displayed in the [Distance] box. Left-click the
[Close] button.
[Select WP/Own Ship.]
[Select WP No.]
[Resultant]
4-47
4 Route Planning

[Divide GC Leg]
1) Left-click the GC leg you want to divide.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(9) Divide Leg] in that order.
Then, the Divide Route WPn-1 to WPn will open.
- Every (Lon): Divides the GC leg every specified longitude value.

- Every:
Divides the GC leg every specified distance.

Then, the leg is divided according to the setting. (Note that the divided leg
type is changed from GC to RL.)
[Before dividing]
[After dividing]
4 Route Planning
4-48

[Before dividing RL leg]
[After dividing]
4-49
4 Route Planning
4.1.3.5 Editing a Previous Route File (Graphic Editor)

This explanation is made according to (2) Editing the route file (Graphic Editor) in 4.1.3.3 Operation
Flowchart for Graphic Editor (Graphic Editing).

In the normal menu
(2) Entering the Graphic Editing mode

- When you open the Graphic Editing menu, press the [MENU] button on the display panel.
Then, the Graphic Editing menu title bar opens. To close it, left-click the [MENU] button again,
or left-click any position on the chart.
[Graphic Editing Menu]
(3) Selecting the route file

1) To select the route file, left-click the [Open] button.
The Open Route File panel opens.
2) Select a route file you want to edit, and left-click the [OK] button.
Then, the selected file opens on the screen. Now you can edit the file in the same way as when
you make a new route file.
4 Route Planning
4-50

When saving without changing the file name:
2) Left-click the [Close] button to exit the Graphic Editing mode.
When saving as the new file:
2) Enter the new file name and comment, left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
3) Left-click the [Close] button to close the file.
4.1.3.6 Importing Route Files

(1) Importing Normal Route Files
Import CSV format normal route files that were exported from this equipment.
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(3) Import] - [(1) Normal] in that order.
Then, use the Open panel to select the name of a file to be imported. Only routes having a file
name starting with rtn_ can be selected. The name of the file to be opened will be displayed in
the file name box after selecting the file. Left-click on the [OK] button to start file import (for route
export, see 4.1.3.7 Exporting Route Files).
4-51
4 Route Planning
(2) Importing Route Files Created with Other ECDIS Models (2G ANTS)
Import CSV format route files created with other models ECDIS (JAN-3598), Total Navigator
(JAN-1290, JAN-1397), Chart Display Unit (JAN-1100) we offer.
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(3) Import] - [(3) 2G ANTS] in that order
Then, use the Open panel to select the name of a file to be imported. The name of the file to be
opened will be displayed in the file name box after selecting the file. Press the [OK] button to start
file import.
Note:
Use routes based on the world geodesic system (WGS-84).
4.1.3.7 Exporting Route Files

Save newly created route files or already opened route files in CSV format.
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(6) Export] in that order.
Then, use the Save As panel to select the name of a file to be exported. If a route file to be exported
already has a name, save it as rtn_[route name].csv. If you wish to change the file name, follow the
naming rules such as rtn_[route name].csv (normal route). Left-click on the [OK] button to save the
route file under the name displayed in the file name box.
Example:
When exporting a file test.rtn, its
name will be set to rtn_test.csv.
Note:
Do not use exported routes in systems other than the world geodesic system (WGS-84).
4 Route Planning
4-52
4.1.3.8 Creating a Route Using EBL/VRM Keys and Dials

The following shows the way how to make a route using the EBL/VRM keys and dials on the operation
panel. (You can mix the EBL/VRM operation with the button operation on the screen mentioned earlier.)
Note:
Before starting, be sure that [(7) Use EBL/VRM] is set to ON.
If not,
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(7) Use EBL/VRM] in that order to set it ON.
Be sure that the check mark is attached.
The EBL cursor is displayed on the screen. (The cursor type changes when [(7) Use EBL/VRM] is
set to ON.) Operate while watching the cursor position displayed at the bottom of the display panel.
1) Press the [EBL1], [EBL2], [VRM1], or [VRM2] key on the operation panel.
2) Move the cursor to the voluntary point. (e.g. cape) and left-click there.
Left-click
Line drawn from own ship
4-53
4 Route Planning
3) Turn the EBL/VRM dial to move the point of intersection to the planned WP0, and left-click there.
Left-click
4) Move the cursor to the voluntary point. (e.g. cape) and left-click there.
(A line will be drawn through the WP0 and EBL/VRM intersection.)
(This circle is not displayed.)
Left-click
4 Route Planning
4-54
5) Turn the EBL/VRM dial to move the point of intersection to the next WP (WP1), and left-click
there.
Left-click
Green line
(Starboard side)
Red line
(Port side)
6) Follow the steps 4) and 5) until you make the final WP.
How to Edit the Route:

After pressing the [Add], [Move], or [Insert] button on the screen, you can add, move, or insert a WP
in the same EBL/VRM operation as above.
4-55
4 Route Planning
4.2 Creating an Alternate Route

During voyage only, you can create an alternate route while referring to the current route on the screen.
The alternate route can be saved as a TEMP file, or by naming a new route name.
The alternate route can be created in the same manner as for making a route using the Graphic Editor.
The operation buttons and the special menu for creating an alternate route are exactly the same as those
for the Graphic Editor. So, the same explanation is omitted here. For omitted information, see 4.1.3
Route Planning Using the Graphic Editor. You can use EBL/VRM in the same way as for the Graphic
Editor, though the explanation is omitted here.
Note:
Whether the alternate route is replaced with the original route or not depends the saving methods.
- When you left-click the [Save] button and then [Close] button after you made the alternate route,
the original route is replaced with the alternate route. (In this case, the alternate route file name is
TEMP.)
Normally, you will use this method for alternate route.
- When you saved as a new file using the Save as menu, the alternate route is not replaced with
the original route.
(For details, see (3) Saving the alternate route file in 4.2.2 Creating
Alternate Route.)
4.2.1 Operation Flowchart

Start
During voyage
(Route is displayed.)
Enter Create Alternate
Route mode.
Alternate route
making operation
Be sure that the current route is displayed on the screen.
In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(4) Create Alternate Route] in that
order.
Create the alternate route in the same manner as for the Graphic Editor.
To create an alternative route, you will use the following buttons.
: For [Info] button, see 4.1.3 Route Planning Using the Graphic
Editor.
Left-click the [Save]

button.
Left-click [Close]
The original route is replaced with the alternate route.

(If you simply want to save the alternate route file and you are not intending to
replace the route, you should use Save as menu. In this case, the original route
remains as it is. For details, see (3) Saving the alternate route file in 4.2.2
Creating Alternate Route.)
Exits the Alternate Route Creating mode.
End
4 Route Planning
4-56
4.2.2 Creating Alternate Route

The following two charts show the original route and the altered route, respectively. You will see that,
during creating alternate route, the alternate route is displayed together with the original route.
In this example, the following WPs are altered:
Position of WP1 (Moved)
WP2 (Inserted. So, the number of the later WPs is increased by 1.)
WP6 (Added one WP to the last WP.)
You will learn how to accomplish these alterations.
[Original Route]
[Original Route and Created Alternate Route]
WP6:
Added to the last WP.
Alternate Route
WP1:
Position changed.
WP2:
Inserted.
4-57
4 Route Planning
(1) Alternate Route Editing mode

In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(4) Create Alternate Route] in that order.
The Alternate Route Editing screen as shown below will open. (This screen is the same as for
Graphic Editor.)
[Alternate Route Editing Screen]
[MENU] Button
Opening the Alternate Route Editing Menu:

On the display panel in the Alternate Route Editing mode
Left-clicking the [MENU] button.
The special menu for Alternate Route Editor will open. (This menu is the same as for Graphic
Editor.)
(2) Creating Alternate Route

The following shows the way how to make an alternate route using the buttons on the screens.
(When you use the EBL/VRM on the operation panel, see 4.1.3.8 Creating a Route Using
EBL/VRM Keys and Dials.
Operate while watching the cursor position displayed at the bottom of the display panel.
Note:
Alternate routes will be displayed in orange so that the modified section can be differentiated from
the original route.
4 Route Planning
4-58
Moving the WP for Alternate Route:

1) Left-click WP1 to move it. (If you cannot select the WP, left-click the [Select] button before
starting operation.)
2) Left-click the [Move] button and rotate the trackball to move the cursor for moving WP1. Then,
left-click to fix the new WP1 for the alternate route.
[Select WP1.]
[Move WP1.]
[Fix the new WP1 for alternate route.]

How to shift the chart during making an
alternate route:
Left-click on the chart and hold the button
down, and then move the cursor to scroll
the chart while creating alternate routes.
Moved new WP (WP1).

Alternate route is created. (Orange)
4-59
4 Route Planning
Inserting the WP for Alternate Route:

1) Left-click the leg between WP1 and WP2. (If you cannot select the leg, left-click the [Select]
button before starting operation.)
2) Left-click the [Insert] button and rotate the trackball to move the cursor for inserting a new WP.
Then, left-click to fix the WP. New WP2 is inserted and the number of the later WPs is increased
by 1.
[Select the leg.]
[Left-click the [Insert] button.]
[Position the new WP2.]
[New WP is inserted as WP2.]
Inserted WP (WP2).
4 Route Planning
4-60
Adding the WP for Alternate Route:

You can add the WP to the first WP or to the last WP.
1) Left-click the last WP. (If you cannot select the WP, left-click the [Select] button before starting
operation.)
2) Left-click the [Add] button and rotate the trackball to move the cursor for additional WP. Then,
left-click to fix the WP.
3) Left-click the [Select] button to terminate the adding operation.
[Select the last WP.]
[Position the new last WP.]
[WP6 is added as the last WP.]
Added WP (WP6).
4-61
4 Route Planning
Deleting the WP from Alternate Route:

1) Left-click a WP you want to delete. (If you cannot select the WP, left-click the [Select] button
before starting operation.)
2) Left-click the [Delete] button. The selected WP will be deleted.
(In the example, WP2 is deleted. You can also delete any WP of the alternate route, such as
WP3.)
[Select WP2.]
[WP2 is deleted.]
You can use this button to display and edit the selected WP and leg.
For details, see [Info] button (page 4-45) of (4) Making a route in 4.1.3.4
Making a New Route File (Graphic Editing).
[Calculate Distance to Run]:

In the Alternate Route Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Tool] - [(2) Calculate Distance to Run] in that order.
You can automaticaly calculate the distance between WPs, or the distance between own ship and a
WP.
For calculation, the Calculating Distance panel is used.
For details, see Calculate Distance to Run (page 4-46) of (4) Making a route in 4.1.3.4 Making a
New Route File (Graphic Editing).
4 Route Planning
4-62
(3) Saving the alternate route file

a) When saving without changing the file name ([Save] button):
Note:
In this case, the file is saved as TEMP, and, when you close the file, the alternate route
TEMP becomes the new route. Namely, the original route is replaced with the alternate
route TEMP.
Then, the alternate route file is save as TEMP.
2) Left-click the [Close] button to exit the Alternate Route Editing mode.
Then, the original route on the screen is replaced with the alternate route TEMP.
b) When saving as the new file ([(4) Save as] menu):
Note:
In this case, the file is saved as the name you given, and, even when you close the file, the
original route is maintained. Namely, the route is not replaced with the alternate route.
1) In the Alternate Route Editing menu
2) Enter the file name and comment.

4) Left-click the [Close] button to exit the Alternate Route Editing mode.
4-63
4 Route Planning
Chart Editing
5-1
This chapter describes how to create user charts and how to manually update charts.
User Charts
User charts can be created and displayed on other charts. User chart information contains various
objects (symbols, lines, areas, and texts). User charts can also be edited and updated. Also, you can
merge multiple charts together to create one user chart.
The following figures show how to use user charts:
Example 1:
Example 2:
Example 3:
User Chart 2
User Chart 1
Chart
User Chart 2
User Chart 1
Chart
You can merge as

one user chart.
Chart
How to Display the User Chart:

To display the user chart, see 3.10 Displaying a User Chart.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(5) User Charts] - [(1) Select User Chart] in the order.
Manual Update
Objects (symbols, lines, areas, and texts) can be manually updated.
When you save data after
manually updating the objects, there will be a panel for you to enter the issue date of a notice to mariners.
Enter the date. You can check the issue dates of a notice to mariners by using S-57/C-MAP/ARCS
information.
Unlike User Chart Edit operation, Manual Update operation links objects directly to the chart. Therefore,
the objects updated manually in the chart cannot be deleted as desired, but can only be hidden from the
chart. For the method of hiding the objects, see 5.5.3 Hiding Objects (Only during the Manual Update
Operation).
When all the following conditions are met, objects updated manually are deleted automatically from the
chart.
The chart having objects updated manually has been updated in Chart Portfolio.
3 months or more have passed since the chart was updated manually.
The objects to be deleted are hidden from the chart.
Note:
ARCS and C-MAP Ed.3 charts cannot be updated manually.
The objects updated manually in S-57, S-63 or C-MAP Ed.2 chart can be used commonly in those
charts.
5 Chart Editing
5-2
5.1 Chart Edit Mode

There are two modes in this Chart Edit mode: User Chart Edit mode and Manual Update mode. Follow
the procedure below to start there modes.
User Chart Edit mode:
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(5) User Charts] - [(2) Chart Editor] in that order.
A chart edit screen as shown below will be displayed. Use this screen to create/edit a user chart.
[Chart Editing Screen]
[MENU] Button
Manual Update mode:

In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(6) Manual UpDating] in that order.
A chart edit screen similar to the above will be displayed (buttons at the top and the object entering
screen on the left are slightly different).
Use this screen to manually update a chart.
How to open the Chart Edit menu:

In User Chart Edit mode or Manual Update mode
Left-click on the [MENU] button on the display panel. The following Chart Edit menu will be
displayed at the top of the screen.
5-3
5 Chart Editing
5.2 Menus and Button Functions

5.2.1 Chart Editing Menu
Menu items available in Chart Edit mode are shown below. The same menu items are displayed in User
Chart Edit mode and Manual Update mode, but there will be some special menu items for each mode.
Table 5.1 User Chart Editing Menu Tree
Main Menu
(1) File
Submenu
Submenu/Option
5.3.2.1
(2) Open
5.3.2.2
(3) Import
(1) CVS file (WGS-84)
5.3.2.4
(2) CVS file (TOKYO)
5.3.2.4
(4) Save
(2) Edit
(3) Cursor
Reference
(1) New
5.3.2.2
(5) Save As
5.3.2.1, 5.3.2.2
(6) Merge
5.3.2.3
(0) Exit from Chart Editor
(1) Select
(2) Add Point
5.5.2
(3) Insert Point
5.5.2
(4) Move
5.5.2
(5) Delete
5.5.2
(6) Undelete
5.5.2
(7) Hide Object
5.5.3
(8) Hide All
5.5.3
(9) Reset Hide
5.5.3
(1) Use EBL/VRM
5.4.2, 5.3.2.1, 5.3.2.2, 5.5.2
(0) Location/Attributes
5.5.2
(1) Scroll
3.6.2
(2) Zoom Area
3.7.1
3.8.1

(6) Remove EBL/VRM
(1) Ship-Centered
3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(2) Floating
3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(1) Ship-Centered
3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(2) Floating
3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(7) Running Fix
3.18
3.18
(9) ARPA Manual Acq
(1) ARPA Release
(2) Activate AIS
3.3.9
(3) Deactivate AIS
3.3.9
3.13
3.13
5 Chart Editing
5-4
Table 5.1 User Chart Editing Menu Tree -- Continued

Main Menu
(3) Cursor
(4) Chart
Submenu
Submenu/Option
Reference
(6) Maneuver Curve
3.19
3.19
(8) Cross Bearing
3.20
(0) Option
3.17.2.1
(2) Off Center
(3) ARCS
(1) Event-Mark
3.12.1
3.12.2
3.12.3
(4) Highlight
3.12.4
3.12.1
(1) Enter Position
3.6.5
(2) Add to my Port List
3.22.1
(3) My Port List
3.6.4, 3.22.2
(4) Home
3.6.1
3.8.3
3.8.4
3.8.5
3.8.6
3.8.8
3.8.9
3.8.10
3.8.10

(5) User Charts
3.9
3.10
(2) Chart Editor
3.10
(6) Manual UpDating

(7) Scale
(8) Azimuth
(9) Motion
(1) Select Scale
3.1.4
(2) Select Range
3.7.3
(3) Zoom In
3.7.2, 3.8.2
(4) Zoom Out
3.7.2, 3.8.2
(1) North Up
3.21.2
(2) Course Up
3.21.2
(3) Rotation
3.21.2
(1) True
3.21.1
(2) Relative
3.21.1
(3) Free
3.21.1
(1) Fix View
3.21.3
3.11
(3) Print Display
3.30
(4) Save Screen

(0) Option
3.31
(1) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS
3.24.1
(2) Other Charts
3.24.2
(3) Scale
3.24.3
5-5
5 Chart Editing
Table 5.1 User Chart Editing Menu Tree -- Continued

Main Menu
(5) View
Submenu
(1) Day-Night
(2) Radar
(3) ARPA/AIS
Reference
(1) Day Bright
3.3.6
(2) Day Whiteback
3.3.6
(3) Day Blackback
3.3.6
(4) Dusk
3.3.6
(5) Night
3.3.6
(6) Panel Dimmer
3.3.5
(1) Radar 1
3.3.8
(2) Radar 2
3.3.8
(3) Range Rings
3.3.8
(1) ARPA1
3.3.9
(2) ARPA2
3.3.9
(3) Internal ARPA
(4) AIS
3.3.9
(5) ALL
3.3.9
3.3.9
(8) ALL List
3.3.9
(9) Select List
3.3.9
(4) Analog Meter
3.15
(5) Logbook
3.23.1
(6) Multi View
(0) Option
(6) Alarm
Submenu/Option
(1) Single View
3.14.1
(2) Top Bottom
3.14.1
(3) Right Left
3.14.1
(4) Right Top View
3.14.1
(5) Left Top View
3.14.1
3.14.1
3.14.1
(8) Select Area
3.14.2
(9) Wide Range View
3.14.3
(1) Radar
3.27.1
(2) ARPA/AIS
3.27.2
(3) Display Panel
3.15
(4) Logbook
3.23.2
3.27.5
(6) Date/Time
3.27.6
(1) List
3.3.5, 3.3.7
(2) History
3.3.5, 3.3.7
(0) Option
3.25
5 Chart Editing
5-6
Shortcut Menus
Shortcut menus are displayed by right-clicking when editing charts. Depending on the cursor type
when right-clicking, one of the following menus will be displayed. See 5.5 Entering Objects for
details on the various cursor types.
When the Cursor Type is
Enter an object at the designated longitude and latitude.
When the Cursor Type is
Designate the bearing and distance from the previous way

point, and enter an object in that position.
Buttons for the same operations:

Add
Insert
Move
Delete
Info
Available when the cursor type is
5-7
5 Chart Editing
5.2.2 Button Functions

In Chart Edit mode, buttons shown below will be displayed at the top of the screen. The same buttons
are used in User Chart Edit mode and Manual Update mode, except for one.
[User Chart Edit mode]
Left-click on this button to close the file and to exit Chart Edit Mode.
During user chart edit:

Left-click on this button to create a new user chart file.
Left-click on this button to open a created user chart (not available during manual
update).
Left-click on this button to save a created user chart.
Left-click when terminating the current editing operation or when selecting an object.
Left-click when adding a segment to the end of the line or a area surrounding line to
the area.
Left-click when inserting a segment into the line.
Left-click when moving an object.
Left-click when deleting an object.
Left-click when opening the information panel of the selected object.
[Manual Update mode]
Left-click on this button to close the file and to exit Chart Edit Mode.
During manual update:

Left-click on this button to manually update the objects.
Left-click on this button to open a created user chart (not available during manual
update).
Left-click on this button to save a created user chart.
Left-click when terminating the current editing operation or when selecting an object.
Left-click when adding a segment to the end of the line or a area surrounding line to
the area.
Left-click when inserting a segment into the line.
Left-click when moving an object.
Left-click when deleting an object.
Left-click when opening the information panel of the selected object.
5 Chart Editing
5-8
5.3 Operation Flowchart

This section describes how to edit user charts. For operations in the manual update process, see 5.4
Manual Update Operation.
Files are opened and saved in different ways when you create a new user chart file and when you open a
created file. Open/Save a file following the procedure described in the Table/Graphic Editor section of
chapter 4 Route Planning.
5.3.1 Flow of User Chart Edit

(1) Creating a new user chart file
Start
Start User Chart Edit

mode.
Left-click on the
[New] button.
Open a new user chart file.
Chart edit operation
Symbols
Lines
Areas
Texts
Left-click on the
[Save] button.
See 5.5 Entering Objects .
Enter a file name and a

comment.
Select a datum in the

Datum Conversion
panel.
Left-click on the
[Close] button.
Exit User Chart Edit mode.
End
5-9
5 Chart Editing
(2) Editing a user chart file

Start
Start User Chart Edit

mode.
Left-click on the
[Open] button.
Open user chart file you wish to edit.
Symbols
Lines
Areas
Texts
See 5.5 Entering Objects.
When overwriting
Left-click on the
[Save] button.
When saving under a new file name

Select [Save as] from
the menu.

Datum Conversion
panel.
Left-click on the
[Close] button.
Exit User Chart Edit mode.
End
5 Chart Editing
5-10
5.3.2 Operation when Editing User Charts

File operations are different when you create a new user chart and when you edit an existing user chart.
This section describes operations in both cases (descriptions follow 5.3.1 Flow of User Chart Edit).
This section also describes how to merge user charts and how to import user chart files.
Creating a new user chart -> See Section 5.3.2.1.
Editing a user chart -> See Section 5.3.2.2
Merging user charts -> See Section 5.3.2.3
Importing user charts -> See Section 5.3.2.4
5.3.2.1 Creating a New User Chart

Follow the procedure below to create a new user chart.
(1) Entering the Chart Editing mode

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(5) User Charts] - [(2) Chart Editor] in the order.
How to exit the user chart editing mode:
Left-click the [Close] button. Alternatively, in the User Chart Editing menu, select [(1) File] - [(0)
Exit from Chart Editor] in that order.
- When you open the Chart Editing menu, press the [MENU] button on the display panel.
Then, the Chart Editing menu title bar opens. To close it, left-click the [MENU] button again, or
[Chart Editing Menu]
(2) Opening a new user chart file

1) Left-click the [New] button.
In the User Chart Editing menu
5-11
5 Chart Editing
(3) Entering objects

1) When you use EBL/VRM to enter objects, make sure that [(1) Use EBL/VRM] is turned on
(checked). If you do not use EBL/VRM when editing a chart,
[(1) Use EBL/VRM] is turned off (remove a checkmark).
If using EBL/VRM: Check it.

If not using EBL/VRM: Uncheck it.
2) Proceed to 5.5 Entering Objects and enter objects.

After obtaining objects, follow the procedure described in (4) below to save a user chart file.
(4) Saving a user chart file

Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(4) Save], [(5) Save as] in that order.
The Save as panel opens.
2) Enter the file name (up to 8 characters) and comment.
5 Chart Editing
5-12
3) Left-click the [SAVE] button to close the panel.

Then, the Datum Conversion panel opens.
Select [Select Datum] or [Enter Offset] to execute datum conversion or offset entering.
Select Datum:
You can convert an object datum from [Source Datum] to [Destination Datum].
Enter Offset:
You can give offset to the object by entering the offset value (latitude/longitude).
Then, the system exit the User Chart Editing mode.
(5) Exiting the User Chart Editing mode

1) Click the [Close] button to exit the mode.
5-13
5 Chart Editing
5.3.2.2 Editing a User Chart

Follow the procedure below to edit an existing user chart.
(1) Starting User Chart mode

(2) Opening a user chart file

1) Left-click on the [Open] button.
The Open Chart File panel will be displayed.
2) Select the name of a file you wish to open, and then left-click on the [OK] button.
The selected user chart file will be displayed.
(3) Entering objects

(checked). If you do not use EBL/VRM when editing a chart,
[(1) Use EBL/VRM] is turned off (remove a checkmark).


5 Chart Editing
5-14

When saving a file without changing its file name (using the [Save] button):
1) Left-click on the [Save] button.
2) Left-click on the [Close] button to exit User Chart Edit mode.
When saving a file under a different name (using the [(5) Save As] menu):
1) In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(5) Save As] in that order.
The Save as panel will be displayed.
2) Enter a file name (using up to 8 characters) and a comment.

3) Left-click on the [SAVE] button. The panel closes.
The Datum Conversion panel opens.
[Select Datum]:
You can convert an object datum from [Source Datum] to [Destination Datum].
[Enter Offset]:
You can specify offset (latitude/longitude) of the object and move the object.
4) Left-click on the [OK] button. The panel closes.
5) Left-click on the [Close] button
User Chart Edit mode ends.
5-15
5 Chart Editing
5.3.2.3 Merging User Charts

You can merge the user charts as follows:
1) Make a new user chart file or recall a user chart file.
(For example, recall User-01 file.)
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(6) Merge] in that order.
The Open Chart File panel opens.
3) Left-click the file you want to merge with the User-01 file (for example, User-02), and then
left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
You will see that both objects of the User-01 and User-02 files are shown on the screen.
4) Left-click the [Save] button to save without changing the file name (User-01).
If you want to save as the new file,
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(5) Save As] in that order.
Then, the system exit the User Chart Editing mode.
User Chart "USER-02"

User Chart "USER-01"
You can merge as one

user chart.
User Chart
5 Chart Editing
5-16
5.3.2.4 Importing User Charts

User chart files can be imported and used.
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(3) Import] in that order.
And select a file format to be used at the destination.
- CSV file (WGS-84)
Select this when importing user chart data created with the WGS-84 geodetic system.
- CSV file (TOKYO)
Select this when importing user chart data, created with the Japanese geodetic system, as
WGS-84 geodetic system data.
For the data format of the user chart to be imported, see 14.4 Data Formats of Files that ECDIS
can Import/Export.
The Open panel will be displayed.
2) Select a file you wish to import, and then left-click on the [OK] button.
The selected user chart will be displayed on the screen.
5-17
5 Chart Editing
5.4 Manual Update Operation

This section describes manual update operations. For operations in the user chart edit process, see 5.3
Operation Flowchart When manually updating the objects, there will be a panel for you to enter the
issue date of a notice to mariners. Enter the date. When certain conditions, such as period that
passed since the manual update, are met (see page 5-2), the entered objects are deleted automatically
from the chart.
5.4.1 Flow of Manual Update

Start
Start Manual Update

mode.
In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(6) Manual UpDating]
in that order.
Left-click on the
[Start] button.
Left-click on a chart
you wish to edit.
[Example]
Symbols
Lines
Areas
Texts
See 5.5 Entering Objects.
Left-click on the
[Save] button

Datum Conversion
panel.
Enter the issue date of

a notice to mariners.
Left-click on the
[Close] button.
Exit Manual Update mode.
End
5 Chart Editing
5-18
5.4.2 Operation when Manually Updating Objects

This section describes operations in the manual update procedure (descriptions follow 5.4.1 Flow of
Manual Update).
(1) Starting Manual Update mode

- Left-click on the [MENU] button on the display panel to open the Chart Edit menu.
The Chart Edit menu will be displayed at the top of the screen. Left-click on the [MENU] button
again or left-click anywhere on the chart to close the menu window.
[Chart Edit menu]
(2) Selecting a chart to be edited

1) Left-click on the [Start] button.
The Information panel will be displayed.
Left-click on the [OK] button so that the panel
closes.
2) Left-click on the chart you wish to edit.

A panel showing the chart name will be displayed. Left-click on the [OK] button so that the
panel closes (as shown below).
(3) Entering Objects

(checked). If you do not use EBL/VRM when editing a chart, then turn [(1) Use EBL/VRM] off
(remove a checkmark) by selecting [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(1) Use EBL/VRM] in that order.


5-19
5 Chart Editing

1) Left-click on the [Save] button.
The Datum Conversion panel opens.
Normally, conversion of geodesic systems is not necessary.
[Select Datum]:
You can convert an object datum from [Source Datum] to [Destination Datum]. Normally,
conversion of geodesic systems is not necessary.
[Enter Offset]:
You can specify offset (latitude/longitude) of the object and move the object.
The Notices to Mariners panel opens.
Enter the issue date of a notice to mariners.

4) Left-click on the [Close] button.
Manual Update mode ends.
5 Chart Editing
5-20
Tips!
(How to check dates of issue of a notice to mariners for entered objects)
You can use the Object Information panel to check the dates of issue of a notice to mariners for
entered objects.
Use the [INFO] button.
In the normal menu
The object information will be retrieved. Entered dates of the objects will be displayed.
Display example
5-21
5 Chart Editing
5.5 Entering Objects

This section describes how to enter objects. Basic operations are the same in User Chart Edit and
Manual Update modes. There are four types of objects (symbols, lines, areas, and texts). User Chart
Edit mode and Manual Update mode use different symbols and lines.
Object types available for user chart edit
[Symbol] Tab
5 Chart Editing
[Line] Tab
[Area] Tab
5-22
[Text] Tab
Object types available for manual update

[Symbol] Tab
[Line] Tab
[Area] Tab
5-23
[Text] Tab
5 Chart Editing
5.5.1 Selecting Object Types

1) Left-click on a tab for the object type (Symbol, Line, Area, and Text) you wish to select.
2) Select the object you want. See How to Select Objects below.
The selected object may be displayed at the bottom part of the object selection panel.
3) Left-click the [Apply] button at the bottom part of this panel. Then, the cursor changes as follows:
: Object entry cursor
Now you can enter the object you have selected.
How to Select Objects:

You can see the tree structure of the objects on the object
selection panel. For example, to select Light flare,
default symbol of the Barrel buoy, perform as follows.
1) Left-click Buoys twice quickly to open the items
behind it.
2) Left-click Barrel buoy
twice quickly to open the
items behind it. (Keep continue this operation until -

mark disappears.)
3) Left-click Light flare, default.
The symbol will appear at the bottom of this panel.
To close Buoys, left-click it twice quickly.
You can also select the item by left-clicking + and -
mark:
Left-clicking + will open the behind items.
Left-clicking - will close the behind items.
Before entering the object, always left-click this button.
5 Chart Editing
5-24
1)
2)
3)
5.5.2 Entering Objects

See the current cursor position displayed at the bottom when enetering objects.
(1) How to enter symbols

Putting symbols:
1) Select one of the objects on the symbol selection panel and left-click the [Apply] button at the
bottom of the symbol selection panel.
Be sure that the cursor type is
on the chart.
2) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor, and left-click at the position you want to put the symbol.
Each time you left-click the cursor, the symbol is added on the chart.
3) To terminate entry, left-click the [Select] button or perform abortion operation. Then, the cursor
. (To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu.)
changes to
Second entry
First entry
Last entry
Deleting symbols [Delete]:

1) Left-click the symbol you want to delete with the cursor
2) Left-click the [Delete] button. (If you want to undelete, select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(6) Undelete].)
Selected symbol
Moving symbols [Move]:

1) Left-click the symbol you want to move with the cursor
2) Left-click the [Move] button, and rotate the trackball to move the cursor.
3) Left-click the cursor at the position you want. Then, the symbol is moved to the new position.
4) To terminate the operation, left-click the [Select] button or any position on the chart.
(When you left-click the cursor.)
5-25
5 Chart Editing
Designating object coordinates by entering the position or entering the bearing/distance:

Positions can be designated by entering the position or entering the bearing/distance instead of
left-clicking on the chart to designate a coordinate when entering, moving, inserting and adding
symbols, lines, areas and text.
Designating coordinates by entering position
inserting and adding symbols, lines and areas. (Make sure that the cursor has changed to
the
cursor type on the chart.)
2) Click the right trackball button, then select [Enter Lat/Lon] from the shortcut menu.
3) Enter the position (longitude and latitude), then left-click the [OK] button.
The psnel is closed and the position is designated.
Designating coordinates by entering bearing/distance
inserting and adding objects, lines, areas and text. (Make sure that the cursor has changed
to the
cursor type on the chart.)
2) Click the right trackball button, then select [Enter Bearing/Distance] from the shortcut menu.
The Enter Bearing/Distance panel opens.
3) Enter the bearing and distance from the previous way point, then left-click the [OK] button.
Note:
When entering the second point of a line or area, the bearing and distance are those from
the previous point. When moving objects, the bearing and distance are those from the
previous position. The shortcut menus cannot be used when designating coordinates that
do not require relative positions, such as symbol and text entering.
5 Chart Editing
5-26
Getting Information and Editing Information (Symbol):

1) Left-click the symbol you want to get information.
The Location/Attributes panel opens.
You can edit the latitude and longitude by left-clicking the [Edit] button.
You can rotate the symbol by entering rotational angle to Rotation.
You can set Min Scale and Max Scale that limit the display of this object.
Rotated symbol by 90 degrees
Difference in symbol display between User Chart Edit mode and Manual Update mode:
Symbols used in the manual update operation will have a mark as shown below. Symbols used in the
user chart edit operation will not have this mark.
[Symbols used in the user chart edit operation]
[Symbols used in the manual update operation]
This mark will be

added.
5-27
5 Chart Editing
Tips!
During editing, you can see what kind of operation is currently possible from the active button.
For example, when you left-click a symbol, the following buttons will be active.
[Select], [Move], [Delete] and [Info]
This means that you can move, delete, or deselect the selected symbol. Also, you can see the
information on the selected symbol with the [Info] button.
Hiding objects (only during the manual update operation)
Saved objects can be hidden from the chart. For details, see 5.5.3 Hiding Objects (Only during the
Manual Update Operation).
Using EBL/VRM on the operation panel:

You can use the EBL/VRM keys and dials on the operation panel when positioning an object or
drawing a line. When using EBL/VRM, see 4.1.3.8 Creating a Route Using EBL/VRM Keys and Dials.
When using EBL/VRM, first make sure that [(1) Use EBL/VRM] is checked.
5 Chart Editing
5-28
(2) How to draw lines

Drawing lines:
1) Select one of the objects on the line selection panel and left-click the [Apply] button at the
bottom of the line selection panel.
on the chart.
2) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor, and left-click at the position you want to start drawing a
line.
Each time you left-click the cursor, the line is extended on the chart.
3) To terminate entry, left-click the [Select] button or perform abortion operation. Then, the cursor
changes to
Tips!
(Moving the chart)
Click the left trackball button while drawing lines. A hand icon will be shown on the chart.
Move the trackball while holding the left button down to move the chart.
Deleting the line [Delete]:
1) Slowly double left-click the segment of the line you want to delete so that the whole segments of
the line are selected. (Even if the line has a single segment, you need to double left-click it.)
2) Left-click the [Delete] button.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(5) Delete] in that order.
If you want to undelete,
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(6) Undelete] in that order.
Tips!
(Moving the chart)
When it is difficult to properly click on the segment you wish to delete, press the Chart [Zoom In]
button provided on the right side of the display panel. This will allow you to click on the target
segment easily.
5-29
5 Chart Editing
Inserting the segment [Insert]:

1) Left-click the segment you want to insert an additional segment.
2) Left-click the [Insert] button, and rotate the trackball to move the cursor.
In the User Chart Editing Menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(3) Insert Point] in that order.
3) Left-click the cursor at the position you want to insert the segment.
4) To terminate insertion, left-click the [Select] button or perform abortion operation. Then, the
. (To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up
cursor changes to
menu.)
Adding the segment (to the end of the line) [Add]:

1) Left-click the last segment of the line.
2) Left-click the [Add] button, and rotate the trackball to move the cursor.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(2) Add Point] in that order.
3) Left-click the cursor at the position you want to add the segment.
Each time you left-click the cursor, the new segment is added.
4) To terminate addition, left-click the [Select] button or perform abortion operation. Then, the cursor
changes to
5 Chart Editing
5-30
Moving the line [Move]:

1) Slowly double left-click the segment of the line you want to move so that the whole segments of
the line are selected. (Even if the line has a single segment, you need to double left-click it.)
2) Left-click the [Move] button, and rotate the trackball to move the cursor.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(4) Move] in that order.
3) Left-click the cursor at the position you want to move the line.
Getting information and editing information (Line)

1) Left-click the line you want to get information.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(0) Location/Attributes] in that order.
The Location/Attributes panel opens.
- You can edit the latitude and longitude of each segment using the [Edit]
button.
- You can set Min Scale and Max Scale that limit the display of this object.
- You can change the lines attributes, line color (8 colors), line width (5 widths)
and line style (3 styles).
- You can enter a comment.
5-31
5 Chart Editing
(3) How to draw areas -- Area (Polygon)/(Warning Area)

How to draw the Polygon and Waring Area is the same and the drawing method is similar to that for
line. So, for detailed operation, refer to (2) How to draw lines mentioned earlier.
Drawing area (Polygon)/(Warning Area):
1) Select Polygon or Waring Area on the area selection panel and left-click the [Apply] button at the
bottom of the selection panel.
on the chart.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the position you want to draw the area.
Each time you left-click the cursor, the line (side) is extended on the chart.
3) To terminate entry, left-click the [Select] button or perform abortion operation. (To abort,
right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu.) Area is created and the cursor
.
changes to
(Draw sides.)
(Left-click [Select].)
Getting information and edit area (line):

1) Left-click the inside of the area to select it.
Then, the Location/Attributes panel opens.
- You can edit the latitude and longitude of each side of the area using the [Edit] button.
- You can set Min Scale and Max Scale that limit the display of this object.
- You can change the attributes, line color (8 colors), line width (5 widths) and line style (3
styles).
- You can change the color to be filled in the area (8 colors) and the transparency of the color
(0%, 25%, 50%, 75%).
- You can enter a comment.
Then, the location/attributes set with the panel apply to the selected area.
(Same color but transparency differs.)
5 Chart Editing
5-32
Moving the area [Move]:

2) Left-click the [Move] button, move the cursor to the position you want to move, and left-click the
cursor.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(4) Move] in that order.
Then, the area moves at the designated point.
(Left-click [Move].)
(Left-click the cursor.)
Deleting the area [Delete]:

2) Left-click the [Delete] button.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(5) Delete] in that order.
Then, the area is deleted.
If you want to undelete,
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(6) Undelete] in that order.
This will be deleted.
Adding a side to the area [Insert]:

1) Left-click the side of the area you want add a side.
2) Left-click the [Insert] button, move the cursor to the position you want, and left-click the cursor.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(3) Insert Point] in that order.
Then, new side is added to the area.
(Left-click the side.)
(Left-click [Insert].)
5-33
5 Chart Editing
(4) How to draw areas -- Circle and Ellipse

1) Select Circle or Ellipse on the area selection panel and left-click the [Apply] button at the bottom
of the area selection panel.
on the chart.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the center position of the circle/ellipse.
3) To draw a circle, move the cursor to determine the radius of the circle and left-click the cursor.
To draw a ellipse, move the cursor and left-click the cursor.
4) To terminate drawing, left-click the [Select] button or perform abortion operation. Then, the cursor
changes to
5) To change the location/attributes of the circle or ellipse, left-click the object, and then the [Info]
button.
(Color can be changed using the [Info] button.)
(Same color but transparency differs.)
[Location/Attributes panel for Circle/Ellipse]

You can edit the latitude and longitude of each object using the [Edit] button.
You can edit the radius/axis of the ellipse. (Not for the circle but for the ellipse only)
You can change the attributes, line color (8 colors), line width (5 widths) and line style (3
styles).
You can change the color to be filled in the area (8 colors) and the transparency of the color
(0%, 25%, 50%, 75%).
Then, the object changes according to the location/attribute settings.
5 Chart Editing
5-34
(5) How to draw areas -- Fans

1) Select Fans on the area selection panel and left-click the [Apply] button at the bottom of the area
selection panel.
on the chart.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the center position of the fan.
3) Move the cursor to determine the radius and beginning angle of the fan and left-click the cursor.
4) Move the cursor to determine the ending angle and left-click the cursor.
5) To terminate drawing, left-click the [Select] button or perform abortion operation. Then, the
. (To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up
cursor changes to
menu.)
6) To change the location/attributes of the fan, left-click the fan, and then the [Info] button.
Case 2
Case 1
[Location/Attributes panel for Fan]

You can edit the radius/axis and angle of the fan.
You can change the attributes, line color (8 colors), line width (5 widths) and line style (3
styles).
You can change the color to be filled in the area (8 colors) and the transparency of the color
(0%, 25%, 50%, 75%).
Then, the object changes according to the location/attribute settings.
5-35
5 Chart Editing
(6) How to enter text (small/large font)

1) Select Small font or Large font on the text selection panel and left-click the [Apply] button at the
bottom of the text selection panel.
on the chart.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the position you want to enter the text.
The word Text is displayed at the left-clicked position.
At the same time, the Location/Attributes panel opens. You can specify the location and
select attributes by using this panel.
(When you select Small Font)
(When you select Large Font)
[Location/Attributes panel for text]

You can edit the rotational angle of the text.
You can change the color (8 colors) and font size (6 to 72 points).
You can enter the text that will be displayed on the chart and comment.
3) Left-click on the [OK] button to close the panel.
The settings made in the Location/Attributes panel will be applied.
Repeat above steps to enter text at desired locations.
5 Chart Editing
5-36
4) Editing entered text

Left-click on the lower left part of the text you wish to edit (Text, for example).
Then, left-click on the [Info] button. The Location/Attributes panel opens. By referring to
step 2) above, edit the position and attributes of the selected text.
Left-click on the [OK] button when you finish editing. The panel closes.
The new settings will be applied to the selected text.
5-37
5 Chart Editing
5.5.3 Hiding Objects (Only during the Manual Update Operation)

Objects that have been saved in Manual Update mode cannot be edited, but it is possible to hide them
from the chart. This function is available only in Manual Update mode.
(1) Hiding objects

And start Manual Update mode (if you are editing objects in Manual Update mode, first exit the
mode and then restart it).
2) Select an object you wish to hide by left-clicking on it.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(7) Hide Object] in that order.
The selected object disappears from the chart.
4) Repeat the same procedure to hide objects one by one.
(2) Restoring hidden objects

2) In the User Chart Editing Menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(8) Hide All] in that order.
Manually updated objects are all hidden for five seconds, and then they will be displayed again.
The objects that were hidden by the method in 5.5.3-(1) are not displayed.
(3) Re-hide Restored hidden objects

2) In the User Chart Editing Menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(9) Reset Hide] in that order.
Hidden objects are all displayed collectively for five seconds, and then they will be hidden again.
5 Chart Editing
5-38
Automatic
Sailing
6-1
Before starting automatic sailing, be sure to check the safety of the route
and crossing safety contour.
When this system is connected to an autopilot, a set course is calculated from the scheduled route and
ships position. By outputting the set course to the autopilot, automatic sailing along the scheduled route
is possible.
Note:
Automatic sailing is not permitted while charts are displayed in multi view mode.
And exiting Navigation & Planning is not permitted during automatic sailing.
6.1 Automatic Sailing System

6.1.1 Change of Course (Turning)
When the ship arrived at the boundary of the WP, you need to perform the following operation for turning
the ship.
On the operation panel, press the turn key ([GUARD] + [TURN]).
Next Leg
Boundary of WP
Arrival alarm
Cross track distance (XTD)
[Turing Operation]
6 Automatic Sailing
6-2
6.1.2 Route Monitoring and System Alarm

Warning and Alarm
Warning/alarm
OffCo
(Off Course)
Condition of warning/
alarm occurrence
Operating status of
automatic sailing
Remarks
The difference between Can be continued.

heading and leg bearing
has exceeded the limit.
The ship has gone beyond the set route

width.
Can be continued.
ARR
(Arrival a WP)
The ship has arrived at

the boundary of the set
WP.
Can be continued.
GYRO
Gyrocompass has got

out of order.
Should be stopped.
Change the steering mode of the

autopilot to Auto or Hand. Otherwise,
the autopilot retains the rudder angle set
last. (For details, see the instruction
manual for autopilot.)
POS1
(Primary)
The system position 1

has some errors.
In case of DNV-classed
vessels holding NAUTOC notation, use deadreckoning for 10 minutes, and then, stop automatic sailing.

JUMP
The system position

shifts beyond the limit.
Can be continued.
Route
On the sailing final leg,

the time has reached
1-5 minute(s) before the
estimated arrival time at
the destination.
Stop automatic sailing

after passing through
the final destination.

LowSp
Ship speed through

water has lowered to
less than the set value.
Can be continued.
LOG
Sensor for speed

through water has got
out of order.
Should be stopped.
Stop automatic sailing. Change the

steering mode of the autopilot to Auto
or Hand. Otherwise, the autopilot
retains the rudder angle set last. (For
details, see the instruction manual for
autopilot.)
A/P
The autopilot has got

out of order.
Should be stopped.

autopilot.)
CALL
ARR or Route alarm

does not occur for 30
seconds.
Should be stopped.

autopilot.)
XTE
(Cross Track Error)
6-3
6 Automatic Sailing
6.2 Setting the Automatic Sailing

Automatic sailing can be set.
Select [MENU] - [(6) Auto Sail] - [(0) Option] in that order.
Then, the Autosail Option panel opens.
2) Select items and enter values as required.
a) Tracking Gain
When the ship leaves the route, this setting determines how tightly the course is maintained.
There are three settings: Low, mid and high. An example of the difference between the
own ship cross track distance (XTD) and strength with which the ship returns to the route
depending on the tracking gain setting is shown below. The set heading when deviating to
the port side when the ships heading is 0 degrees and the route heading is also 0 degrees is
shown.
High
Mid
Low
Note:
The graph above is only one example. The actual values will differ from those in the graph
depending on the constant of the ship and its equipment.
6 Automatic Sailing
6-4
b) Drift Correction
When the ships speed is more than 5 knots, then control will take drift into consideration.
(Not currently available)
Set heading
Drift
Actual route that is expected
c) Dead Band
When dead band is set, a stable course is maintained. Therefore, within the specified
range centered on the route, the set heading is the same as the route heading.
Dead band can be set within the range from 0.001nm to 0.999nm.
Next waypoint
Dead band
Previous waypoint
Set heading
(parallel to the route)
d) Autosail
Displays the automatic sailing mode with which the connected autopilot is compatible.
Depending on the specification of the autopilot connected with the ECDIS.
(Only Normal route is currently available)
e) Turn Mode
Displays the turn mode with which the connected autopilot is compatible.
(Only Constant Radius is currently available)
Only Tracking Gain and Dead Band can be set during automatic sailing.
6-5
6 Automatic Sailing
6.3 Automatic Sailing Operation

The following shows the outline of the operation of ECDIS and autopilot during automatic sailing.
ECDIS
Autopilot
1) Select the route, and start automatic

sailing.
2) Set the mode of the autopilot to NAVI for
(See the descriptions below for the
the autopilot made by YOKOGAWA.
details of this procedure.)
(Set it to RC for the autopilot made by

TOKIMEC.)
3) Monitor the route.

4) After ending voyage, change the mode of
the autopilot from the NAVI to HAND.
5) Select UNLOAD for ROUTE to clear
the route from the screen.
If the own ship has arrived at the boundary of a WP during automatic

sailing, be sure to check the safety and perform turning manually (press the
[TURN] key while keeping the [GUARD] key pressed).
Otherwise, the ship keeps the course with the leg bearing, and accidents
may result.
During sailing, be sure to check own ships position and bearing as often as
necessary, regardless of whether the automatic sailing is in operation or
not.
Note:
For operation of the autopilot, see its instruction manual.
6 Automatic Sailing
6-6
6.3.1 Selecting the Route and the WP

To select the route, use the ROUTE on the display panel.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(1) Select Route] in that order.
(For details, see 3.4 Selecting ROUTE and To WP.)
6.3.2 Start Automatic Sailing

Select [MENU] - [(6) Auto Sail] - [(1) Start] in that order.
Then, the Select WP panel opens.

Then, the confirmation dialog box will appear.
3) Left-click the [OK] button to continue automatic sailing procedure.

Then, the automatic sailing starts and route monitoring is carried out by the system.
During automatic sailing, you should turn the ship with the turn key ([GUARD] + [TURN]) as follows:
When the ship arrived at the boundary of the WP, ARR (arrived at WP) alarm is issued.
Press the [TURN] key on the operation panel while pressing and holding down the [GUARD] key.
Then, the ship will start to turn.
6-7
6 Automatic Sailing
6.3.3 Terminating the Automatic Sailing

Select [MENU] - [(6) Auto Sail] - [(2) Stop] in that order.
Then, the confirmation dialog box will appear.
2) Left-click the [OK] button to stop the automatic sailing.
6 Automatic Sailing
6-8
Tool Menu/
Maintenance Menu
7-1
The tool menu consists of the following submenus.

File Manager:
The file manager performs file copying operations. For example, you can save the data such as the
route file you have created in the FD. Also, you can copy the FDs files to the systems hard disk.
Chart Portfolio
Charts are imported/updated/deleted.
For chart portfolio operations, see chapter 8 Chart Portfolio.
Chart abbreviations
Descriptions of chart abbreviations are displayed.
Navigation data Graph
A navigation data graph will be displayed. See the separate operation manual for details.
Setting the User Key
Register [USER] key functions.
The maintenance menu consists of the following submenus.
Connectivity
Connectivity between the ECDIS and external sensors will be checked.
Sensor
The external input sensor such as GPS, etc. in which the own ships position is entered is set up.
Color Pattern
A test pattern to check the colors displayed for ECDIS is displayed. (Only ARCS)
For Engineers
This submenu is to be used only by our service personnel. It is usually unavailable.
7 Tool Menu/Maintenance Menu
7-2
7.1 File Manager

Route files and user chart files can be copied from the hard disk to floppy disks and vice versa. Route
files and user chart files can also be deleted.
In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(8) Tool] - [(1) File Manager] in that order.
Example of Copying:
Copying a route file from the hard disk to a floppy disk.
1) Left-click the drop-down button a, then select Route File from the box. When route files are
selected, all files with the extensions .rtn and .rta are displayed.
2) Select Local Disk from box b. The route files saved on the hard disk will be displayed in box
c.
3) Left-click the drop-down button d, then select Floppy Disk from the box.
4) Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive, left-click the file to be copied from box c, then
left-click the [Copy] button (f) to start copying. The selected file will be copied to the floppy
disk. When a file is selected from the box e, and the button g is clicked, then a file on the
floppy disk can be copied to the hard disk.
In order to copy a user chart, User Chart should be selected from the box a. (Files with the
extension .uch are displayed.)
a)
d)
b)
e)
c)
f)
g)
7-3
Deleting Files:
1) With files displayed in box c, select a file or left-click the [Select All] button to select all files.
2) Left-click the [Delete] button under box c. The delete confirmation panel will be displayed, so
press the [OK] button to delete the file(s). The same process can be used for box e to delete
files in box e with the [Delete] button under it.
Files that can be Handled with File Manager:

Route files: Normal route files (extension .rtn). (created with chapter 4 Route Planning.)
User charts: User chart files (extension .uch, created with chapter 5 Chart Editing).
Copying and Deleting Files on Backup Devices:

When a backup device is connected to the ECDIS through a network, Backup will be added to
boxes c and d. By selecting Backup, files can be copied and moved to the backup device, or
they can be copied from the backup device.
7-4
7.2 Chart Abbreviations

Displays a table of the meanings of the chart abbreviations.
Select [MENU] - [(8) Tool] - [(3) Chart Abbreviation] in that order.
An Information panel with a table of the meanings of the chart abbreviations is displayed.
7-5
7.3 Setting the User Key

Register [USER] key functions.
Select [MENU] - [(8) Tool] - [(5) Set User Key] in that order.
The [Select] dialog box will be displayed.
2) Left-click in the function display box.
The selectable functions will be listed. Left-click the
function that is to be assigned to the user key.

3) Left-click the [OK] button to close the dialog box.
7-6
7.4 Connection
Communications between the ECDIS and external devices connected to the ECDIS can be checked.
Select [MENU] - [(9) Maintenance] - [(1) Connection] in that order.
The DEVICE DATA DUMP panel will be displayed.
2) From the Device Selection field, select a device connected to the ECDIS.
3) Left-click on the [Start] button. Information entered from the selected external device will be
displayed in the entry data display box in real time. Also, information outputted to the selected
external device will be displayed in the output data display box in real time.
Left-click on the
[Stop] button to stop information from being updated. Left-click on the [Clear] button to clear
the currently displayed information. If there is no inputting/outputting of data between the
ECDIS and the selected external device, then nothing will be displayed in the data display box.
7-7
7.5 Sensor
The external input sensor such as GPS, etc. in which the own ships position is entered is set up.
The external sensor options are as follows:
Primary position and secondary position of own ship
Bearing and speed
Depth
Date data source
Time zone data source
Note:
The options available for each sensor differ depending on the system configuration used.
7.5.1 Primary Position and Secondary Position

On this equipment, you can select one of the navigation methods (e.g., GPS navigation, LORAN or
dead-reckoning). This is called the primary position (POS1) or system position. A secondary position
(POS2) can also be selected independent of the primary position. This system constantly checks how
far the primary and secondary positions are apart to monitor their mutual positions.
Select [MENU] - [(9) Maintenance] - [(2) Sensors] in that order.
The Sensor Connection panel opens.
2) Set each item and left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
Position fixing system for the primary position POS1
(Select from (D)GPS1, (D)GPS2 and DR.)
Select #1.
Position fixing system for the secondary position
POS2 (Select from (none), (D) GPS1,
(D)GPS2, DR and DR-Reset.)
Select #1.
Turning ON/OFF of the secondary position display
(D)GPS1: No.1-GPS or No.1-DGPS is used as the sensor to enter the own ships position.
(D)GPS2: No.2-GPS or No.2-DGPS is used as the sensor to enter the own ships position.
DR (normally, not used): The own ships position is estimated on the basis of heading, ship
speed, SDME, etc.
none: The secondary position is not used.
DR-Reset: To correct the errors that occur while DR is used, GPS data of POS1 is used as
the reference position of DR. The GPS data obtained when OK in Sensor
Connection panel is left-clicked after DR-Reset is selected will be used as the
reference position.
The secondary position symbol is displayed as regardless of the scale. The track information for
the past six minutes is displayed in green. Other information cannot be displayed. The symbol and
track can also be turned ON and OFF.
7-8
7.5.2 Bearing Setting

a) Gyro
Select this item if the gyro sensor is used for the heading sensor. Gyro sensors information
is used to determine the heading of the ship. If the sensor being used detects the synchro/
step gyro, the initial value must be entered. After entering the value, left-click the [Set]
button to fix it.
GYRO:
NMEA out put type gyro is used for the heading sensor.
NSK:
Synchro/step gyro is used for the heading sensor.
b) Manual (not used usually)

Enter the value when you apply any value as the bearing of the ship.
Heading (GYRO, NSK)

Select #1.
7.5.3 Speed Setting

a) Log
Select the log sensor. Log sensors information is used to determine the speed of the ship.
NSK:
Pulse log is used for the ship speed sensor.
SONAR: NMEA out put type log is used for the ship sensor.
b) Manual (not used usually)
Enter the value when you apply any value as the speed of the ship.
The maximum speed that can be set is 100.0 kt.
Ship speed relative to water (LOG, NSK, SONAR)

Select #1.
7-9
7.5.4 Depth Setting

Depth (DEPTH)
Select #1.
DEPTH:
Echo sounder is used as the depth sensor.
NAVI/F2:
Echo sounder is used with NAV interface.
7.5.5 Date Data Source Setting

2) Left-click the item to select it, and enter the value to the value entry box.
Date/time setting data (GPS1, GPS2, MANUAL)
Select #1.
GPS1:
No.1-GPS or No.1-DGPS is used as the data source of date/time setting.
GPS2:
No.2-GPS or No.2-DGPS is used as the data source of date/time setting.
MANUAL: Date/time setting is made manually. See 3.27.6 Setting Date/Time.
7.5.6 Time Zone Data Source Setting

2) Left-click the item to select it, and enter the value to the value entry box.
Time zone setting data (GPS1, GPS2, MANUAL)

Select #1.
GPS1:
No.1-GPS or No.1-DGPS is used as the data source of time zone setting.
GPS2:
No.2-GPS or No.2-DGPS is used as the data source of time zone setting.
MANUAL: Time zone setting is made manually. See 3.27.6 Setting Date/Time.
7-10
7.6 Color Test (ARCS Only)

The color test pattern for the ARCS charts will be displayed.
Select [MENU] - [(9) Maintenance] - [(3) Color Test] in that order.
The color pattern for the ARCS color test will be displayed.
You can check a display state of the display unit from the color pattern.
2) Left-click on the [Close] button to close the color pattern.
7-11
Chart
Portfolio
8-1
This chapter explains the methods of importing/updating the charts (S-57, S-63, C-MAP and ARCS). After
import/update procedure is completed, the updated charts can be displayed on the Navigation & Planning
screen to use for navigation.
To import/update the charts, the following items are required:
S-57 :
Chart CD-ROM
S-63 :
Chart CD-ROM and cell permit FD
C-MAP Ed.2 : Chart CD-ROM and authorization code

C-MAP Ed.3 : Chart CD-ROM, and dongle (eToken), license FD or code
ARCS :
Chart CD-ROM, and license permit FD or code
8.1 Entering/Exiting the Chart Portfolio

(1) Entering the Chart Portfolio (Startup Menu)
1) On the operation panel, turn ON the power by pressing the [POWER] key.
The Startup menu will then be displayed.
[Startup Menu]
2) Move the cursor with the trackball and left-click the
in the startup menu.
Then, the Chart Portfolio screen will be displayed.

Note:
The [Startup Screen] will be automatically displayed if no operation is conducted for about 10
seconds.
8 Chart Portfolio
8-2
(2) Entering Chart Portfolio (Navigation & Planning menu)

Select [MENU] - [(8) Tool] - [(2) Chart Portfolio] - [(1) Create] in that order.
The Chart Portfolio screen will be displayed.
When Starting Chart Portfolio from the Navigation & Planning Menu
Both Navigation & Planning and Chart Portfolio are running concurrently. When changing the
display from Navigation & Planning to Chart Portfolio, select the following in order.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(8) Tool] - [(2) Chart Portfolio] - [(2) Top Window] in that order.
To switch the display from Chart Portfolio to Navigation & Planning, select the following in order.
In the Chart Portfolio menu
Select [Tool] - [Change Navigation & Planning] in that order.
Note:
When Chart Portfolio is started by selecting [MENU] - [(8) Tool] - [(2) Chart Portfolio] - [(1)
Create] from Navigation & Planning, be sure to exit Chart Portfolio before exiting Navigation &
Planning.
It is not possible to select Chart Portfolio when the relative motion mode is selected or the
radar image is displayed.
If C-MAP Ed.3 chart is installed, Chart Portfolio cannot be started through Navigation &
Planning.
[Chart Portfolio Screen]
Buttons
Menus
Source Chat Table/System Chart Table
[Exit] Button
The record of importing/updating
Note:
CD-ROM is checked when starting Chart Portfolio.
If CD-ROM is in CD drive, starting time may take longer.
8-3
8 Chart Portfolio
(3) Exiting the Chart Portfolio
Do not turn off the power during index creation by Chart Portfolio.
Otherwise, a malfunction may occur.
1) Left-click the [Exit] button on the Chart Portfolio main screen.

Then, the following confirmation dialog box opens. Left-click the [OK] button to exit the Chart
Portfolio. If an ARCS chart has been imported/updated, an index (chart management
information) is created after the [Exit] button is pressed. If the power fails and Navigation &
Planning cannot be started, see 10.6 Troubleshooting in page 10-15.
8 Chart Portfolio
8-4
8.2 Chart Portfolio Screen

The Chart Portfolio main screen (see page 8-3) consists of the following parts:
Menus
Buttons (All button function can be accessible from the menu)
Chart table display area
(1) Menus
Chart:
[ARCS] - [Import/Regist Chart Permit]:

Opens Import/Enter Chart Permit panel for importing and registering the Chart Permit. (This is
an administration tool.)
[ARCS] - [Regenerate Index]:
Regenerates ADCS index (chart management information).
[C-MAP Ed.2] - [Regist/Confirm User/Authorization Code]:
Opens the C-MAP Authorization Wizard panel for license registration and confirmation
operation.
[C-MAP Ed.3] - [Order/Regist/Confirm License]:
Opens the CM93/3 Registration Wizard panel for license registration and confirmation
operation.
[C-MAP Ed.3] - [Update Charts]
Opens the C-MAP Ed.3 Chart Update panel for chart update operation.
[Import/Update]:
Starts importing/updating the charts read from the CD-ROM.
[Abort]:
Aborts the importing/updating processing.
[Exit]:
Exits the Chart Portfolio.
8-5
8 Chart Portfolio
Sort:
Selectable chart types
[Retry Auto-Detect]:
Left-clicking this menu will re-read the charts of the selected type from the CD-ROM.
Chart types ([S-57], [S-63 (Offline)], [C-MAP Ed.2], [C-MAP Ed.3] or [ARCS]):
The charts of the selected type will be displayed in the source/system chart table in the Chart
Portfolio main screen.
Edit:
[Selectable Filter]:
Turns ON/OFF the filtering function.
[Select All]:
Selects the all cells/zones in the source chart table on the Chart Portfolio main screen.
[Delete]:
Delete the selected cell in the system chart table on the Chart Portfolio main screen.
Note:
In the case of ARCS, When [Delete] is selected, all of chart and permit is deleted.
8 Chart Portfolio
8-6
View:
[Chart Information]:
Shows the detailed cell information of the chart being selected in the source or system chart table
on the Chart Portfolio main screen. (For S-57/S-63/C-MAP Ed.2/C-MAP Ed.3)
[ARCS License Information]:
Checks the validity of the ARCS license information and shows the check result.
[Log]:
Displays the log on the right side of the screen during importing/updating process. Other log
may be displayed.
[Last Update]:
Last Update instead of Expiry is displayed in the System Chart column of ARCS. A date of
updating by Chart Portfolio is displayed in the Last Update column.
[Expiry]:
Expiry instead of Last Update is displayed in the System Chart column of ARCS. A term of
validity of the chart is displayed in the Expiry column.
[View old Edition]
As the latest edition is installed in the system, the older editions will not be displayed in the
source chart table.
Selecting this menu will show the older editions in the source chart table, and make it possible to
use them as desired.
8-7
8 Chart Portfolio
Tool:
Note:
This is an administration tool. Do not use this menu.
[Selectable Filter]:
Filters the source charts to be displayed in the source chart table on the Chart Portfolio main
screen.
[Clear Log]
Clears the log.
[Option]:
Used to set options for S-57, S-63, C-MAP Ed.2, C-MAP Ed.3, ARCS, Boot and
Advanced panels.
[Technical Tool]:
(An administration tool.)
[Change Navigation & Planning]:
This item will be valid when [MENU] - [(8) Tool] - [(2) Chart Portfolio] - [(1) Create] is selected from
the Navigation & Planning menu. Chart Portfolio will not be displayed. In order to redisplay the
Chart Portfolio, select [MENU] - [(8) Tool] - [(2) Chart Portfolio] - [(2) Top Window] from the
Navigation & Planning menu.
Note:
[Change Navigation & Planning] will only close the Chart Portfolio display. It will not exit
Chart Portfolio. In order to exit Chart Portfolio, left-click the [Exit] button.
When C-MAP Ed.3 is installed in the system, it takes approximately 10 seconds for Option
panel of Tool menu to open after it was selected.
Version:
[Chart Portfolio Version]:

Opens the version Version panel.
8 Chart Portfolio
8-8

Left-clicking this menu will re-read the charts of the selected type from the
CD-ROM.
Starts importing/updating the charts.
Aborts the importing/updating processing.
Shows the detailed information of the chart being selected in the source or
system chart table on the Chart Portfolio main screen.
Displays the log on the right side of the screen during importing/updating
process.
Exits the Chart Portfolio.
8-9
8 Chart Portfolio
(3) Table view

Initially, chart table is displayed on the Chart Portfolio main screen, and the source charts read from
the CD-ROM are displayed in the source chart table. (If no CD-ROM is in the CD drive, no chart will
be displayed in the source chart table. In this case, insert a CD-ROM and left-click the [Auto Detect]
button.)
The Chart Portfolio main screen has two tables, the source chart table and system chart table. Each
table can be selected by left-clicking the respective tabs.
Source Chart table: Display the charts read from the CD-ROM.
System Chart table: Displays the stored charts in the system. When the source charts are
imported/updated, they are stored in the system and appear in the system
chart table.
S-57 Chart
[Source Chart Table]
Tabs
Chart : Name of the chart.

Scale : Scale of the chart. 1:overview indicates the smallest scale, with the scale being enlarged
successively in order of 2:general, 3:coastal, 4:approach, 5:harbour and
6:berthing.
UpNo. : Displayed in x-y format.
x and y denote edition and update numbers, respectively. For example, UpNo.3.0-8
indicates that the base chart having edition No.3.0 has been updated 8 times. It also
means that one base chart and 8 update charts, that is, total of 9 charts are included in the
source chart.
Publish : Date when the chart is published.
8 Chart Portfolio
8-10
[System Chart Table]
- mark
+ mark
Last Update : The date when the chart was updated in Chart Portfolio.
Accepted :
Yes
Updated chart has been merged with the original chart.
No
Updated chart has not been merged with the original chart. Use Navigation & Planning screen
to merge them. See 3.11 Accepting the S-57 Updating Chart.
How to select a chart (file) from System Chart table:

For example, to select a chart from the folder n30120, follow the steps below:
1) Left-click the folder S57 twice quickly.
Folders included in the folder S57 appear.
2) Left-click the folder lon120 twice quickly.
The folders included in the folder lon120 appear.
3) Left-click the folder n30120.
The charts included in the folder n30120 are displayed in the table as shown above.
4) Left-click the desired chart in the table to select it.
To close the folder S57, left-click it twice quickly.
You can also open/close the folder using the + and - marks in the folder tree.
Left-clicking + mark opens the folder to show the lower-order folders included in it.
Left-clicking - mark closes the folder to put back the lower-order folders into it.
8-11
8 Chart Portfolio
S-63 Chart
Chart :
Name of the chart
Scale :
Scale of the chart. 1:overview indicates the smallest scale, with the scale being enlarged
UpNo. :
Displayed in x-y format.
successively in order of 2:general, 3:coastal, 4:approach, 5:harbour and 6:berthing.

x and y denote edition and update numbers, respectively. For example, UpNo.3.0-8 indicates that
the base chart having edition No.3.0 has been updated 8 times. It also means that one base chart
and 8 update charts, that is, total of 9 charts are included in the source chart.
Publish : Date when the chart is published.
Permit : Shows the presence or absence of certification.
S-63 requires SA Certificate file. (See 8.3.3
Import/Update of S-63 Chart.)

Only the charts that were certified by SA Certificate file are displayed on Source Chart Table. For
this reason, all the charts on the table have Yes in Permit column.
8 Chart Portfolio
8-12
Last Update : The date when the chart was updated in Chart Portfolio.
Accepted :
Yes
No
Updated chart has been merged with the original chart.

Updated chart has not been merged with the original chart. Use Navigation & Planning screen
to merge them. See 3.11 Accepting the S-57 Updating Chart.

1) Left-click the folder S57 twice quickly.
Folders included in the folder S57 appear.
To close the folder S57, left-click it twice quickly.
8-13
8 Chart Portfolio
C-MAP Ed.2 Chart

Zone :
List of zones.
8 Chart Portfolio
8-14
Chart :
Name of the chart
Scale level : Scale: Scale of the chart. A indicates the smallest scale, with the scale being enlarged
successively in order of B, C, D, and E.
Zone :
Z is a worldwide chart.
Zone number.

1) Left-click the folder CM93 Ed.2 twice quickly.
Folders included in the folder CM93 Ed.2 appear.
To close the folder CM93 Ed.2, left-click it twice quickly.
8-15
8 Chart Portfolio
C-MAP Ed.3 Chart

Database : Name of the database.

Issue No :
Issue number of the chart.
8 Chart Portfolio
8-16
Name :
Name of zone or area under contract.
Issue No : Issue number of the chart.

License : License number.
Expiry :
Expiry date of license

For example, to select a chart from the folder World, follow the steps below:
1) Left-click the folder CM93 Ed.3 twice quickly.
Folders included in the folder CM93 Ed.3 appear.
2) Left-click the folder World twice quickly.
The charts included in the folder World appear.
To close the folder CM93 Ed.3, left-click it twice quickly.
8-17
8 Chart Portfolio
ARCS Chart
Chart :
Name of the chart
Scale :
Scale of the chart.
UpNo. :
Update number.
Ed.Date : Date when the chart is published.

Service :
NS (Navigator Service)
Indicates that the chart is provided under license agreement.
If the chart is updated during the term of agreement, update service is available.
SS (Skipper Service)
Indicates that the chart was purchased.
Update service is not available.
8 Chart Portfolio
8-18
Last Update/Expiry : Display of Last Update and Expiry can be changed over in the View menu.
Last Update
Date when the chart is updated in Chart Portfolio.
Expiry
Expiry date of the chart.

For example, to select a chart from the folder NS, follow the steps below:
1) Left-click the folder ARCS twice quickly.
Folders included in the folder ARCS appear.
2) Left-click the folder NS twice quickly.
The charts included in the folder NS appear.
To close the folder ARCS, left-click it twice quickly.
8-19
8 Chart Portfolio
8.3 Overview Flow Chart

8.3.1 Overview Flow Chart
The following flow charts describe the overview of import/update operation of the charts in Chart Portfolio.
(1) Import/update of S-57 chart
Start
Update CD
The type of your CD-ROM?
Base CD
Import of chart (8.3.2.1)
YES
Update of chart (8.3.2.2)
Other CDs to use?
NO
End
8 Chart Portfolio
8-20
(2) Import/update of S-63 chart
Start
SA Certificate file (such as primar.crt)

already imported?
YES
NO
Import SA Certificate file (8.3.3.1)
Select SA Certificate file (8.3.3.2)
YES
Cell Permit already imported?
NO
YES
New Cell Permit obtained?
Import Cell Permit (8.3.3.3)

NO
Update CD
Type of your CD-ROM?
Base CD
Import the chart (8.3.3.4)
YES
Update the chart (8.3.3.5)
Other CD to use?
NO
End
8-21
8 Chart Portfolio
(3) Import/update of ARCS chart
Start
Checkout (8.3.4.1)
YES
Chart Permit already imported?
NO
YES
New Chart Permit obtained?
Import Chart Permit. (8.3.4.2)

NO
Update CD
Base CD
YES
Other CD to use?
NO
End
8 Chart Portfolio
8-22
(4) Import/update of C-MAP Ed.2 chart
Start
Checkout (8.3.5.1)
YES
Permission already acquired?
NO
Acquire Permission (8.3.5.2)
Update CD
Base CD
YES
Other CD to use?
NO
End
8-23
8 Chart Portfolio
(5) Import/update of C-MAP Ed.3 chart

Import/update with CD
Start
Checkout (8.3.6.1)
Update CD
Base CD
YES
Other CD to use?
NO
NO
YES
YES
New Permission acquired?

NO
End
8 Chart Portfolio
8-24
Update with e-mail
Start
Checkout (8.3.6.1)
Base CD already installed?
YES
NO
YES
NO
Update the chart with e-mail

(8.3.6.4)
End
8-25
8 Chart Portfolio
8.3.2 Import/Update of S-57 Chart

8.3.2.1 Import of S-57 Chart in Chart Portfolio
1) Insert S-57 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
2) Select [Sort] - [S-57] in that order.
S-57 chart list is displayed.
S-57 chart list
If S-57 chart list is not displayed, left-click the [Auto Detect] button.
8 Chart Portfolio
8-26
3) Left-click the [Import/Update] button.

The Import Condition panel opens.
[Import/Update] button

Import of S-57 chart is started.
8-27
8 Chart Portfolio
Left-clicking the [Log] button will show the import result.

[Log] button
Import result
Number of charts imported

Total number of charts to be imported
(Updated charts are counted in.)
Progress meter shows the progress of the import processing according to the capacity
of the chart files already processed.
8 Chart Portfolio
8-28
5) After the import is completed, left-click the [Exit] button to exit Chart Portfolio.
(2) Left-click the [Exit] button.
(1) Check that the import is completed.
8-29
8 Chart Portfolio
8.3.2.2 Update of S-57 Chart in Chart Portfolio

1) Insert S-57 UPDATE CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
2) Select [Sort] - [S-57] in that order.
S-57 chart list is displayed.
S-57 chart list
If S-57 chart list is not displayed, left-click the [Auto Detect] button.
8 Chart Portfolio
8-30

Update of S-57 chart is started.
* If you left-click the [Cancel] button, confirm the chart display, and accept the chart update with
Navigation & Planning. (See 3.11 Accepting S-57 Updating Chart.)
8-31
8 Chart Portfolio
Left-clicking the [Log] button will show the update result.

[Log] button
Update result
Number of charts updated

Total number of charts to be updated
(Charts updated previously are counted in.)
Progress meter shows the progress of the update processing according to the capacity
8 Chart Portfolio
8-32
5) After the update process is completed, left-click the [Exit] button to exit Chart Portfolio.
(1) Check that the update is completed.
8-33
8 Chart Portfolio
8.3.3 Import/Update of S-63 Chart

Note:
ECDIS can use the charts published by more than one data server (PRIMAR STAVANGER, UKHO,
Hydrographic and Oceanographic Department of Japan Coast Guard, etc.).
It is necessary,
however, to import and select SA Certificate file to the system each time charts provided by a new
data server are used. Before importing the charts, for certification of ENC, import and select SA
Certificate file contained in Chart CD-ROM provided by the data server.
8.3.3.1 Import of SA Certificate file

1) Start Chart Portfolio.
2) Select [Tool] - [Option] in that order.
The Option panel opens.
3) Left-click the [S-63] tab, and then, the [Import of Certificate...] button.
The Find file panel opens.
8 Chart Portfolio
8-34
4) Insert S-63 Chart CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive, and wait until it is ready to be read.
5) Select [D:] (D drive) from the Drive combo box (a) as shown below.
(c)
(b)
(a)
6) Double-click [D:] in the Directory list box (b).

7) Double-click the file name of SA Certificate (such as primar.crt) in the File name list box (c).
8) Check the file name, and left-click the [OK] button.
The Import of SA Certificate panel opens.
Check the file name you have selected.
8-35
8 Chart Portfolio
9) Check the SA Certificate information, and left-click the [OK] button.

Check the information of SA Certificate.
(This information is of PRIMAR STAVENGER or UKHO.)
10) As the message box appears, left-click the [OK] button to close the box.
Import procedure is completed.
1 in [1:primar.crt] indicates the order of adding CRT file.
primar.crt indicates the file name.
The file name varies depending on the data server.
(primar.crt for PRIMAR STAVENGER or UKHO, iho.crt for Hydrographic
and Oceanographic Department of Japan Coast Guard, etc.)
8 Chart Portfolio
8-36
8.3.3.2 Selection of SA Certificate file

3) Left-click the [S-63] tab, and then, the [Select of Certificate...] button.
The Select of SA Certificate panel opens.
4) Select the SA Certificate of the data server to import or update charts.

(By default, 0:IHO.CRT of Hydrographic and Oceanographic Department of Japan Coast Guard
is selected.)
8-37
8 Chart Portfolio
5) Check the information of SA Certificate, and left-click the [OK] button.

Check the information of SA Certificate.
(This information is of PRIMAR STAVENGER or UKHO.)
6) Check the file name of SA Certificate (such as [1:primar.crt]), and left-click the [OK] button to
close the panel.
1 in [1:primar.crt] indicates the order of adding CRT file.
primar.crt indicates the file name.
The file name varies depending on the data server.
(primar.crt for PRIMAR STAVENGER or UKHO, iho.crt for Hydrographic
and Oceanographic Department of Japan Coast Guard, etc.)
8.3.3.3 Import of Cell Permit

8 Chart Portfolio
8-38
3) Left-click the [S-63] tab, and then, the [Import Cell Permit...] button.
4) Insert Cell Permit CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive, and wait until it is ready to be read.
5) Select [D:] (D drive) from the Drive combo box (a) as shown below.
(c)
(b)
(a)
6) Double-click [D:] in the Directory list box (b).

7) Double-click the file name of Cell Permit (such as PERMIT.TXT) in the Filen ame list box (c).
Note:
When Cell Permit is supplied in FD, insert it into the FD drive, and select [A:] (A drive).
8-39
8 Chart Portfolio

9) As the Completed panel appears, left-click the [OK] button.

The display returns to the Option panel.
10) Check the number of chart license, and left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
Import procedure of S-63 Cell Permit is completed.
Check the number of chart license.
8 Chart Portfolio
8-40
8.3.3.4 Import of S-63 Chart

1) Insert S-63 Chart CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
2) Select [Sort] - [S-63(Offline)] in that order.
S-63 chart list will appear in several minutes.
Note:
Decoding of chart and checking of permission start.
This processing takes several minutes or more (30 minutes, for example) depending on the
number of chart license.
The Import Condition panel opens.
S-63 chart list
8-41
8 Chart Portfolio

The S-57/S-63 Import/Update panel opens.
Note:
If the BASE version includes UPDATE information (such as PRIMAR STAVENGER or
UKHO), a panel as shown below opens, so left-click the [OK] button.
* If you left-click the [Cancel] button, confirm the chart display, and accept the chart update
with Navigation & Planning.
Structure, format and validity of the chart are checked.
8 Chart Portfolio
8-42
Left-clicking the [Log] button will show the import result.

[Log] button
Import result
Number of charts imported
Total number of charts to be imported excluding invalid ones

8-43
8 Chart Portfolio
5) Check that the import is completed, and then, left-click the [Exit] button to exit Chart Portfolio.
8.3.3.5 Update of S-63 Chart

1) Insert S-63 Chart CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
2) Select [Sort] - [S-63(Offline)] in that order.
S-63 chart list will appear in several minutes.
Note:
Decoding of chart and checking of permission start.
This processing takes several minutes or more (30 minutes, for example) depending on the
number of chart license.
8 Chart Portfolio
8-44
S-63 chart list

The S-57/S-63 Import/Update panel opens.
* If you left-click the [Cancel] button, confirm the chart display, and accept the chart update with
Navigation & Planning. (See 3.11 Accepting S-57 Updating Chart.)
8-45
8 Chart Portfolio
Structure, format and validity of the chart are checked.
Left-clicking the [Log] button will show the update result.

[Log] button
Update result
8 Chart Portfolio
8-46
Number of charts updated
Total number of charts to be updated excluding invalid ones

5) Check that the update is completed, and then, left-click the [Exit] button to exit Chart Portfolio.
8-47
8 Chart Portfolio
8.3.4 Import/Update of ARCS Chart

8.3.4.1 Checkup of ARCS
Expiry date of license (Chart Permit)
The license (Chart Permit) has an expiry date.
(d)
(a)
(b)
(c)
Course of time
Present date
One month
One month

(a) For 30 days before the expiry date of license
A warning message is displayed for 30 days before the expiry date of license. See 14.2.1 Alarm
Information of ARCS Chart.
(b) For 30 days after the expiry date of license
An error message is displayed for 30 days after the expiry date of license. See 14.2.1 Alarm
Information of ARCS Chart.
The license is invalid, but ARCS chart can be displayed without any problem.
(c) From 30 days after the expiry date onward
An error message is displayed. The license is invalid, and ARCS chart cannot be displayed. See
14.2.1 Alarm Information of ARCS Chart.
(d) If ARCS chart has been displayed normally but will not be displayed from a certain point of time,
either of the following may be the cause.
ARCS chart you have used was the trial version (available free of charge for 3 months).
The details of the license agreement were changed.
Note:
For the details of the license agreement, contact the owner of the vessel.
8 Chart Portfolio
8-48
8.3.4.2 Import of ARCS in Chart Portfolio

(1) Import of ARCS chart permit
1) Insert the ARCS license FD into the FD drive, and start Chart Portfolio.
2) Select [Chart] - [ARCS] - [Import/Regist Chart Permit] in that order.
The Import/Enter Chart Permit panel opens.
3) Left-click the [Browse...] button.

4) Select [A:] (A drive) from the Drive combo box (a) as shown below.
(c)
(b)
(a)
5) Double-click [A:] in the Directory list box (b).

6) Double-click the file name of ARCS license (such as gb.ncp) in the File name list box (c).
8-49
8 Chart Portfolio

The display returns to the Import/Enter Chart Permit panel.

Import of ARCS Chart Permit is completed.
Note:
After the import of ARCS Chart Permit is completed, Chart Portfolio prepares an ARCS index file.
While the file preparation is in progress, the [Exit] button of Chart Portfolio screen is in gray color
and disabled. Exit Chart Portfolio after the index file is completed. (It takes approximately 40
minutes at the most.)
8 Chart Portfolio
8-50
(2) Checking of ARCS chart permit

2) Left-click the [ARCS] tab to check the license information.
The number of licensed ARCS

charts
ARCS license is not imported.
8-51
8 Chart Portfolio
3) Select [View] - [ARCS License Information] in that order.

The ARCS License Information panel opens.
4) The following license information is displayed.

Left-click the [Close] button to close the panel.
8 Chart Portfolio
8-52
(3) Import of ARCS chart

1) Insert ARCS chart CD-ROM into the CD drive.
2) Select [Sort] - [ARCS] in that order.
ARCS chart list is displayed.
ARCS chart list
If ARCS chart list is not displayed, left-click the [Auto Detect] button.
8-53
8 Chart Portfolio

Import of ARCS chart is started.
Left-clicking of the [Log] button will show the import result.
[Log] button
Import result
Number of imported charts
Progress meter shows the progress of the import processing according to the number
8 Chart Portfolio
8-54
Note:
After the import of ARCS chart is completed, Chart Portfolio prepares an ARCS index file. While the
file preparation is in progress, the [Exit] button of Chart Portfolio screen is in gray color and
disabled. Exit Chart Portfolio after the index file is completed. (It takes approximately 40 minutes
at the most.)
8-55
8 Chart Portfolio
8.3.4.3 Update of ARCS in Chart Portfolio

1) Insert ARCS chart CD-ROM into the CD drive.
2) Select [Sort] - [ARCS] in that order.
ARCS chart list is displayed.
ARCS chart update list
If ARCS chart list is not displayed, left-click the [Auto Detect] button.
8 Chart Portfolio
8-56

Update of ARCS chart is started.
Left-clicking of the [Log] button will show the update result.
[Log] button
Update result
Number of updated charts
Progress meter shows the progress of the update processing according to the number
8-57
8 Chart Portfolio
Note:
After the update of ARCS chart is completed, Chart Portfolio prepares an ARCS index file. While
the file preparation is in progress, the [Exit] button of Chart Portfolio screen is in gray color and
disabled. Exit Chart Portfolio after the index file is completed. (It takes approximately 40 minutes
at the most.)
8 Chart Portfolio
8-58
8.3.5 Import/Update of C-MAP Ed.2 Chart

8.3.5.1 Checkup of C-MAP Ed.2
Setting of work area
2) Left-click the [Advanced] tab, and then, left-click the [Advanced Option...] button.
The Advanced Option panel opens.
8-59
8 Chart Portfolio
3) Set the work area.

Use work area for C-MAP check box.
Use work area for C-MAP check box is blank. (Default)

[Merit]
Less time is required for import processing. (It takes approximately 5-6 hours to
import the charts worldwide.)
[Demerit]
Change of Chart CDs is required every one or two hours.
Use work area for C-MAP check box is checked.

[Merit]
Once the full chart data (3 CDs) is copied (it takes only 30 minutes), there is no need
of changing of CDs thereafter.
[Demerit]
Import processing takes long time. (It takes approximately 8 hours to import the
charts worldwide.)
Note:
Recommended setting of Use work area for C-MAP check box is blank.
8 Chart Portfolio
8-60
8.3.5.2 Import of C-MAP Ed.2 Chart in Chart Portfolio

(1) Acquisition of Permission (AUTHORIZATION CODE)
1) Select [Chart] - [C-MAP Ed.2] - [Regist/Confirm User/Authorization Code] in that order.
The C-MAP Authorization Wizard panel opens.
2) Select [First use C-MAP Ed.2, or change subscription zone/areas.], and left-click the [Next>]
button.
3) Insert C-MAP Ed.2 CD-ROM into the CD drive.

4) Left-click the [Next>] button.
8-61
8 Chart Portfolio
5) Select zones or areas, and left-click the [(4) Add [>>]] button. Then, left-click the [Next>]
button.
Left-click the [(4) Add [>>]] button.
Select zones or areas.
6) Send USER CODE to C-MAP by e-mail or fax.

You will have AUTHORIZATION CODE from C-MAP.
USER CODE
(1) Send USER CODE.

(2) You will have AUTHORIZATION CODE.
User
Send to : C-MAP Norway

e-mail address :
license @c-map.no
Fax No. : +47 51464701
8 Chart Portfolio
8-62
C-MAP
7) Select [Chart] - [C-MAP Ed.2] - [Regist/Confirm User/Authorization Code] in that order.

The C-MP Authorization Wizard panel opens.
8) Select [Register AUTHORIZATION CODE received from C-MAP], and left-click the [Next>]
button.
9) Enter AUTHORIZATION CODE received from C-MAP, and left-click the [OK] button to close the
panel.
Acquisition of AUTHORIZATION CODE is completed.
Enter AUTHORIZATION CODE

received from C-MAP.
8-63
8 Chart Portfolio
(2) Import of C-MAP Ed.2 chart

1) Select [Sort] - [C-MAP Ed.2] in that order.
C-MAP Ed.2 chart list is displayed.
C-MAP Ed.2 chart list

Import of C-MAP Ed.2 chart is started.
Number of imported charts
[Log] button
Import result
8 Chart Portfolio
8-64
Note:
If the following error message is displayed, it indicates that you have entered a wrong
AUTHORIZATION CODE. Enter the AUTHORIZATION CODE received from C-MAP again.
Example for error message
8-65
8 Chart Portfolio
8.3.5.3 Update of C-MAP Ed.2 Chart in Chart Portfolio


Update of C-MAP Ed.2 chart is started.
Number of updated charts
[Log] button
Update result
8 Chart Portfolio
8-66
8-67
8 Chart Portfolio
8.3.6 Import/Update of C-MAP Ed.3

8.3.6.1 Checkup of C-MAP Ed.3
Expiry date of license (e-Token)
The license has an expiry date.
(a)
(b)
Present date
Course of time
Two months
(a) For 60 days before the expiry date of license

The following message is displayed for 60 days before the expiry date of license.
(b) After the expiry date of license

The following message is displayed. The chart is displayed only for 15 minutes after it is started.
Note:
If the message (a) or (b) above is displayed, the license should be updated. Contact a C-MAP
dealer.
8 Chart Portfolio
8-68
8.3.6.2 Import of C-MAP Ed.3 Chart in Chart Portfolio

(1) Import of C-MAP Ed.3 chart
If C-MAP Ed.3 chart list is not displayed, left-click the [Auto Detect] button.

Import of C-MAP Ed.3 chart is started.
8-69
8 Chart Portfolio

[Log] button
Import result
8 Chart Portfolio
8-70
(2) Acquisition of Permission

2) Left-click the [C-MAP Ed.3] tab, and then, [Order/Regist/Confirm License...] button.
The Registration Wizard panel opens.
3) Select [Ordering], and left-click the [Next(N)] button.
Select [Ordering].
8-71
8 Chart Portfolio
4) Select zones or areas, and left-click the [Add->] button. Then and left-click the [Next(N)] button.
Left-click the [Add->] button.
Select zones or areas.
Check [Purchase] as needed.

(In this case, any update services cannot be used.)
5) Insert an empty FD into the FD drive.

6) Check the order information, and left-click the [Save] button.
The Browse for Folder panel opens.
Check the order information.
8 Chart Portfolio
8-72
7) Select the FD drive where the order information is saved, and left-click the [OK] button to close
the panel. The name of the saved file is order.txt.
Select the FD drive.
8) Send the saved order information (order.txt) to C-MAP by e-mail.

If the e-mail is not available, write down the order information, and send it by fax.
You will have a license issued by C-MAP.
(1) Send order.txt you have saved..

(2) You will have a license issued by C-MAP.
User
Send to : C-MAP Norway
C-MAP
e-mail address :
license @c-map.no
Fax No. : +47 51464701
8-73
8 Chart Portfolio
(3) Loading of eToken license

2) Left-click the [C-MAP Ed.3] tab, and then, [Order/Regist/Confirm License...] button.
3) Select [Regist License], and left-click the [Next(N)] button.
Select [Regist License].
8 Chart Portfolio
8-74
4) Select [Add License form file], and left-click the [Load] button.
The Select License file panel opens.
Select [Add License from file]
5) Insert the eToken license FD into the FD drive.

6) Select [password.usr], and left-click the [Open(O)] button.
The Information panel opens.
Select password.usr.
7) Check that the loading is completed, and left-click the [OK] button.
The display returns to the Registration Wizard panel opens.
Check that the loading

is completed
8-75
8 Chart Portfolio

9) A message indicating the completion of license registration appears. (It takes several seconds
for the message to appear.)
Then, left-click the [Order/Regist/Confirm License...] button.
Message indicating the completion

of license registration.
8 Chart Portfolio
8-76
10) Select [Confirm License], and left-click the [Next(N)] button.
Select [Confirm License].
11) Check the license information, and left-click the [Close] button.
Check the license information.

(Information at left is a sample.)
8-77
8 Chart Portfolio
13) Exit Chart Portfolio.
(4) Checking of chart display

1) Left-click [
8 Chart Portfolio
] in the startup menu to start Navigation & Planning.
8-78
2) Left-click the [MENU] button, and select [(2) Chart] - [(0) Option] - [(1) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS...] in
that order.
The Chart Option panel opens.
3) Left-click the [View Common] tab.

If the World check box is blank, check it.
Check the World check box.
8-79
8 Chart Portfolio
6) Left-click the [View 1] tab, and select [C-MAP Ed.3].

Finally, left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
[View 1] tab
8 Chart Portfolio
Select [C-MAP Ed.3].
8-80
8.3.6.3 Update of C-MAP Ed.3 Chart in Chart Portfolio

If C-MAP Ed.3 chart list is not displayed, left-click the [Auto Detect] button.
8-81
8 Chart Portfolio

[Log] button
Update result
8 Chart Portfolio
8-82
8.3.6.4 Update of C-MAP Ed.3 Chart with E-mail

(1) What is the RTU (Real Time Updating) service?
RTU (Real Time Updating) service updates C-MAP Ed.3 chart via e-mail or Internet through the
C-MAP RTU server.
Update with e-mail
(1) Order
(2) E-mail sent
ECDIS
User
C-MAP RTU
server
(1) Create an order file (e.g., JRC eT 30001.ord) with Chart Portfolio, and save the order file on a
floppy disk.
(2) Attach the order file to e-mail, and send it to the RTU server (E-mail: updates@c-map.no).
(3) Reply e-mail sent
(4) Update of charts
ECDIS
User
C-MAP RTU
server
(3) Pieces of reply e-mail with an update file (e.g., u001x002.ans) being attached are automatically
sent by the RTU server.
(4) Save the update files on a floppy disk or CD-R/RW, and update C-MAP Ed.3 chart with Chart
Portfolio.
E-mail address of C-MAP RTU server

E-mail: updates@c-map.no
8-83
8 Chart Portfolio
(2) Update of C-MAP Ed.3 chart with e-mail

1) Select [Chart] - [C-MAP Ed.3] - [Update Charts] in that order.
The C-MAP ED.3 Chart Update panel opens.
2) Left-click the [Create Chart Update Order to send via E-mail] button.
The C-MAP ED.3 Chart Update - Create Chart Update Order to send via E-mail panel opens.
eToken number
(This number is given as an example.)
3) Insert an empty FD into the FD drive.
8 Chart Portfolio
8-84
4) Select the Database to be updated from the Database list box (a).
5) Select the Zones or Areas to be updated from the Available list box (b), and left-click the [>]
button (c).
6) Select a file size from the Select e-mail size combo box (d). The update files from the RTU
server are received in the selected size. [Recommended size: 1.44MB (Floppy)]
7) Left-click the [Create] button.
An order file is created, and the Select drive panel opens.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Check this check box to select all signing Zones/Areas with

the Database selected in (a). (Recommended)
8) Select the FD drive where the order file is saved, and left-click the [OK] button.
Select the FD drive.
8-85
8 Chart Portfolio

The name of the saved file is JRC eT *****.ord. (*****: eToken number)
(This file name is given as an example.)
10) Attach the saved order file JRC eT *****.ord to e-mail and send it to the C-MAP RTU server.
Pieces of e-mail with an update file (e.g., u001x002.ans) being attached are automatically send
by the RTU server.
(1) Send the order file you have saved.
(2) You will receive update files from the C-MAP
RTU server.
User
C-MAP RTU server
E-mail address of C-MAP RTU server: updates@c-map.no

Note:
Confirm that an update file (*.ans) is attached to each piece of received e-mail.
Update file rule (splitting into parts of the file size set when an order is placed.)
uXXXxYYY.ans
YYY: File count
XXX: File number
Example: Division into four split files
u001x004.ans
u002x004.ans
u003x004.ans
u004x004.ans
11) Save the received update files on a floppy disk (CD-R/RW).

Note:
Be sure to save the update files in the root directory on a floppy disk (CD-R/RW).
8 Chart Portfolio
8-86
12) Insert the floppy disk (CD-R/RW) containing the update files into the FD (CD) drive.
13) Left-click the [Apply Chart Update from Files] button.
A message box appears.
The message at left appears when the update files exist on

the floppy disk or CD-R/RW.
(Drive D for CD-R/RW)
8-87
8 Chart Portfolio
16) Left-click the [Apply Updates] button.

Update of charts is started.
Searches the floppy disk

or CD-R/RW for the update files.
The location where update files

are saved is displayed.
To use update files at another location,

left-click the [Browse] button and specify
the location.
The message at left is displayed while chart

update is in progress. The update may take
several minutes.
17) When the update is completed, the following message box appears. Left-click the [OK] button.
Note:
If there are disks containing update files, repeat steps 16 and 17 to apply all the update files.
8 Chart Portfolio
8-88
18) Left-click the [Close] button to close the C-MAP Chart Update - Apply Chart Update from Files
panel.
19) Left-click the [Review Updates] button.

The C-MAP ED.3 Chart Update - Review Updates panel opens.
8-89
8 Chart Portfolio
20) Select Database.

The details of Database are displayed in the lower field.
Database selection
Details of Database
8 Chart Portfolio
8-90
Select the details of Database and right-click. The items below can be executed.
: Hydrographic Office
:
Chart name
: Unit of update
:
Object
Refresh
Updates the details of Database.
Reject selected
Rejects the update of selected data in the tree structure.
Delete mark of update
(Cannot be selected at present.)
Double-clicking an object
. displays the details of the object. (The display takes several tens
of seconds.)
Details of object
8-91
8 Chart Portfolio
21) After confirming the update, click the [Close] button of the C-MAP ED.3 Chart Update - Review
Updates panel.
22) Left-click the [Close] button to close the C-MAP ED.3 Chart Update panel.
23) Left-click the [Exit] button to close [Chart Portfolio].

Left-click the [Exit] button.
8 Chart Portfolio
8-92
8.4 Editing Operations (For C-MAP Ed.2)

8.4.1 Selectable Filter ON/OFF Selection (Selectable Filter)
To enable selectable filter which is used to filter the source charts displayed in the source chart table, you
need to set the selectable filter to ON state beforehand.
1) Select [Edit] - [Selectable Filter] in that order.
Each time you select it, Selectable Filter is turned ON and OFF. When it is selected, the check
mark is attached to Selectable Filter.
8.4.2 Selecting all Source Charts (Select All)

1) Select [Edit] - [Select All] in that order.
Then, the all cell/zones in the source chart table are selected for importing/updating.
8.4.3 Deleting the System Chart (Delete)

1) Select [Edit] - [Delete] in that order.
You can delete the selected system chart.
8-93
8 Chart Portfolio
8.5 Filtering the Source Charts

(For C-MAP Ed.2)
You can filter the source charts in the source chart table. With this function, you can easily find the
charts you want to import/update.
1) Be sure that the selectable filter function is set to ON state. See 8.4.1 Selectable Filter ON/OFF
Selection (Selectable Filter) mentioned above.
2) Be sure that the source chart table is open. If not, left-click the Source Charts tab in the Chart
Portfolio main screen.
3) Select [Tool] - [Selectable Filter] in that order.
Then, the Selectable Filter panel opens.
Select filtering conditions by left-clicking the options.

Zone (Use only C-MAP):
Select one of items by left-clicking it.
4) Left-click the [OK] button to close the Selectable Filter panel.
When the system enters the Chart Portfolio or when you left-click the [Auto Detect] button, the
source charts are filtered with the set filtering condition, and thus filtered source charts are
displayed in the source chart table.
8 Chart Portfolio
8-94
8.6 View Operations

8.6.1 Getting Chart Information ([Information])
You can get information about the source chart or system chart.
1) Left-click one of charts in the source/system chart table, and then, left-click the [Information]
button on the screen.
Then, the Chart Information panel opens.
You can see the detailed information on that chart.
8-95
8 Chart Portfolio
8.6.2 Viewing the ARCS License Information (For ARCS)

1) Select [View] - [ARCS License Information] in that order.
Then, the validity of the ARCS license on the chart permit file (ARCS chart permit FD) is
checked.
If the ARCS license is valid, the ARCS License Information panel opens, and the license
information is displayed.
If the ARCS license is invalid, blank is displayed in this panel.
8.6.3 Viewing the Version Information of the Chart Portfolio

1) Select [Version] - [Chart Portfolio Version] in that order.
Then, the version information panel will be displayed.
8 Chart Portfolio
8-96
8.7 Setting the Chart Portfolio

You can change various settings for Chart Portfolio with the Option panel.
8.7.1 [S-57] Accepting Chart Update

Then, the Option panel opens.
2) Left-click the S-57 tab to the S-57 panel as shown above.
Left-click either option.

in Chart Portfolio:
Updating is done in the Chart Portfolio. Namely, the updating charts are
merged with the original charts stored in the system after importing.
The Accepted column in the system chart table shows whether the
updating chart is already merged or not. (Yes in the Accepted column
shows that the imported chart is already merged with the original chart.
While, No shows that the imported chart is not merged with the original
chart yet.)
Select either Every Media or Every Chart by left-clicking it.

in Navigation & Planning:
Updating of the chart is not performed until you merge it on the
Navigation & Planning screen. In this case, you can merge the updating
chart on the Navigation & Planning screen. To merge it, Accept S-57
Updates menu will be used.
For detailed descriptions, see 3.11
Accepting the S-57 Updating Chart.

3) Left-click the [OK] button to close the Option panel.
8-97
8 Chart Portfolio
8.7.2 Setting the S-63 Options

2) Left-click the S-63 tab to open the S-63 panel.
Shows User Permit.
8 Chart Portfolio
8-98
8.7.3 Setting the C-MAP Options

2) Left-click the C-MAP tab to open the C-MAP panel.
Shows one of the license statuses.

You are Licensed.
You are NOT licensed.
You not register Authorization code.
Select one of options, List and select Zone (Recommend) or List and select 20deg Square.
List and select Zone (Recommend):
In the source chart table, source charts are displayed in the zone unit.
List and select 20 deg Square:
In the source chart table, source charts are displayed in 20x20 degrees unit.
[Register, confirm User/Authorized Code] button:
Left-clicking this button will open the following C-MAP Authorization Wizard panel. For
detailed operation, see (1) Acquisition of Permission (AUTHORIZATION CODE) in 8.3.5.2
Import of C-MAP Ed.2 Chart in Chart Portfolio.
After setting, left-click the [OK] button to close the C-MAP Authorization Wizard panel.
8-99
8 Chart Portfolio
8.7.4 Setting the ARCS Options

2) Left-click the ARCS tab to open the ARCS panel.
Shows one of the license statuses.

You have xxx chart(s) license.
xxx: Number of permission
You are NOT licensed.
[Import/Regist Chart Permit] button:

Left-clicking this button will open the Import/Enter Chart Permit panel. For detailed operation,
see (1) Import of ARCS chart permit in 8.3.4.2 Import of ARCS in Chart Portfolio.
8.7.5 Setting the Boot Options

You can set various options that determine the operation when the system enters the Chart
Portfolio.
2) Left-click the Boot tab to open the Boot panel.
You can select options by left-clicking them.

Automatic Import/Update:
Importing/Updating is automatically made when the Chart Portfolio is started.
Use Selectable Filter:
Source charts are filtered by the set filtering conditions when the Chart Portfolio is started.
8 Chart Portfolio
8-100
8.7.6 Setting the Advanced Options

2) Left-click the Advanced tab to open the Advanced panel.
Select the following option by left-clicking it.

Sounds alarm(beep) after importing/updating completed:
Turns on/off the occurrence of alarm when import/update is completed. For the volume control
of the alarm sound, see 3.25 Setting the Alarm Options.
[Advanced Option] button:
Left-clicking this button will open the Advanced Option panel.
Specify the S-57 or S-63
source chart path.
Specify the C-MAP Ed.2
source chart path.
Specify the C-MAP Ed.3
source chart path.
Specify the ARCS source
chart path.
If you use multiple CDs to
install C-MAP, copy all
information from the CD-Rs
to the work area before
installation.
Left-click the [OK] button to close the Advanced Option panel.

Note:
If Use work area for C-MAP check box is checked, import/update will take 2 to 3 times longer than
otherwise.
8-101
8 Chart Portfolio
Playback
9-1
In the Playback, you can play back the logging data. The Playback screen is almost the same as for
Navigation & Planning. Also, the menu bar on the screen is the same as for the Navigation & Planning
screen except for the [(9) Playback] menu. Though the other menus are the same, there are some
submenus you cannot use in the Playback.
9.1 Entering/Exiting the Playback

(1) Entering the Playback
1) Turn ON the power by pressing the [POWER] key on the operation panel.
The startup menu appear on the display.
[Startup Menu]
2) Move the cursor with the trackball and left-click the
in the startup menu.
Almost the same screen as for Navigation & Planning will open and the Staring Date/Time
panel is displayed.
Note:
The [Startup Screen] will be automatically displayed if no operation is conducted for 10
seconds.
9 Playback
9-2
Special menu for playback:

In the Navigation & Planning screen, [(9) Maintenance] is used. However, in the Playback, [(9)
Playback] is used, instead.
Displays the Starting Date/Time panel.

Starts/Restarts the playback.
Pauses the playback.
Stops the playback.
Turns ON/OFF the Playback panel.
Table 9 Menu Tree

Main Menu
(1) Cursor
Submenu
Submenu/Option
(1) Scroll
(2) Zoom Area
(1) Ship-Centered
(2) Floating
(1) Ship-Centered
(2) Floating
(6) Remove EBL/VRM
(7) Running Fix
(9) Activate AIS
(1) Deactivate AIS
(4) Maneuver Curve
(6) Cross Bearing...
(0) Option...
(2) Chart
Selectable*
(1) Marking / Highlighting
(2) Off Center
(3) ARCS
(1) Event-Mark
(4) Highlight
(5) Delete Event-Mark...
(2) Add to my Port List...
(3) My Port List...
(4) Home
(2) Select Chart from all...
9-3
9 Playback
Table 9 Menu Tree -- Continued

Main Menu
Submenu
(2) Chart
Submenu/Option
(7) Adjust Datum Offset...
(8) Datum Transformation...
(4) Select S-57 Chart...

(5) User Charts
(1) Select User Chart...
(2) Chart Editor...
(6) Manual UpDating...

(7) Scale
(8) Azimuth
(9) Motion
(1) Select Scale...
(2) Select Range...
(3) Zoom In
(4) Zoom Out
(1) North Up
(2) Course Up
(3) Rotation
(1) True
(2) Relative
(3) Free
(1) Fix View
(3) Print Display
(4) Save Screen
(0) Option
(3) Ship
(1) Adjust
(1) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS...
(2) Other Charts...
(3) Scale...
(1) Cursor
(3) Enter Offset...
(4) Clear Offset
(0) Option...
(4) View
(1) Day-Night
(2) Radar
(3) ARPA / AIS
9 Playback
Selectable*
(1) Day Bright
(2) Day Whiteback
(3) Day Blackback
(4) Dusk
(5) Night
(6) Panel Dimmer
(1) Radar 1
(2) Radar 2
(3) Range Rings
(1) ARPA1
(2) ARPA2
9-4

Main Menu
Submenu
(4) View
(3) Internal ARPA
(4) AIS
(5) ALL
(8) ALL List
(9) Select List
(5) Logbook
(0) Option
(1) Single View
(2) Top Bottom
(3) Right Left
(4) Right Top View
(5) Left Top View
(8) Select Area
(9) Wide Range View
(1) Radar...
(2) ARPA/AIS...
(3) Display Panel...
(4) Logbook...
(6) Date / Time...
(1) Select Route...
(2) Unload Route
(3) Select Next WP...
(4) Create Alternate Route
(5) Planning
(1) Table Editor
(2) Graphic Editor

(6) Auto Sail
(7) Alarm
(8) Tool
Selectable*
(4) Analog Meter

(6) Multi View
(5) Route
Submenu/Option
(0) Option...
(1) Start...
(2) Stop
(3) Start Avoiding
(4) Stop Avoiding
(0) Option...
(1) List...
(2) History...
(0) Option...
(1) File Manager...
(2) Chart Portfolio...
(1) Create
(2) Top Window
9-5
9 Playback

Main Menu
(8) Tool
(9) Playback
Submenu
Submenu/Option
Selectable*
(3) Chart Abbreviation
(4) Navigation Data Graphs...
(5) Set User Key
(6) Bilingual
(1) Starting Data/Time
(2) Start
(3) Pause
(4) Stop
(5) Playback Panel
(0) Exit
*Selectable
: You can select in Playback.

: You cant select in Playback.
9 Playback
9-6
(2) Exiting the Playback

1) Left-click the [(0) Exit] menu and terminate the system in the same way as for Navigation &
Planning screen.
Display panels for playback operation
[For S-57/C-MAP]
[For ARCS]
9-7
9 Playback
9.2 Playing Back the Logging Data

(1) Setting the starting date/time to be played back
1) Select [MENU] - [(9) Playback] - [(1) Starting Date/Time] in that order.
Then, the Starting Date/Time panel opens. (Initially, this screen is displayed.)
Logging data drop-down list*1
Date and time of recording end

Date and time of recording start
Selection of date and time to be played
back*2
(You can select date and time by sliding
the scroll bar or entering the values.)
*1 (Logging data): A series of logging files in which the logging date is continuing.
*2: Used to designate playback start time. During playback, the date and time that were
recorded are displayed.
2) Specify the above items to select the logging data to be played back, and then left-click the [OK]
button.
(2) Displaying the Playback Panel

1) Select [MENU] - [(9) Playback] - [(5) Playback Panel] in that order.
Each time you select this menu, the Playback panel panel is turned ON and OFF. When it is
ON, the panel appears in the display panel.
Note that, depending on the playback status, some buttons are inactive.
[Pause] Button
[Stop] Button
[Start] Button
[Date/Time] Button
Left-clicking this button will open the
Start Date/Time panel as shown above.
[Playback Speed Select] Button
Left-click this drop-down list button and then select
the playback speed you want by left-clicking it.
Even if the Playback Panel panel is closed, you can start, pause, or stop the playback from
the menu.
9 Playback
9-8
(3) Starting playback

1) Left-click the [Start] button.
Then, playback starts at the speed you have selected in the Playback Panel.
Notes on Playback:
The time, date, and other information are not the current ones but the recorded ones as the logging
data.
Playback Statues:
Stop:
Shows STOP in red.
During playback:
Shows PLAY in red.
When paused:
Shows PAUSE in red.
2) To terminate the playback operation, left-click the [Stop] button.

To pause the playback, left-click the [Pause] button.
To cancel the pause, left-click the [Start] button again.
9-9
9 Playback
10
Maintenance
and
Inspection
10-1
Never attempt to check or repair the inside of the equipment.

Checking or repair by an unqualified person may cause a fire or an electric
shock.
Contact our head office, or a nearby branch or local office to request servicing.
If checking of the equipment is unavoidably necessary, be sure to turn off

the power before starting checking.
If a fan alarm or CPU temperature rise alarm has occurred, immediately
turn off the power.
Keeping the equipment in operation may cause a fire or a malfunction.
After turning off the power, contact our head office, or a nearby branch or
local office to request servicing.
To clean the surface of the equipment, do not use any organic solvent such
as thinner or benzene, as this may deteriorate the surface coating.
Use a clean, dry cloth to wipe off dirt and dust thoroughly from the surface
of the equipment.
Notes:
Do not rub the surface of the LCD strongly with a dry cloth. Do not use benzene, alcohol, gasoline,
thinner, and the like for cleaning the LCD. Use of those items will cause the LCD surface to be
damaged and deteriorated. Be sure to use a soft cloth for wiping dirt off the surface of the tube
lightly.
10 Maintenance and Inspection
10-2
10.1 Confirming Alarm

If a HARD alarm occurs, a hardware failure has been detected in this system.
Perform the following confirmation procedure:
(1) Confirmation procedure

1) Display the alarm list and read the detailed information.
(For how to display the alarm list, see 3.3.7 How to Release the Alarm ([ALARM ACK]).)
2) After reading the detailed information displayed in red, immediately perform the shutdown
process to turn off the power.
3) Ask the JRC sales representative or our local office for repair, reporting the alarm information.
(2) Explanation of hardware alarm messages

CPU Fan failed
: The CPU fan has been stopped. (Repair needed)
CPU Temp rising
: The CPU temperature has risen too high. (Repair needed)
Main Power supply Fan failed : The power supply unit (CBD-1627) fan has been stopped. (Repair
needed)
ATX Power supply Fan failed : The ATX power supply unit fan has been stopped. (Repair
needed)
LCD Fan failed
: The monitor fan of the display panels chassis (CWB-1210) has

been stopped. (Repair needed)
Rack Fan failed
: The rack fan has failed. (Repair needed)
DISK1 failed
: Hard disk 1 has failed. (Repair needed)
DISK2 failed
: Hard disk 2 has failed. (Repair needed)
10-3
10.2 Daily Maintenance

The service life of the unit is greatly affected by how well it is maintained and inspected during daily
maintenance. To ensure that the unit is kept in optimum condition, we recommend that you inspect it
daily. This also prevents the unit from malfunctioning.
Inspect the unit according to the items indicated in the table below.
Maintenance and Inspection Method

No.
1
Item
Cleaning
Inspection Item
Wipe off any dirt from the monitor display lightly with a soft, dry cloth.
Wipe off any dirt on the main unit case lightly with a dry cloth.
In
particular, wipe air vents carefully with a brush to improve air circulation.
2
Inspection
Turn the [BRILLIANCE] knob CW on the monitor to make sure that the
brightness of the monitor increases.
Turn the [BRILLIANCE] knob CCW on the monitor to make sure that
the brightness of the monitor increases.
Make sure that the trackball operates smoothly.
Press the [EBL] and [VRM] dials on the operation panel to make sure
that dials operate smoothly.
Press the [PANEL] key on the operation panel to make sure that the
lighting on the panel changes correctly.
Select [Color Pattern] to display the color test pattern, and adjust the
brightness/contrast. Also make sure that the necessary colors come
out on the monitor.
Select [Gray Scale] to display the gray scale pattern, and make sure that
the gray scale is displayed correctly.
10-4
10.2.1 Color Pattern (S-57)

The color test pattern for the S-57 charts will be displayed.
1) Select the Color Pattern in the startup menu.
The color pattern becomes activated.
[Stertup Menu]
[Color Pattern]
The color pattern can be displayed using any of the five color tables.
This color pattern is intended:
(a) for use by the mariner to check and if necessary re-adjust the brilliance and contrast
controls, particularly for use at night.
(b) for use by the mariner to satisfy himself that an again ECDIS CRT remains capable of
providing the necessary color differentiation.
(c) for initial color verification of the day-black-background, dusk and night color table.
2) Right-click to see the pop-up menu.
Day Bright:
A day-time color pattern will be displayed.
Day Whiteback: A relatively bright color pattern will be displayed.

Day Blackback:
A color pattern against a black background will be displayed.
Dusk:
A relatively dark color pattern will be displayed.
Night:
A night-time color pattern will be displayed.
Exit:
Exit the color pattern display and return to the startup menu.
3) Left-click on [Exit] from the pop-up menu to exit the color pattern.
10-5
10.2.2 Gray Scale

A gray scale pattern is displayed to check the brightness adjustment of the monitor.
Optimum brightness of the monitor can be obtained by adjusting the brightness so that the gray scale
pattern can be viewed clearly. The brightness of the monitor in the nighttime can also be optimally
adjusted in the same way.
1) Select the Gray Scale in the startup menu.
The gray scale becomes activated.
[Stertup Menu]
[Gray Scale]
2) Left-click anywhere on the gray scale to exit the gray scale. The startup menu will start up.
10-6
10.3 Replacing Consumables

The hard disk, UPS battery and LCD backlight used in this system have a limited service life, so that they
should better be replaced periodically.
The expected service life of these parts if the system is used constantly are as follows:
Number
Part
Nominal life
Remarks
Hard disk
Two years
When the power supply is on constantly.
UPS battery
Five years
If the
system is not used for long periods and battery

charging/discharging is repeated, then the nominal life
may be shorter.
3
LCD backlight
Five years
Please consult with the store, sales agent or our branch office, sales offices or outlets for replacing the
above parts.
10.4 The PWR FAIL Lamp and Power Supply Input

When AC power supply is stopped due to a blackout or the like, nothing is displayed on the monitor, but
the display information is backed up for one minute. If AC power is not supplied when one minute has
passed, the system will automatically start the shutdown process to terminate all the functions.
The following table shows the relations between the PWR FAIL lamp states and alarm sound while AC
power is not being supplied:
Inboard Backup Power Supply (24 VDC)
PWR FAIL Lamp
Connected
Blinking
Not connected
*1
No change
Alarm Sound
Yes *2
No
*1: Pressing the [PWR ACK] key changes the lamp state to lighted. The lamp goes off when AC
power is supplied.
*2: Pressing the [PWR ACK] key stops the alarm.
10-7
10.5 User Maintenance Menu

10.5.1 Backup Option
When you left-click the [
] button on the Startup menu and the following message is displayed, change
the setting of the user-maintenance menu by the following procedure.
1) Move the cursor on the Startup menu. And right-click.
2) Password is required.
3) Input 0000 as the password.
10-8
4) The Startup menu is enhanced, and the

user maintenance menu is displayed.
5) Left-click [BackUp Option] button.
Dual drive (DISK1 and 2 - E: and
Default setting.
F: drive)
Data is read out from E:drive (Disk1).

Data is written into E:drive (Disk1) and F:drive (Disk2).
Master drive (DISK1 - E: drive)
Only E:drive (DISK1) is used.
Backup drive (DISK2 - F: drive)
Only E:drive (DISK1) is used.
Drive Information
Total capacity and free space of the disk are displayed.
File Information
Volumes of Chart, Logging Data, and User files saved in

the system are displayed.
10-9
* When the setting of present is Dual drive (DISK1 and 2 - E: and F: drive), select F: drive.
* When the setting of present is Master drive (DISK1 - E: drive), select F: drive.
* When the setting of present is Backup drive (DISK2 - F: drive), select E: drive.
* To copy data from the master disk to the backup disk, left-click the button of either.
[to Backup drive except charts]:Data except charts are copied.
[to Backup drive including charts...]:Data including charts are copied.
6) Left-click [OK] button.
7) Left-click [Hide] button.
10.5.2 Hardware Key Information

This function is useful for comfirming USER PERMIT and PIN No.
These information will be needed as purchasing ARCS chart.
10-10
10.6 Troubleshooting
If the unit is not working properly, check the following points and carry out the appropriate repair before
you ask for repair.
If the following remedies do not rectify the problem, or a location not mentioned in the following tables is
not in order, contact the nearest JRC office or agent, and ask for repair.
Symptom
Power does not turn ON.
Cause
Remedy
The AC power is not ON.
Turn the AC power ON.
The breaker in the main unit
Turn the breaker ON. *
power supply is not ON.

When 220V input is being used,
Switch the input protective
the input protective circuit switch
circuit switch to AC 220V.
of the power supply is set to AC

110V.
AC power is not being input
Input AC power within the rated
within the rated range.
range.
The AC power cable is not
Call the JRC sales
connected to the main unit.
representative for repair.
Malfunction of main unit.
Call the JRC sales

POWER FAIL lamp is lit.
DC power is not being supplied
Supply DC power from the
from the distribution board.
distribution board.
The AC voltage has dropped.
Input AC voltage within the rated

range.
The main unit has
Call the JRC sales
malfunctioned.
* Lift the lever to turn the breaker ON.

Breaker
ON: Up
OFF: Down
10-11
Symptom
FAN alarm message is
Cause
The fan motor has stopped.
displayed on the LCD monitor.
Remedy
Immediately turn the power OFF,
and contact the nearest JRC
office or agent, and ask for
repair.
Nothing is displayed on screen.
The main unit has
Call the JRC sales
malfunctioned.
The power switch is not ON.
Turn the power switch ON.
The monitor has malfunctioned.
Call the JRC sales

Incorrect display
The display is shown out of
The video cable is not
Call the JRC sales
connected.
The main unit has
Call the JRC sales
malfunctioned.
Call the JRC sales
connected. (terminal fault)
The main unit has
Call the JRC sales
malfunctioned.
The initial setup was faulty.
place.
For JAN-701, keep the brilliance

control pressed for a while. The
display will be adjusted
automatically.
For JAN-901M, press the
brilliance control. The display
will be adjusted automatically.
Radar echo is not displayed
Call the JRC sales
correctly.
connected. (terminal fault)
The connector cable is not
Call the JRC sales
connected to the radar.
The main unit has
Call the JRC sales
malfunctioned.
Chart Portfolio is working.
Stop Chart Portfolio.
Gyro compass is not displayed,
The initial setup has not been
Carry out the initial setup
and "GYRO" alarm is
carried out correctly.
correctly.
displayed.
The gyro compass is not ON.
Turn the gyro compass ON.
Check the connection between
connected to the gyro compass.
the gyro compass and main unit.
The ratio setting on the gyro
Set the ratio setting on the gyro
compass is incorrect.
compass correctly.
The polarities of the connector
Connect the cable at the correct
cable are incorrect.
polarities.
The main unit has
Call the JRC sales
malfunctioned.
10-12
Symptom
Cause
Rudder angle is not displayed.
The rudder angle indicator is not
Turn the rudder angle indicator
Or, is not displayed correctly.
ON.
ON.
The ratio setting on the rudder
Set the ratio setting on the
angle is incorrect.
rudder angle.
The rudder angle indicator
Set the rudder angle indicator
setting is incorrect.
correctly.
connected to the rudder angle
the rudder angle indicator and
indicator.
the main unit.
The main unit has
Call the JRC sales
malfunctioned.
The log is not ON.
Turn the log ON.
The ratio setting on the log is
Set the ratio setting on the log
incorrect.
correctly.
connected to the log.
the log and the main unit.
Log is not displayed.
Remedy
The main unit has
Call the JRC sales
malfunctioned.
Data is not displayed, even
The analog data setup has not
Carry out the analog data setup
though the data below is input.
been set correctly.
correctly.
Relative wind direction and
The interface board is not ON.
Turn the interface board ON.
Air temperature
Water temperature
connected to the interface
the interface board and the main
Pitch
board.
unit.
Roll
The main unit has
Call the JRC sales
CPP angle
malfunctioned.
Position information (e.g. GPS,
gyro) is not displayed.
correctly.
The navigation unit is not
Check the state of the navigation
measuring.
unit.
The navigation unit is not ON.
Turn the navigation unit ON.
connected to the navigation unit.
the navigation unit and the main
wind speed
unit.
The main unit has
Call the JRC sales
malfunctioned.
10-13
Symptom
ARPA is not displayed.
Cause
Remedy
The [ARPA] key is not pressed.
Press the [ARPA] key.
The ARPA setting is incorrect.
Set the ARPA setting correctly.
The radar is not turned ON.
Turn the radar ON.
connected to the radar.
the radar and main unit.
The main unit has
Call the JRC sales
malfunctioned.
Wind direction, wind speed
The digital wind direction and air
Turn the digital wind direction
(digital wind direction and air
speedometer are not ON.
and air speedometer ON.
speedometer) are not
The connector cables are not
displayed.
connected to the digital wind
the digital wind direction and air
direction and air speedometer.
speedometer.
The main unit has
Call the JRC sales
malfunctioned.
The depth sounder is not ON.
Turn the depth sounder ON.
connected to the depth sounder.
the depth sounder and the main
UKC is not displayed.
unit.
Engine data from data logger
The main unit has
Call the JRC sales
malfunctioned.
The data logger is not ON.
Turn the data logger ON.
connected to the data logger.
the main unit and the data
and weather data are not

displayed.
logger.
The main unit has
Call the JRC sales
malfunctioned.
Automatic sailing is not
possible.
correctly.
Operation is not carried out
Carry out the correct operation
correctly.
referring to the Instruction

Manual.
The autopilot is not ON.
Turn the autopilot ON.
connected to the autopilot.
the autopilot and the main unit.
The main unit has
Call the JRC sales
malfunctioned.
10-14
Symptom
Cause
Remedy
The brightness does not
The lighting control circuit does
Call the JRC sales
change even if the
not work.
[BRILLIANCE] knob is turned.
The cable is damaged.
Call the JRC sales

The main unit has
Call the JRC sales
malfunctioned.
None of the keys on the
The cursor is displayed as an
Wait until the hourglass returns
operation panel work.
hourglass.
to a cursor.
The operation panel circuit is
Call the JRC sales
malfunctioning.
The main unit has
Call the JRC sales
malfunctioned.
The trackball is dirty.
Clean the trackball.
The main unit has
Call the JRC sales
malfunctioned.
The [EBL] and [VRM] dials do
The [EBL] and [VRM] dials are
Press the [EBL]/[VRM] keys.
not work even if turned. Or,
not ready for operation.
response is slow.
The knob is not secured to the
Use a hexagonal wrench to
shaft.
secure the knob to the shaft.
The main unit has
Call the JRC sales
malfunctioned.
The [GAIN], [VIDEO] and
The [GAIN], [VIDEO] and
Press the [RADAR] key.
[SEA/RAIN] dials do not work
[SEA/RAIN] dials are not ready
even if turned. Or, response is
for operation.
slow.
The knob is not secured to the
Use a hexagonal wrench to
shaft.
secure the knob to the shaft.
The main unit has
Call the JRC sales
malfunctioned.
Hard disk failure
See 10.5 User Maintenance
The trackball does not work.
When the [
] (Navigation &
Planning) button is left-clicked
Menu.
in the startup menu, the

message Path is incorrect or
Master Drive is failed is
displayed.
The power was turned off
Chart index failure
Start Chart Portfolio, select
during ARCS index creation by
[Chart] - [ARCS] - [Regenerate
Chart Portfolio, and Navigation
Index] to create the chart index
& Planning cannot be started
again.
with an error message being

displayed.
10-15
Symptom
Cause
Remedy
Error code (0XFFFFFFA) is
Wrong authorization code was
Input the proper authorization
displayed in Chart Portfolio.
input.
code you obtained again.
Error code (0xFFFFFF73) is
Reading from CD-ROM was
Clean the CD-ROM, and
displayed while ARCS chart is
faulty.
perform the import procedure
imported in Chart Portfolio.
again. If the error persists, the

CD-ROM or CD-ROM drive may
be out of order.
Contact the distributor of the
chart to request for replacement
of CD-ROM, or contact the JRC
sales representative to request
repair of the CD-ROM drive.
When the [
] (Navigation &
Dongle (key lock device) is
Call the JRC sales
Planning) button is left-clicked
broken or the information of
in the startup menu, the
Dongle and Software are not
message ECDIS License
matched.
Invalid is displayed.
ARCS chart is not displayed.
Chart is imported when the term
Register the latest Chart Permit
of validity of ARCS has expired.
within the expiration date, and
Chart Permit was registered
then import ARCS chart.
when the term of validity of

ARCS has expired.
PIN input was canceled when
Input PIN when starting
Navigation & Planning was
Navigation & Planning, and
started.
select ARCS chart. ([Menu] [Chart] - [Option] - [S57/C-MAP/

ARCS])
ARCS chart will not be
Chart Permit type was changed
Contact the retailer from whom
displayed, though it has been
from trial version to regular
ARCS was purchased to check
displayed normally by that time.
contract.
the details of the contract.
Details of contract were

changed.
Alarm occurs frequently while
ECDIS has detected the alarm
ARCS chart is displayed.
information regarding ARCS

chart itself and displayed the
alarm.
Check the details of the alarm.

See 14.2.1 Alarm Information of
ARCS Chart.
Error message
Index was not generated in
Re-generate Index in Chart
????Earcs.dll???? is
Chart Portfolio for such reasons
Portfolio. ([Chart] - [ARCS] -
displayed when Navigation &
as forced termination of this
[Regenerate Index])
Planning is started.
equipment during ARCS Index

generation.
10-16
Symptom
Cause
Remedy
eToken panel is displayed in Navigation &
It is an authentication
Planning or Chart Portfolio, and a password is
procedure when C-MAP
demanded.
security device (eToken)
Press Cancel button.
is accessed.
Message C-MAP Ed.3 : Key device (e-Token)
C-MAP security device
Press [POWER] to exit
not found is displayed in Navigation &
(eToken) was not
software and OS, and
Planning.
recognized.
then, press [POWER]

again to start ECDIS
again.
It is not necessary to
keep [POWER] pressed
to turn off the power.
Message System detected non response from
Press [POWER] to exit
security device (eToken),and needs to reboot.
(eToken) was not
software and OS, and
Please press [POWER] button shutdown. is
recognized.
then, press [POWER]
again to start ECDIS

again.
It is not necessary to
keep [POWER] pressed
to turn off the power.
Message Confirm CD type, and retry Auto
A CD is not inserted in
Insert the chart CD into
Detect. is displayed in Chart Portfolio.
the CD-ROM drive.
the CD-ROM drive.
The CD in the CD-ROM

drive is not a chart CD.
10-17
Symptom
Cause
Message CD is not inserted, or this CD might
The path setting is
have errors. Confirm, or contact with your chart
wrong.
Remedy
Set the path correctly.
provider. is displayed in Chart Portfolio.
C-MAP Ed.3 chart is not displayed.
The eToken license is
Register the latest valid
invalid.
eToken license and

import C-MAP Ed.3
chart. (See 14.2.2 Alarm
Information of C-MAP
Ed.3 Chart.)
C-MAP Ed.3 chart that used to be displayed is
The details of the
Ask your C-MAP Ed.3
no longer displayed.
license agreement have
distributor for the details.
been changed.
Startup Menu is in hang-up state.
Install C-MAP security
(eToken) is not installed.
device (eToken).
Message error (0xFFFFFFFA) or Error: Bad
Authorization code is
Enter the received autho-
Authorization Code or file format error is
wrong.
rization code again.
A chart list is not displayed with Chart Portfolio.
Selectable Filter is set.
Turn off Selectable Filter.
Message Insert another C-MAP Ed.2 CD. is
Selected zones are not
Select zones under
under contract.
contract, and import/
displayed in the log window of Chart Portfolio.
update data.
Message error (0x000000xx) is displayed in
See 14.2.3 Alarm
the log window of Chart Portfolio.
Information of S-57/S-63 Information of S-57/S-63

Chart.
10-18
See 14.2.3 Alarm

Chart.
Symptom
Cause
Remedy
Message There is no licensed chart. is
This CD does not contain
Insert the licensed CD
any licensed charts.
into the CD-ROM drive.
Message Warning SA public key supplied on
The selected SA Certifi-
Select the SA Certificate
the ENC media unmatches the pre-installed SA cate file is incorrect.
file relevant to the data
public key. is displayed in Chart Portfolio.
server.
Message Errors occurred in Decryption! Refer
Cell Permit is not
Import correct Cell
the log to check the detail. is displayed in
imported yet.
Permit.
Chart Portfolio.
Imported Cell Permit is

incorrect.
Cell Permit has been
deleted.
Cell Permit has already
expired.
10-19
11
After-Sales
Service
11-1
11.1 Maintenance Service

Your equipment is guaranteed for one year after it is delivered to you.
11.2 Retention Period of Repair Parts

The replacement parts for repairing this equipment (parts essential to keeping the functional integrity of
this equipment) will be retained for ten years after its production is discontinued.
11.3 When Asking for Service

When you think the system is not operating normally, see 10.6 Troubleshooting, and check again. If
the problem still cannot be corrected, turn off the unit and consult your dealer, our agent, branch, sales
department or subsidiary for advice.
In that case, use the Repair Request Form at the end of this manual.
Repair during warranty period

Should a malfunction occur when the fishfinder has been operated according to descriptions and
instructions in the instruction manual, it will be repaired free of charge.
However, breakdowns
resulting from abuse, negligence, natural disaster, fire or other unforeseeable incident will be charged.
Repair after warranty period

Repairs that restore normal operation made after the warranty period have to be paid in full by the
client.
Product data that should be provided when you ask for service
* Name of product, model, date of manufacture and serial number
* Description of malfunction (as detailed as possible)
* Company address or name of organization, address and telephone number
11.4 Checks and Inspection

Product performance gradually declines with long use resulting in inaccurate measurements, although
the rate of this decline varies with frequency of use.
To prevent this, periodic inspection is required in addition to routine maintenance. For information on
inspection, contact your dealer.
Note that inspection is charged.
When you may not understand about after sales service, ask your dealer or our nearby sales department.
11 After-Sales Service
11-2
12
Disposal
12-1
Before disposing of used lithium batteries, insulate them by applying tapes

on their
and
terminals.
Otherwise, they may short-circuit to generate heat, explode or cause a fire.
12.1 Disposal of the Product

Dispose of the system in accordance with local bylaws and regulations.
12.2 Disposal of Used Batteries

Lithium cells for backing up data at built into the system.
Do not store used lithium cells. Dispose of them as unburnable garbage.
Used lithium cells must be insulated, for example, by insulating the
terminals with tape before
disposal. In local authorities that collect unburnable and burnable garbage, dispose of used lithium
cells in accordance with local bylaws and regulations.
For details, contact the nearest JRC office, agent or your local authority.
12.3 Disposal of LCD Module

The fluorescent lamp built in the LCD module contains mercury. When disposing of the LCD module, you
need to observe the ordinances or regulations of your local government.
If the LCD module breaks and the liquid inside spills out to stick to your
skin, wash it off immediately under running water for more than 15 minutes.
If you find any skin problem afterwards, consult a doctor immediately. If the
liquid gets in your eye, wash it off immediately under running water for more
than 15 minutes, and then, consult a doctor as soon as possible.
12 Disposal
12-2
13
Specifications
13-1
13.1 Bridge Display Terminal

(1) Display
18.1 inch color LCD (JAN-701)

23.1 inch color LCD (JAN-901M)
Resolution : 1280 x 1024 (JAN-701)
Resolution : 1600 x 1200 (JAN-901M)
(2) Operation panel
Keys and switches

Track ball
EBL (Electronic Bearing Line) dial
VRM (Variable Range Marker) dial
Joystick
(3) Processor
CPU mother board

Video board
Level interface board
8-channel serial interface A/B board
Gyro/log interface (NSK) board
Radar overlay board
Radar interface board
Power supply circuit (including UPS)
Terminal board circuit
Peripherals
Silicon disk
Hard disk (Two-set component of main and sub)
CD-ROM drive
Floppy disk drive (1.44 Mbyte)
(4) Environmental conditions
IEC60945 Ver4.0 compliant
(5) Power voltage
Voltage : AC100V to 115V/AC200V to 230V (10%)

Frequency : 60 Hz/50Hz (5%)
(6) Power consumption
330VA or less (JAN-701)

350VA or less (JAN-901M)
13 Specifications
13-2
14
Reference
14-1
14.1 Alarm Fuction

List*3
Level*4
Audible*5
Output*6
Logbook
Logging*7
Automatic sailing failed
CALL
Generated Call-back
navigator
Setup
Gyro initial course not set

POS1 not select
Safety contour not set
Shallow contour not set
Deep contour not set
Safety depth not set
3
3
3
3
3
3
A/P
Autopilot failed
POS1
POS1 failed
Button*1
Message*2
Alarm List
AUTO
POS2
POS1 not fix
Datum is different
POS2 failed
Meaning*8
Always displayed.
Green: No alarm
Red: Alarm occurred. (Blinks if not
acknowledged yet. Stays lit after
acknowledgement.)
Automatic sailing cannot be continued.
By one of the following causes:
POS1 error
GYRO error
Route error
[A] Outputs a callback navigator alarm.
ARR alarm does not occur even after 30
seconds.
Route alarm does not occur even after 30
seconds.
Setting up is not completed.
Initial course for step/synchro gyro is not set.
Safety contour value is not set (default value
unchanged).
Shallow contour value is not set (default
value unchanged).
Deep contour value is not set (default value
unchanged).
Safety depth value is not set (default value
unchanged).
Autopilot is defective or communication line is
cut.
POS1 (primary) is defective or communication
line is cut.
POS1 is not fixed.
The shift amount of the primary position

exceeds the limit being set.
The difference between the primary and
second positions exceeds the limit being set.
User setting
POS2 not fix
JUMP
POS1 shifted
DIFF
POS1/POS2 difference
exceed
GYRO
Gyro failed
Gyro is defective or its line is cut.
LOG
Log failed
Log is defective or its line is cut.
LowSp
Log speed is low
ACC
ARR
Not Acknowledge
ECC/ACC
Arrived at WP
Past 30 sec with Low SPD that Log speed is

lower 2 kt than the limit (5 kt).
[A] ECC/ACC in not acknowledge after 30
seconds of the arrival on WOL.
Arrived at the WP.
OffCo
Course difference exceed
XTE
Cross track error exceed
Route
Arrived at LAST WP
Reference
14-2
During automatic
sailing
During automatic
sailing
Always
Autopilot is
connected.
Position measuring
instrument is
connected
(including DR).
Geodetic system between chart and measured Position measuring
instrument is
position information being received differs.
connected
(including DR).
Position measuring
POS2 (secondary) is defective or
instrument is
communication line is cut.
connected
POS2 is not fixed.
(including DR).
Geodetic system between chart and measured Position measuring
instrument is
position information being received differs.
connected
(including DR).
Datum is different
14
Condition*9
The difference between the course and

bearing exceeds the limit.
The amount of the cross track error exceeds
the limit.
Arrived at the last WP on the sailing final leg.
User setting.
Position measuring
instrument is
connected to POS2
(including DR).
Gyro is
connected.
Log is
connected.
During automatic
sailing
During TCS route
navigation
During Normal
route navigation
During route
navigation
During route
navigation
During route
navigation
List*3
Level*4
Audible*5
Output*6
Logbook
Logging*7
BP failed
BZ failed
Trigger failed
Video failed
Internal error
Rotation signal (BP) is out of specifications or

signal line is cut.
Rotation signal (BZ)is out of specifications or
signal line is cut.
Trigger signal is out of specifications or signal
line is cut.
Video signal is out of specifications or signal
line is cut.
Error occurred in the board.
ARPA
ARPA signal failed
ARPA is defective or signal line is cut.
Chart
Loaded different datum

chart
Loaded unknown datum
chart
Chart image is Zoom out
Security failed
Different datum chart is loaded.
During radar
display
During radar
display
During radar
display
During radar
display
During radar
display
During ARPA
display
Always
[ARCS] Unknown datum chart is loaded.
Always
3
3
[ARCS] Low-resolution chart is displayed.

[ARCS] An alarm related to ARCS security
occurred.
Not up to date
Crossing Safety Contour
Crossing Traffic Separation
Zone
Crossing Traffic Crossing
Crossing Traffic
Roundabout
Crossing Precautionary
3
2
2
Always
See 14.2.1
Alarm Information of ARCS
Chart.
2
2
Crossing Two Way Traffic

Crossing Deeper Water
Route
Crossing Recommended
Traffic Lane
Crossing Inshore Traffic
Zone
Crossing Fairway
Crossing Restricted Area
Crossing Caution Area
CrossingOffshore
Production Area
Crossing Military Practice
Area
Crossing Seaplane
Landing Area
Crossing Submarine transit
Area
Crossing Ice Area
Crossing Channel
Crossing Fishing Ground
Crossing Fishing
Prohibited
Crossing Pipeline Area
Crossing Cable Area
Crossing Anchorage Area
Crossing Anchorage
Prohibited
Crossing Spoil Ground
Crossing Dumping Ground
Crossing Dredge Area
Crossing Cargo
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Button*1
Radar
ARCS
SfCnt
AREA
Message*2
Transshipment Area
Crossing Incineration Area
Crossing Specially
Protected Areas
Dangerous Line
Dangerous Area
14-3
Meaning*8
[ARCS] An alarm related to ARCS updated.

[V] Crossing Safety Contour within set time.
[V] Crossing Traffic Separation Zone within set
time.
[V] Crossing Traffic Crossing within set time.
[V] Crossing Traffic Roundabout within set
time.
[V] Crossing Traffic Precautionary within set
time.
[V] Crossing Two Way Traffic within set time.
[V] Crossing Deeper Water Route within set
time.
[V] Crossing Recommended Traffic Lane
within set time.
[V] Crossing Inshore Traffic Zone within set
time.
[V] Crossing Fairway within set time.
[V] Crossing Restricted Area within set time.
[V] Crossing Caution Area within set time.
[V] Crossing Shore Production Area within set
time.
[V] Crossing Military Practice Area within set
time.
[V] Crossing Seaplane Landing Area within set
time.
[V] Crossing Submarine transit Area within set
time.
[V] Crossing Ice Area within set time.
[V] Crossing Channel within set time.
[V] Crossing Fishing Ground within set time.
[V] Crossing Fishing Prohibited within set time.
Condition*9
Always
Vector=ON
(User setting)
Alarm item=ON
(User setting)
[V] Crossing Pipeline Area within set time.

[V] Crossing Cable Area within set time.
[V] Crossing Anchorage Area within set time.
[V] Crossing Anchorage Prohibited within set
time.
[V] Crossing Spoil Ground within set time.
[V] Crossing Dumping Ground within set time.
[V] Crossing Dredge Area within set time.
[V] Crossing Cargo Transshipment Area within
set
time.
[V] Crossing Incineration Area within set time.
[V] Crossing Specially Protected Areas within
set time.
[V] Crossing Dangerous Line within set time.
[V] Crossing Dangerous Area within set time.
14
Reference
2
2
2
Timer
Timer
HARD i
CPU Fan failed

CPU Temp rising
Main Power supply Fan
failed
ATX Power supply Fan
failed
LCD Fan failed
Disk1 failed
Disk2 failed
AC offline
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Logging*7
Audible*5
Logbook
Level*4
2
2
DNG
Message*2
Output*6
List*3
Anch
Approaching Obstruction
Approaching Under water
rock
Approaching Wreck
Dangerous Symbol
Dragging anchor
Button*1
[S] Approaching obstruction

[S] Approaching under-water rock
[S] Approaching wreck

[S] Approaching wreck
Crossing anchor circle
Meaning*8
Time out
CPU fan is defective.
CPU temperature is rising.
Main power supply fan is defective.
Condition*9
Sector=ON
(User setting)
Anchor
circle=ON
Timer=ON
(User setting)
Always
ATX power supply fan is defective.

LCD fan is defective.
Disk1 fan is defective.
Disk2 fan is defective.
AC power is offline.
Note:
Some of the alarms may not be available depending on the system configuration used.
14
Reference
14-4
Remarks:
*1: Button
Button that will be displayed on the display panel when an alarm occurs. By left-clicking this
button, alarm acknowledgement is made for that button alarm.
*2: Message (detailed description of alarm)
When an alarm occurs, the alarm button blinks in red. At the same time, the detailed description
of the alarm is displayed in the message box at the bottom of the chart display area. When the
[ALARM ACK] button on the operation panel is pressed to acknowledge the alarm, the blinking
alarm stops and stays lit.
The following table shows the alarm display on the button, in the message box and the Alarm
List panel. The Alarm List panel opens when the [Alarm List] button is left-clicked.
Alarm button
[Alarm List] button
[Alarm buttons on the display panel]

Example: Setup alarm --- Initial course of the gyro is not set. Also, POS1 is not selected.
Button/panel
No alarm
Alarm occurred
Alarm acknowledged
For unused alarm
[Alarm List] button
Lights in green
Blinks in red
Stays lit in red
Alarm button
No display
Setup (Blinks in red.)
Setup (Stays lit in red.)
No display
In the message box
No display
Gyro initial course not
No display
No display
set POS1 not select

"Alarm List"
panel
Button
Setup (Lights in green)
Setup (Blinks in red.)
Setup (Stays lit in red.)
Inactive
Description
(Blinks in red.)
(Stays lit in red.)
Inactive
set POS1 not select
set POS1 not select
set POS1 not select
*3: An alarm shown in the Alarm List panel.

*4: Level of alarm (1: High, 2: Mid, 3: Low)
*5: Audible sound from the equipment and dedicated keyboard (The sounding pattern varies with
the level of alarm.)
*6: Output supports serial interface and network interface.
*7: Log data recorded for playback function.
*8: [A]: Alarm used for TCS only, [V]: Alarm detected by the danger detection vector (vector area),
[S]: Alarm detected by the guard ring (sector area)
*9: Condition to detect an alarm may depend on the hardware to be used.
14-5
14
Reference
14.2 Chart-Related Alarm Information

14.2.1 Alarm Information of ARCS Chart
When ARCS chart is displayed on ECDIS, chart-related alarms may occur frequently. It is obligated to
display these alarms on ECDIS, and such frequent occurrence of the alarms is not the result of a
malfunction of ECDIS. JRCs ECDIS is designed to read the chart and permit information of ARCS and
display such alarm information.
Error message
ARCS01 The contents of the GB.LCN file

have been altered. You may be in breach
of the licensing arrangements that relate
to the use of the chart.
License is invalid. Please contact your
ARCS agent/ distributor to correct this
error.
Ask your ARCS agent/distributor for the

authorized license (Chart Permit). Your
license has been falsified, so it is invalid.
Displayed in Chart Portfolio

when Navigation & Planning is
started, when ARCS Information of User Maintenance
Menu is checked, and when
the chart is imported.
ARCS02 Chart Chart#. Chart Permit

corrupted. Please reload original media.
Register Chart Permit again. Chart

Permit is in abnormal state. If the
re-registration of Chart Permit does not
restore the system to normal operation,
ask your ARCS agent/distributor for the
authorized license (Chart Permit).

when the chart is imported
ARCS03 Chart Chart#. Update

information relates to a newer version of
the chart. Please load the chart CD that
contain Chart# with an issue date of
RCID.
Import data from the latest chart CD and

update CD. The chart version of the
update CD does not match the imported
chart version.

ARCS04 Chart Chart#. The chart data

already incorporates this update information. Please load the latest update CD.
Import data from the latest chart CD and

update CD. The data on the current
update CD is already imported.

ARCS05 Chart Chart#. License expired updating is not permitted. Please contact
your agent to re-new license.
Ask your ARCS agent for a new license.

Your license has already expired, so
updating is not permitted.

(only for Navigator Service
Edition)
ARCS08 Warning - License expired in

less than one month. Please contact your
ARCS agent for a license renewal.

Your license (Chart Permit) will expire in
less than a month.
Displayed in the panel when

the chart is displayed (only for
Navigator Service Edition)
ARCS09 Chart Chart#. Warning - License

expired. The displayed chart may not be
up to date. Contact your Agent to arrange
for a license renewal.

One month has not passed yet since the
expiry date of your license (Chart Permit).

ARCS10 Chart Chart#. License expired.

ARCS charts can not be displayed.
Contact your ARCS agent for a license
renewal.

One month or more has passed since the
expiry date of your license (Chart Permit).
The chart is not displayed.

ARCS11 Chart Chart#. The loaded

version of this chart is too old to be used
with the license. Please load a more
recent version of the chart. Chart version
is Enc#, Permit version is Penc#.
Import the latest license and chart CD.

The chart encryption version number does
not match the encryption version number
of your license (Chart Permit). The chart
is not displayed.

10
ARCS12 Chart Chart#. The license is too

old to be used with this version of the
chart. Please contact your agent to obtain
a new license.

The chart encryption version number does
not match the encryption version number
of your license (Chart Permit). The chart
is not displayed.

11
Larger Scale available
More detailed charts than the currently

displayed chart can be displayed.
Larger-scale charts than the currently
displayed chart exist.
Displayed in the message area

when the chart is displayed
12
Chart Shift
Note that the currently displayed chart

position is shifted. The display position
of the current chart is shifted in
accordance with user-defined setting.

14
Reference
Measures to take
Timing and place of

displaying error message
No.
14-6
No.
Error message
Timing and place of

displaying error message
Measures to take
13
Chart Shift To WGS84
Note that the currently displayed chart

position is shifted. The displayed chart is
not of the WGS-84 geodetic system, but it
is displayed in accordance with WGS-84
while the offset value of chart data is used
as reference.

14
WGS84 position cannot be related

accurately to chart Chart#.
Note that the geodetic system of the

currently displayed chart does not
conform to WGS-84. An offset value is
not set to WGS-84, so the chart cannot be
shifted to WGS-84.

15
Loading different datum chart
Note that the geodetic system of the

currently displayed chart is not WGS-84.
A chart of a non-WGS-84 geodetic system
is displayed.

16
Loaded unknown datum chart
Note that the currently displayed chart is

of an unknown geodetic system. A chart
whose geodetic system is not set in chart
data is displayed.

17
PIN Error
Check for the Personal Identification

Number (PIN). The entered PIN is not
correct.
Displayed in the panel when a

PIN is entered at start of
18
Data error(0xFFFFFF79):Chart Permit

corrupted. Please reload original media.
Register Chart Permit again. Chart

Permit is in abnormal state. If the
re-registration of Chart Permit does not
restore the system to normal operation,
ask your ARCS agent/distributor for the
authorized license (Chart Permit).

Note 1 : # in the error message column denotes a name, ID or number.

Note 2 : Two types of ARCS are available, Skipper Service and Navigator Service. Update support is
provided for the latter but not for the former. ARCS06, 07, and 13-18 pertain to Skipper Service
only.
14.2.2 Alarm Information of C-MAP Ed.3 Chart

This section explains the details of the alarm information that may appear while C-MAP Ed.3 chart is
displayed on ECDIS.
No.
Error message
Measures to take
C-MAP Ed.3 : No license installed.
License has not yet been installed. Register the license in Chart
Portfolio.
C-MAP Ed.3 : One or more licenses expired. Please

contact your C-MAP agent for a license renewal.
The license is invalid. The chart is displayed only for 15 minute

after it is started. Contact your C-MAP agent to request license
renewal.
C-MAP Ed.3 : One or more licenses will expire at

DD/MM/YYYY. Please contact your C-MAP agent
for a license renewal.
The license will expire on DD/MM/YYYY. It will expire in less than

2 months. Contact your C-MAP agent to request license renewal.
C-MAP Ed.3 : Key device (e-Token) not found.
C-MAP security device (eToken) cannot be recognized. Press

[POWER] to exit the software and OS, and then, press [POWER]
again to start the equipment.
C-MAP Ed.3 : COM error
Com port error was detected. Press [POWER] to exit the

software and OS, and then, press [POWER] again to start the
equipment.
C-MAP Ed.3 : Unknown error
An unknown error was detected. Press [POWER] to exit the

software and OS, and then, press [POWER] again to start the
equipment.
14-7
14
Reference
14.2.3 Alarm Information of S-57/S-63 Chart

This section explains the details of the alarm information that may appear inside the log window of Chart
Portfolio while S-57/S-63 chart is imported/updated on ECDIS.
When Base CD is used:
No.
Error message
Cause
Procedure
error(0x00000001)
error: File not found
A chart defined in the catalog

file on the chart CD is not
found.
This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The

chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.
error(0x00000002)
error: File Length
A catalog file on the chart CD

contains a data length error.

error(0x00000003)
error: File extention
The chart CD contains a file

extension error.

error(0x00000004)
error: File count
A chart file is found on the

chart CD.

error(0x00000005)
error: Data not found
Specified data is not found on

the chart CD.

error(0x00000006)
error: Data error

data error.

error(0x00000007)
error: CRC
A chart file on the chart CD

contains a CRC value error.

error(0x00000008)
error: Exchange
The chart CD contains an

exchange target data error.

error(0x00000009)
error: Data structure

structure error.

10
error(0x0000000A)
error: Attribute
The attribute value of an

object defined in a chart file
on the chart CD is incorrect.

11
error(0x0000000B)
error: Instruction
Address
Internal memory address

error (instruction section)
Contact selling agency of chart.
12
error(0x0000000C)
error: Instruction offset
Internal memory offset error

(instruction section)
13
error(0x0000000D)
error: PL Rule Memory
Memory allocation error (PL

rule section)
14
Reference
14-8
When Base CD is used: (continued)

No.
Error message
Cause
Procedure
14
error(0x0000000E)
error: PL Rule
Information
Data acquisition error (PL

rule section)
15
error(0x0000000F)
error: Attribute
Information
Chart-object attribute
acquisition error
16
error(0x00000010)
error: Enc File write
SENC file write error
17
error(0x00000011)
error: Object Class get
Chart-object information
acquisition error
18
error(0x00000012)
error: Directory create
File path error
19
error(0x00000013)
error: Topology
A chart object on the chart

CD contains a topology error.

20
error(0x00000014)
error: Area Object Link
A chart area object on the

chart CD contains a link error.

21
error(0x00000015)
error: Line Object Link
A line object on the chart CD

contains a link error.

22
error(0x00000016)
error: Object outside
range
A chart object on the chart

CD is beyond the boundary.

When Update CD is used:

No.
Error message
Cause
Procedure
error(0x00000001)
error: Memory get
Memory allocation error
error(0x00000002)
error: Index get
Chart index acquisition error
An index needs to be created again. Index creation may

take several hours.
Contact your JRC sales representative.
error(0x00000003)
error: File not found
SENC file is not found.
An index needs to be created again. Index creation may

take several hours.
Contact your JRC sales representative.
error(0x00000004)
error: CRC
A chart file on the chart CD

contains a CRC value error.
This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This

chart cannot be updated.
error(0x00000005)
error: Exchange
The update CD contains an

exchange target data error.

error(0x00000006)
The update CD contains a file

structure error.

14-9
14
Reference
When Update CD is used: (continued)

No.
Error message
Cause
Procedure
error(0x00000007)
error: Data not found
A chart defined in a catalog

file on the update CD is not
found.

error(0x00000008)
error: Object not found
A SENC chart object name is

not found.

error(0x00000009)
error: Chart Cell size
SENC chart-file size

acquisition error
10
error(0x0000000A)
error: Chart Cell data
SENC chart file acquisition

error
11
error(0x0000000B)
error: Warning Cell size
SENC warning-file size

acquisition error
12
error(0x0000000C)
error: Warning Cell data
SENC warning file

acquisition error
13
error(0x0000000D)
error: Sequential
number error
The update CD contains an

update number sequence
error.

14
error(0x0000000E)
error: Object index
An update chart on the

update CD contains an object
index error.

15
error(0x0000000F)
error: Attribute
information

update CD contains an
attribute information error.

16
error(0x00000010)
error: Attribute

update CD contains an
attribute value error.

17
error(0x00000011)
error: Instruction
Address
Internal memory address

error (instruction section)
18
error(0x00000012)
error: Instruction Offset
Internal memory offset error

(instruction section)
19
error(0x00000013)
error: PL Rule Memory
Memory allocation error (PL

rule section)
20
error(0x00000014)
error: PL Rule
Information
Data acquisition error (PL

rule section)
21
error(0x00000015)
error: Enc File write
SENC file write error
22
error(0x00000016)
error: Object Class get
Chart-object information
acquisition error
23
error(0x00000017)
The update CD contains a

data structure error.

24
error(0x00000018)
error: FFPC delete

data structure error (FFPC
field deletion).

14
Reference
14-10
When Update CD is used: (continued)

No.
Error message
Cause
Procedure
25
error(0x00000019)
error: FFPC edit

data structure error (FFPC
field change).

26
error(0x0000001A)
error: FSPC delete

data structure error (FSPC
field deletion).

27
error(0x0000001B)
error: FSPC edit

data structure error (FSPC
field change).

28
error(0x0000001C)
error: VRPC delete

data structure error (VRPC
field deletion).

29
error(0x0000001D)
error: VRPC edit

data structure error (VRPC
field change).

30
error(0x0000001E)
error: SGCC delete

data structure error (SGCC
field deletion).

31
error(0x0000001F)
error: SGCC edit

data structure error (SGCC
field change).

32
error(0x00000020)
error: Coordinate Type

data structure error
(coordinate type).

33
error(0x00000021)
error: Directory create
File path error
34
error(0x00000022)
error: Topology
A chart object on the update

CD contains a topology error.

35
error(0x00000023)
Area Object Link
A chart area object on the

update CD contains a link
error.

36
error(0x00000024)
error: Line Object Link
A chart line object on the

update CD contains a link
error.
This error is not fatal.

37
error(0x00000025)
error: Object outside
range
A chart object on the update

CD is beyond the boundary.

38
error(0x00000026)
error: point

chart point object error.

39
error(0x00000027)
error: Edition number
Chart CD Edition number

error

14-11
14
Reference
14.3 Abbreviation for Geodetic System

No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
37
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
14
Abbreviation
WGS-72
WGS-84
EUR
ADI
AFG
AIN
ANO
AIA
ARF
ARS
ASC
ATF
SHB
TRN
ASQ
AUA
AUG
PHA
IBE
BER
BID
BOO
BUR
CAZ
Description
World Geodetic System 1972
World Geodetic System 1984
European 1950
Adindan
Afgooye
Ain el Abd 1970
Anna 1 Astro 1965
Antigua Island Astro 1943
Arc 1950
Arc 1960
Ascension Island 1958
Astro beacon "E" 1945
Astro DOS 71/4
Astro Tern Island (FRIG) 1961
Astronomical Station 1952
Australian Geodetic 1966
Australian Geodetic 1984
Ayabelle Lighthouse
Bellevue (IGN)
Bermuda 1957
Bissau
Bogota Observatory
Bukit Rimpah
Camp Area Astro
CAI
CAO
CAP
CAC
CGE
CHI
CHU
COA
DAL
BAT
GIZ
EAS
EUS
FOT
GAA
GEO
GRA
GUA
GSE
DOB
HEN
HJO
HKD
HTN
IND
INF
INH
TRL
ISG
IST
JOH
Campo Inchauspe 1969

Canton Astro 1966
Cape
Cape Canaveral
Carthage
Chatam Island Astro 1971
Chua Astro
Corrego Alegre
Dabola
Djakarta (Batavia)
DOS 1968
Easter Island 1967
European 1979
Fort Thomas 1955
Gan 1970
Geodetic Datum 1949
Graciosa Base SW 1948
Guam 1963
Gunung Segara
GUX 1 Astro
Herat North
Hjorsey 1955
Hong Kong 1963
Hu-Tzu-Shan
Indian Indian 1954
Indian 1975
Ireland 1965
ISTS 061
Astro 1968
ISTS 073 Astro 1969
Johnston Island 1961
Reference
No.
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
Abbreviation
KAN
KEG
KEA
KUS
LCF
LEH
LIB
LUZ
MIK
MAS
MER
MID
MIN
ASM
MPO
NAH
NAP
NAS
NAR
FLO
OEG
OHA
FAH
OGB
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
PLN
PIT
PTB
PTN
POS
PRP
HIT
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
PUR
QAT
QUO
REU
MOD
SAE
SAO
SAP
SCK
SGM
SAN
SOA
TAN
TIL
TOY
TDC
MVS
ENW
WAK
YAC
ZAN
14-12
Description
Kandawala
Kerguelen Island 1949
Kertau 1948
Kusaie Astro 1951
L. C. 5 Astro 1961
Leigon
Liberia 1964
Luzon
Mahe 1971
Massawa
Merchich
Midway Astro 1961
Minna
Montserrat Island Astro 1958
M'Poraloko
Nahrwan
Naparima, BWI
North American 1927
North American 1983
Observatorio Meteorologico 1939
Old Egyptian 1907
Old Hawaiian
Oman
Ordnance Survey of Great Britain
1936
Pico de las Nieves
Pitcairn Astro 1967
Point 58
Pointe Noire 1948
Porto Santo 1936
Provisional South American 1956
Provisional South Chilean 1963
(also known as Hito XVIII 1963)
Puerto Rico
Qatar national
Qornoq
Reunion
Rome 1940
Santo (DOS) 1965
Sao Braz
Sapper Hill 1943
Schwarzeck
Selvagem Grande 1938
South American 1969
South Asia
Tananarive Observatory 1925
Timbalai 1948
Tokyo
Tristan Astro 1968
Viti Levu 1916
Wake-Eniwetok 1960
Wake Island Astro 1952
Yacare
Zanderij
14.4 Data Formats of Files that ECDIS

can Import/Export
14.4.1
File Types
Route files
User chart files
Logbook files
14.4.2
File Names
Import source file name
Route files
Default export target file name
.csv, .
rtn_ (binary file name) .csv
TCS
.csv, .
rta_ (binary file name) .csv
2G TCS
.csv, .
User chart files
.csv, .
Logbooks
lgb_ (specified starting date_ending date) .csv
Normal
Example: lgb_020312_020313.csv
Specified period
Selected log
lgb_ (selected log date_UTC time) .csv
Example: lgb_020312_132445.csv
14.4.3
CSV File Data Structure
When importing files, character strings that come after // and until the end of the line are
handled as comments.
Commas (,) are used as delimiters.
Example:
// SYMBOL,InstName,,,,,,
// Comment,,,,,,,
// Lat,,,Lon,,
SYMBOL,BOYSHP01,,,,
User comment,,,,,
30,6.433,N,129,35.583,E
14-13
14
Reference
14.4.3.1 Route Files

(1) Normal Routes
Line
1*3
Contents
Examples, etc.
Import*1
Export*2
// (Space)
Fixed character string
ROUTE SHEET exported by JRC
// (Space)
<<NOTE>>This strings // indicate
Variable length character
comment column/cells. You can
string
ECDIS.
2
edit freely.
3
// (Space)
Route name
Route name of source file
Fixed character
<Normal>
Fixed character
Route comments
Comments from the
source file
4
// (Space)
WP No.
Fixed character
Lat
Fixed character
Fixed character
Fixed character
Lon
Fixed character
Fixed character
Fixed character
Prt [nm]
Fixed character
Fixed character
Stb [nm]
Fixed character
Fixed character
Arr Rad [nm]
Fixed character
Fixed character
Speed [nm]
Fixed character
Sail (RL/GC)
Fixed character
*1 Information acquired when importing. (Same for all below)

*2 Information to be exported. (Same for all below)
*3 Lines with gray backgrounds indicate that those lines are comment lines. (Same for all below)
14
Reference
14-14
Line
Contents
Examples, etc.
Import
Export
Time Zone
Fixed character
Fixed character
Name
WP number
000
Fixed character
Latitude degree value
35
Fixed character
Latitude minute value
35.123
Fixed character
Latitude code (N/S)
Fixed character
Longitude degree value
139
Fixed character
Longitude minute value
48.234
Fixed character
Longitude code (E/W)
Fixed character
Port side route width
0.50
Fixed character
Starboard side route width
0.50
Fixed character
Arrival circle radius
0.50
Fixed character
Planned speed
12.30
Fixed character
Navigation method (RL/GC)
RL
Fixed character
Time zone
09:00
Fixed character
Time zone code (E/W)
Fixed character
Name
Yokohama
Repeat from line five for each

waypoint.
In the WP000 line, all fields other than latitude and longitude (degree value, minute value and code)
are filled with .
14-15
14
Reference
(2) TCS Routes

Line
1
Contents
Examples, etc.
Import
Export
// (Space)
ROUTE SHEET exported by JRC
// (Space)
string
ECDIS.
2
edit freely.
3
// (Space)
Route name
Route name of source file
Fixed character
<ANTS>
Fixed character
Route comments
Comments from the
source file
4
14
// (Space)
WP No.
Fixed character
Lat
Fixed character
Fixed character
Fixed character
Lon
Fixed character
Fixed character
Fixed character
Prt [nm]
Fixed character
Fixed character
Stb [nm]
Fixed character
Fixed character
Speed [nm]
Fixed character
Sail (RL/GC)
Fixed character
ROT [deg/min]
Fixed character
Turn Rad [nm]
Fixed character
Reference
14-16
Line
Contents
Examples, etc.
Import
Export
Time Zone
Fixed character
Fixed character
Name
WP number
000
Fixed character
35
Fixed character
35.123
Fixed character
Latitude code (N/S)
Fixed character
139
Fixed character
48.234
Fixed character
Fixed character
0.50
Fixed character
0.50
Fixed character
Planned speed
12.30
Fixed character
RL
Fixed character
Turning rate
10.00
Fixed character
Turn circle radius
0.50
Fixed character
Time zone
09:00
Fixed character
Fixed character
Name
Yokohama
Repeat from line five for each

waypoint.
In the WP000 line, all fields other than latitude and longitude (degree value, minute value and code)
are filled with .
14-17
14
Reference
(3) 2G TCS Routes

Line
Contents
Examples, etc.
Import
;
(Space) x 63 characters
WP number
000
Fixed character
3535.123
Fixed character
Latitude code (N/S)
Fixed character
13948.234
Fixed character
Fixed character
Fixed character
0.50
Fixed character
0.50
Fixed character
Arrival circle radius
0.50
Fixed character
Planned speed
12.30
Fixed character
RL
Fixed character
Turning rate
010.0
Fixed character
Turning circle radius
0.50
Fixed character
Time zone
09:00
Fixed character
Fixed character
Name
Yokohama
Repeat from line second for each
waypoint.
In the WP000 line, all fields other than latitude and longitude (numeric values and codes) are ignored.
14
Reference
14-18
14.4.3.2 User Chart Files

(1) Header Records
Line
1
Contents
Examples, etc.
// (Space)
USER CHART SHEET exported
Import
by JRC ECDIS.
2
// (Space)
string
edit freely.
3
// (Space)
User chart name
File name of the source file
Fixed character
Fixed character
User chart comments
Comments from the

source file
14-19
14
Reference
(2) Object Records

a) Symbols
Line
m
Contents
Examples, etc.
Import
// (Space)
SYMBOL
Fixed character
InstName
// (Space)
Comment
// (Space)
Lat
Fixed character
Fixed character
Fixed character
Lon
SYMBOL
Fixed character
Instruction name - 1
Instruction name
Fixed character
Instruction name
Fixed character
Instruction name
+4
Comments
Comments
+5
35
Fixed character
35.123
Fixed character
Latitude code (N/S)
Fixed character
139
Fixed character
48.234
Fixed character
+1
+2
+3
Unused instruction name fields are filled with .
14
Reference
14-20
b) (Poly) Lines
Line
m
Contents
Examples, etc.
Import
// (Space)
LINE
Fixed character
InstName
// (Space)
Comment
// (Space)
Lat
Fixed character
Fixed character
Fixed character
Lon
Fixed character
Add END to the end of vertex.
LINE
Fixed character
Instruction name
Instruction name
+4
Comments
Comments
+5
Latitude degree value of the apex
35
Fixed character
Latitude minute value of the apex
35.123
Fixed character
Latitude code of the apex (N/S)
Fixed character
Longitude degree value of the
139
Fixed character
Longitude minute value of the
48.234
Fixed character
Longitude code of the apex (E/W)
+1
+2
+3
apex
apex
+n
Repeat for the number of apexes
plus five lines

END
(position end)
For lines without instructions, fill in the instruction name field with .
When importing, attributes that are not specified here are imported with specific attributes.
14-21
14
Reference
c) Arc
Line
m
Contents
Examples, etc.
Import
// (Space)
ARC
// (Space)
Comment
// (Space)
Base Point-Lat
Fixed character
Fixed character
Fixed character
Base Point-Lon
Fixed character
Fixed character
Fixed character
Radius [nm]
Fixed character
Start Angle [deg]
Fixed character
End Angle [deg]
+3
ARC
+4
Comments
Comments
+5
Latitude degree value of the
35
Fixed character
Latitude minute value of the
35.123
Fixed character
Latitude code of the reference
Fixed character
139
Fixed character
48.234
Fixed character
Longitude code of the reference
Fixed character
Radius
2.0
Fixed character
+1
+2
reference position
reference position
position (N/S)
reference position
reference position
position (E/W)
14
Reference
14-22
Line
Contents
Examples, etc.
Import
Starting angle
120.0
Fixed character
Ending angle
180.0
14-23
14
Reference
d) User Danger Lines

Line
m
Contents
Examples, etc.
Import
// (Space)
DANGER_LINE
// (Space)
Comment
Lat
Fixed character
Fixed character
Fixed character
Lon
Fixed character
+3
DANGER_LINE
+4
Comments
Comments
+5
Latitude degree value of the apex
35
Fixed character
Latitude minute value of the apex
35.123
Fixed character
Fixed character
139
Fixed character
48.234
Fixed character
Longitude code of the apex (E/W)
+1
+2
apex
apex
+n
Repeat for the number of apexes
plus two lines

END
(position end)
14
Reference
14-24
e) Polygons
Line
m
Contents
Examples, etc.
Import
// (Space)
POLYGON
// (Space)
Comment
Lat
Fixed character
Fixed character
Fixed character
Lon
Fixed character
+3
POLYGON
+4
Comments
Comments
+5
35
Fixed character
35.123
Fixed character
Fixed character
139
Fixed character
48.234
Fixed character
Longitude code of the apex
+1
+2
apex
apex
apex
apex
(E/W)
+n
Repeat for the number of
apexes plus two lines

END
(position end)
14-25
14
Reference
f) Circles
Line
m
Contents
Examples, etc.
Import
// (Space)
CIRCLE
// (Space)
Comment
// (Space)
Base Point-Lat
Fixed character
Fixed character
Fixed character
Base Point-Lon
Fixed character
Fixed character
Fixed character
Radius [nm]
+3
CIRCLE
+4
Comments
Comments
+5
35
Fixed character
35.123
Fixed character
Fixed character
139
Fixed character
48.234
Fixed character
Fixed character
Radius
2.0
+1
+2
reference position
reference position
position (N/S)
reference position
reference position
position (E/W)
14
Reference
14-26
g) Ellipses
Line
m
Contents
Examples, etc.
Import
// (Space)
ELLIPSE
// (Space)
Comment
// (Space)
Base Point-Lat
Fixed character
Fixed character
Fixed character
Base Point-Lon
Fixed character
Fixed character
Fixed character
Horizontal Radius [nm]
Fixed character
Vertical Radius [nm]
+3
ELLIPSE
+4
Comments
Comments
+5
35
Fixed character
35.123
Fixed character
Fixed character
139
Fixed character
48.234
Fixed character
Fixed character
Horizontal radius
2.00
Fixed character
Vertical radius
1.50
+1
+2
reference position
reference position
position (N/S)
reference position
reference position
position (E/W)
14-27
14
Reference
h) Fans
Line
m
Contents
Examples, etc.
Import
// (Space)
FAN
// (Space)
Comment
// (Space)
Base Point-Lat
Fixed character
Fixed character
Fixed character
Base Point-Lon
Fixed character
Fixed character
Fixed character
Radius [nm]
Fixed character
Start Angle [deg]
Fixed character
End Angle [deg]
+3
FAN
+4
Comments
Comments
+5
35
Fixed character
35.123
Fixed character
Fixed character
139
Fixed character
48.234
Fixed character
Fixed character
Radius
2.0
Fixed character
Starting angle
120.0
Fixed character
Ending angle
180.0
+1
+2
reference position
reference position
position (N/S)
reference position
reference position
position (E/W)
14
Reference
14-28
i) User Danger Areas

Line
m
Contents
Examples, etc.
Import
// (Space)
DANGER_AREA
// (Space)
Comment
Lat
Fixed character
Fixed character
Fixed character
Lon
Fixed character
+3
DANGER_AREA
+4
Comments
Comments
+5
35
Fixed character
35.123
Fixed character
Fixed character
139
Fixed character
48.234
Fixed character
+1
+2
apex
apex
apex
apex
(E/W)
+n
Repeat for the number of
apexes plus two lines

END
(position end)
14-29
14
Reference
j) Text
Line
m
+1
+2
+3
Contents
Examples, etc.
Import
// (Space)
TEXT
// (Space)
Comment
Lat
Fixed character
Fixed character
Fixed character
Lon
Fixed character
Rotation
TEXT
Fixed character
Text
Fast current. Caution.
+4
Comments
Comments
+5
35
Fixed character
35.123
apex
apex
,
Fixed character
Fixed character
139
Fixed character
48.234
Fixed character
Fixed character
Rotation angle
123
Fixed character
Font size
14
apex
apex
(E/W)
14
Reference
14-30
14.4.3.3 Logbook File

Line
1
Contents
Examples, etc.
Import
// (Space)
LOGBOOK SHEET exported by
// (Space)
<<NOTE>>This strings //
indicate comment column/cells.
string
JRC ECDIS.
2
You can edit freely.

3
No
Fixed character
Date
Fixed character
Time
Fixed character
Fixed character
Fixed character
Event
Fixed character
POS1
Fixed character
POS2
Fixed character
Lat
Fixed character
Fixed character
Fixed character
Lon
Fixed character
Fixed character
Fixed character
COG ()
Fixed character
SOG (kt)
Fixed character
Heading ()
Fixed character
Log (kt)
Fixed character
Av.Speed 4h (kt)
Fixed character
Av.Speed 24h (kt)
Fixed character
14-31
14
Reference
Line
Contents
Examples, etc.
Voyage Dist. (G)(nm)
Fixed character
Voyage Dist. (W)(nm)
Fixed character
Charts
Fixed character
Set ()
Fixed character
Drift (kt),
Fixed character
Wind Dir. (),
Fixed character
Wind Speed (m/sec)
Fixed character
Wave Height (m)
Fixed character
Air Press (hPa)
Fixed character
Temp. (C)
Fixed character
Water Temp. (C)
Fixed character
Engine Rev. (r/min)
Fixed character
Comment
Number
0001
,
Date (LMT)
2002/04/09
Time (LMT)
08:45:24
Fixed character
Time zone
09:00
Fixed character
,
Event type
Specified time
,
POS1 name
POS2 name
GPS1
GPS2
Reference
14
Import
14-32
Line
Contents
Latitude degree value for POS1
Examples, etc.
35
,
Latitude minute value for POS1
35.123
,
Latitude code for POS1 (N/S)
Longitude degree value for

POS1
,
139
Longitude minute value for

POS1
,
48.234
Longitude code for POS1 (E/W)
123.4
12.3
,
Bow heading
123.5
,
Ship speed relative to water
12.4
Average ship speed for last four

hours
,
12.0
Average ship speed for last 24

hours
,
13.2
Total distance relative to land
12345.5
,
Total distance relative to water
JP34OBJ
Set
123.4
12.4
234.5
10.3
,
Wave height
Wind speed
Chart name that caused the

event
,
Wind direction
12300.6
Drift
Ship speed relative to land
Course relative to land
Import
2.0
14-33
14
Reference
Line
Contents
Atmospheric pressure
Examples, etc.
1003
,
Air temperature
23.4
,
Water temperature
20.3
,
Engine revolutions
135.6
,
Comments
n
Comments
Repeat four lines for the number
Reference
of events.
14
Import
14-34
Index
A
Abbreviation for Geodetic System........................ 14-12
Danger detection vector..........................................3-85
Abort......................................................................... 3-7
Deleting system chart .............................................8-92
Accepting S-57 updating chart ............................... 3-68
Depth alarm (S-57/C-MAP Only) ..........................3-124
Adjusting datum (ARCS Only)................................ 3-62
Display alarm history ..............................................3-28
Adjusting radar image ([RADAR]) .......................... 3-29
Display area..............................................................2-5
After-sales service.................................................. 11-2
Display panel ......................................................2-5,2-7
AIS symbols ......................................................... 3-142
Displaying note and diagram (ARCS Only).............3-60
Alarm function ........................................................ 14-2
Displaying playback panel ........................................9-8
Alarm Information of C-MAP Ed.3 Chart ................ 14-7
Displaying user chart ..............................................3-67
Alarm Information of S-57/S-63 Chart .................... 14-8
Disposal..................................................................12-2
Alarm list panel....................................................... 3-26
Drawing area (user chart) .......................................5-32
Alternate route editing mode .................................. 4-58
Drawing lines (user chart).......................................5-29
ARCS chart display (ARCS Only) .......................... 3-55

ARCS PIN .............................................................. 3-19
ARPA symbols...................................................... 3-142
EBL/VRM 2-step operation .....................................3-97
ARPA/AIS list ......................................................... 3-32
EBL/VRM using operation panel.............................3-88
ARPA/AIS target display ON/OFF([AIS/ARPA])...... 3-31
Editing operations (C-MAP Ed.2)............................8-92
Auto sailing status panel ........................................ 2-11
Entering symbols (user chart).................................5-25
Automatic sailing ...................................................... 6-4
Entering text (user chart) ........................................5-36
Automatic sailing system.......................................... 6-2
Event mark (EVENT) ..............................................3-69
Azimuth mode ...................................................... 3-106
F
B
Features ...................................................................1-3
Bearing setting ......................................................... 7-9
File manager.............................................................7-3
Brightness (Adjustment) ......................................... 3-21
Filtering source chart ..............................................8-93

Flowchart (Alternate route) .....................................4-56
Flowchart (For sailing) ............................................3-15
Changing active panel............................................ 3-58
Flowchart (General flow).........................................3-14
Changing display color ([DAY/NIGHT]) .................. 3-24
Flowchart (Graphic editor) ......................................4-34
Changing object category (S-57/C-MAP Only) ....... 3-45
Flowchart (Table editor) ..........................................4-13
Chart display area .................................................... 2-5
Flowchart (User chart file).........................................5-9
Chart editing menu ................................................... 5-4
Function of operation panel ......................................2-2
Chart panel............................................................... 2-8
Function of screen ....................................................2-5
Chart portfolio........................................................... 8-2

Chart symbol (S-57/C-MAP Only) ........................ 3-121
Chart-Related Alarm Information............................ 14-6
Graphic editing menu .............................................4-29
COG vector ............................................................ 3-84
Graphic editing mode .....................................4-28,4-36
Color pattern (S-57)................................................ 10-5
Gray Scale..............................................................10-6
Color test (ARCS Only) .......................................... 7-11
Guard ring...............................................................3-85
Components ............................................................. 1-4

Connection ............................................................... 7-7
Construction ............................................................. 1-7
HDG vector.............................................................3-84
Coordinated universal time (UTC)........................ 3-145
Heading line............................................................3-84
Creating alternate route.......................................... 4-56
Highlighting.............................................................3-73
Creating route using EBL/VRM keys and dials....... 4-53

CSV format............................................................. 4-26
Cursors..................................................................... 3-3
Left-click ...................................................................3-3
Local mean time (LMT).........................................3-145
1/2
Index
Logbook ............................................................... 3-113
Selecting ROUTE ...................................................3-39

Selecting S-57/C-MAP chart ...................................3-66
Selecting startup menu ...........................................3-18
Maneuver curve ................................................... 3-102
Selecting To WP .....................................................3-39
Manual update ....................................................... 5-18
Setting alarm options ............................................3-135
Marking information mark....................................... 3-71
Setting ARPA/AIS options.....................................3-140
Marking tidal stream mark ...................................... 3-72
Setting chart options ............................................. 3-118
Menu operation ........................................................ 3-3
Setting date/time...................................................3-145
Menu title bar ................................................... 2-5,2-12
Setting logbook options ........................................ 3-116
Menu tree .....................................2-12,4-9,4-29,5-4,9-3
Setting radar options ............................................3-139
Merging user charts................................................ 5-16
Setting scales .......................................................3-134
Motion mode ........................................................ 3-106
Shifting chart...........................................................3-47
Multi view screen.................................................... 3-78
Shifting own ship position .....................................3-146
My port list.............................................................3-111
Ship's shape ...........................................................3-83

Sound volume (Adjustment) ...................................3-21
Specifications..........................................................13-2
Names and Functions .............................................. 2-3
Speed setting............................................................7-9
Navigation & Planning screen ................................ 3-20
Startup screen ........................................................3-19
Navtex mark ......................................................... 3-117
Switching range (S-57/C-MAP Only) ......................3-53
Navtex message .................................................. 3-117
Switching scale (S-57/C-MAP Only) .......................3-54
North arrow mark ..................................................... 2-5
System configuration ..............................................1-13
Numerical input ...................................................... 3-12
System restoration in case of abnormal operations 3-37
Over-scale alarm .................................................... 3-52
Table editing menu ...................................................4-9

Table editing mode ...........................................4-8,4-15
Temporary and preliminary notice (ARCS Only) .....3-61
Panel display of ARPA/AIS target........................... 3-36
Time label display ...................................................3-86
Playback................................................................... 9-2
Track display...........................................................3-86
Power OFF............................................................. 3-21
Trackball ...................................................................3-3
Power ON............................................................... 3-17
Troubleshooting .................................................... 10-11
Primary position ....................................................... 7-8
Printing display..................................................... 3-149
User chart edit mode ........................................5-3,5-11
Using analog meter ................................................3-81
Reading out information on the objects .................. 3-75
Using shortcut menu.................................................3-7
Release alarm ([ALARM ACK]) .............................. 3-25

Right-click................................................................. 3-3
Route monitoring and system alarm......................... 6-3
Wide view screen (S-57/C-MAP Only)....................3-80
Route name and extention of file.............................. 4-2

Route options ........................................................... 4-4
Route planning ......................................................... 4-2
Zooming area using rubber band
Route planning using graphic editor ....................... 4-28
(S-57/C-MAP Only).......................................3-51
Route planning using table editor ............................. 4-8
Zooming in/out........................................................3-52
Running fix ........................................................... 3-101
S
Secondary position................................................... 7-8
Selecting all source charts ..................................... 8-92
Selecting high resolution area (ARCS Only) .......... 3-55
Selecting high resolution chart (ARCS Only).......... 3-59
Selecting low resolution chart (ARCS Only) ........... 3-59
Selecting menu ........................................................ 3-3
Index
2/2
END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT

FOR JAN-701/901M SERIES ECDIS SOFTWARE
IMPORTANT-READ CAREFULLY: This End-User License Agreement (EULA) is a
legal agreement between you (either an individual or a single entity) and Japan
Radio Co., Ltd. (JRC) for the JRC ECDIS equipment that includes Microsoft
software products.
You have acquired a device (DEVICE) that includes software licensed by JRC from Microsoft
Licensing Inc. or its affiliates (MS). Those installed software products of MS origin, as well as
associated media, printed materials, and online or electronic documentation (SOFTWARE) are
protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold.
All rights reserved.
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS EULA, DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY THE
SOFTWARE. INSTEAD, PROMPTLY CONTACT JRC FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON RETURN
OF THE UNUSED DEVICE(S) FOR A REFUND. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR
AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE. This EULA grants you the following license:
You may use the SOFTWARE only on the DEVICE.
NOT FAULT TOLERANT. THE SOFTWARE IS NOT FAULT TOLERANT.
JRC HAS
INDEPENDENTLY DETERMINED HOW TO USE THE SOFTWARE IN THE DEVICE, AND MS HAS
RELIED UPON JRC TO CONDUCT SUFFICIENT TESTING TO DETERMINE THAT THE
SOFTWARE IS SUITABLE FOR SUCH USE.
NO WARRANTIES FOR THE SOFTWARE. THE SOFTWARE is provided AS IS and with all
faults. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCUARACY,
AND EFFORT (INCLUDING LACK OF NEGLIGENCE) IS WITH YOU . ALSO THERE IS NO
WARRANTY AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE OR
AGAINST INFRINGEMENT. IF YOU HAVE RECEIVED ANY WARRANTIES REGARDING THE
DEVICE OR THE SOFTWARE, THOSE WARRANTIES DO NOT ORIGINATE FROM, AND ARE
NOT BINDING ON, MS.
Note on Java Support. The SOFTWARE may contain support for programs written in Java. Java
technology is not fault tolerant and is not designed, manufactured, or intended for use or resale as
online control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance, such as in the
operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic control, direct
life support machines, or weapons systems, in which the failure of Java technology could lead
directly to death, personal injury, or severe physical or environmental damage. Sun Microsystems,
Inc. has contractually obligated MS to make this disclaimer.
No Liability for Certain Damages. EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, MS SHALL HAVE NO
LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES
ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE
SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS OF ITS
ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL MS BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS
OF U.S. TWO HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS (U.S.$250.00).
Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation, and Disassembly. You may not reverse
engineer, decompile, or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such
activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation.
SOFTWARE TRANSFER ALLOWED BUT WITH RESTRICTIONS. You may permanently transfer
rights under this EULA only as part of a permanent sale or transfer of the Device, and only if the
recipient agrees to this EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, any transfer must also include all
prior versions of the SOFTWARE.
EXPROT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that SOFTWARE is of US-origin. You agree to
comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE, including the
U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use and country destination
restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments. For additional information on exporting the
SOFTWARE, see http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.
Repair Request Form

Date :
To:
Mr/Ms
Reading
Point of
Contact
Repair
Requested by
TEL
FAX
Address
Ship's Name
Port Name
Product Name
Product No.
Symptom: (in as much detail as possible)

Date of Malfunction:
Desired Repair
Method
Malfunction Location:
Repair On Site/
Repair at JRC Office
Desired
Repair Date
(yyyy.mm.dd)
. . .
JAN-701/901M
ECDIS
INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
For further information,contact:
Not use the asbestos
URL
http://www.jrc.co.jp
Marine Service Department

Telephone : +81-3-3492-1305
+81-3-3779-1420
Facsimile :
tmsc@jrc.co.jp
e-mail :
AMSTERDAM Branch
Telephone : +31-20-658-0750
+31-20-658-0755
Facsimile :
service@jrcams.nl
e-mail :
SEATTLE Branch
Telephone : +1-206-654-5644
Facsimile :
+1-206-654-7030
e-mail :
service@jrcamerica.com
CODE No.7ZPNA0513B
01ETM
JAN. 2007 Edition 3
ISO 9001,
Certified
9001ISO 14001 Certified
JRC
Printedin
in Japan
Japan
Printed

JAN 701 Instruction

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

JAN 701 Instruction

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

JAN-701/901M

For further information,contact:

Not use the asbestos

Marine Service Department

JAN. 2007 Edition 3

Cautions for High Voltage

Precautions for Rescue of Victim of

Method of First-Aid Treatment

Treatment to Give When the Patient Has a

Meouth-to-mouth artificial respiration with the patient's head lifted

(2) Closing the patient's mouth with your

Fig.1 Mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration

Treatment to Give When the Patient Has No

Fig.2 Cardiac massage

This indication is shown where any person is supposed to be

Examples of pictorial indication

mark represents prohibition.

Detailed contents of the prohibited action (Disassembling Prohibited in

Precautions Upon Equipment Operation

Never remove the cover of this equipment.

Do not attempt to disassemble or tamper with this equipment.

This equipment is intended for use as an aid to navigation only.

Edit routes in accordance with the world geodetic system (WGS-84).

If checking of the equipment is unavoidably necessary, be sure to turn off the

Stand-alone type (JAN-901M)

: Automatic Identification System

: Admiralty Raster Chart Service. A raster chart published by UKHO.

: Automatic RADAR Plotting Aid. Collision prevention radar.

: Encryption key for C-MAP Ed.2. Supplied by C-MAP Norway.

: The system automatically navigates to keep the scheduled route. Same as

: Chart CD containing a complete chart data.

: A file containing an encryption key for S-63 chart. Supplied by UKHO,

: Software to manage the charts. Imports and updates the charts.

: C-MAP Edition 2. A digital chart format by C-MAP Norway.

: C-MAP Edition 3. A digital chart format by C-MAP Norway.

: Nautical chart in a digital format by C-MAP Norway.

: Course to steer. Heading command.

: Course Over Ground

: Organization providing S-63 chart.

: Screen displayed on the LCD.

: Electronic Bearing Lines

: Electronic Chart Display and Information System

: Electronic Navigation Chart. Meaning S-57 and S-63.

: Estimated Time of Arrival

: Estimated Time of Departure

: Final ETA. Estimated time of arrival to the final waypoint.

Hydrographic and Oceanographic Department:

: A procedure of enabling the chart supplied by Base CD to be displayed on

: Line between two consecutive waypoints

: Local Mean Time

: Main positioning sensor.

: A Norwegian company supplying charts. Publisher of encrypted charts, S-63.

: Border that indicates the selected range.

: IHO transfer standard for digital hydrographic data.

: IHO Data Protection Scheme

: The display scale.

: System Electronic Navigational Chart

: To operate the ship in order to avoid obstacles during automatic navigation,

: Speed Over Ground

: Numeric representation of depth.

: Track control systems

: United Kingdom Hydrographic Office

Update (for Chart Portfolio)

: A procedure of reflecting the update data supplied by Update CD on the